VFD Abb

ACS550
User’s Manual
ACS550-01 Drives (0.75…160 kW)
ACS550-U1 Drives (1…200 hp)
List of related manuals
GENERAL MANUALS RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter User's Manual
3AFE64504215 (English)
ACS550-01/U1 User's Manual (0.75…160 kW) / SREA-01 Ethernet Adapter User's Manual
3AUA0000042896 (English)
(1…200 hp)
3AFE64804588 (3AUA0000001418) (English) Typical contents
Flange Mounting Instructions • Safety
• Installation
Kit, IP21 / UL type 1 Frame size Code (English) • Programming/Start-up
FMK-A-R1 R1 100000982 • Diagnostics
FMK-A-R2 R2 100000984 • Technical data
FMK-A-R3 R3 100000986
FMK-A-R4 R4 100000988 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
AC8-FLNGMT-R5 1 R5 ACS800-
AC8-FLNGMT-R6 1 R6 PNTG01U-EN Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50, ACS55,
1. Not available for ACS550-01 series ACS150, ACS310, ACS350, ACS355, ACS550, ACH550
Kit, IP54 / UL type 12 Frame size Code (English) and R1-R4 OINT-/SINT-boards
FMK-B-R1 R1 100000990
FMK-B-R2 R2 100000992
FMK-B-R3 R3 100000994 ACS550-01 manuals
FMK-B-R4 R4 100000996
OPTION MANUALS
(delivered with optional equipment)
MFDT-01 FlashDrop User's Manual

OHDI-01 115/230 V Digital Input Module User's Manual
OREL-01 Relay Output Extension Module User's
Manual
OTAC-01 User’s Manual Pulse Encoder Interface
Module User’s Manual
RCAN-01 CANopen Adapter User's Manual
3AFE64504231 (English) CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation
e.V.
RCNA-01 ControlNet Adapter User's Manual
3AFE64506005 (English) ControlNet™ is a trademark of ODVA™.
RDNA-01 DeviceNet Adapter User's Manual DeviceNet™ is a trademark of ODVA™.
3AFE64504223 (English) DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User
RECA-01 EtherCAT Adapter Module User's Manual Group e.V.
3AUA0000043520 (English) EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented
REPL-01 Ethernet POWERLINK Adapter Module technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH,
User's Manual Germany.
EtherNet/IP™ is a trademark of ODVA™.
REPL-02 Ethernet POWERLINK Adapter Module
User's Manual ETHERNET POWERLINK is a trademark of Bernecker +
Rainer Industrie-ElektronikGes.m.b.H.
Modbus and Modbus/TCP are registered trademarks of
RETA-01 Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual
3AFE64539736 (English) Schneider Automation Inc.
RETA-02 Ethernet Adapter Module User's Manual PROFIBUS, PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO are
3AFE68895383 (English) registered trademarks of Profibus International.
ACS550-01/U1 Drives
0.75…160 kW
1…200 hp
User’s Manual
3AFE64804588 (3AUA0000001418) Rev H

EN
EFFECTIVE: 2014-07-04
SUPERSEDES: 3AFE64804588 (3AUA0000001418) Rev G 2009-07-07
 2014 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual 5
Safety instructions
Use of warnings and notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual:
• Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a
subject.
• Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death
and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger. The
warning symbols are used as follows:
Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical
injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by electricity,
which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General safety
WARNING! Obey these instructions. If you ignore them, injury or death, or damage
to the equipment can occur.
• Use safety shoes to avoid foot injury.

• Handle the drive carefully.
• Beware of hot surfaces. Some parts, such as heatsinks, remain hot for a while
after disconnection of the electrical supply. See chapter Technical data on page
277.
• Keep the drive in its package or protect it otherwise from dust and burr from
drilling and grinding until you install it. Protect also the installed drive against dust
and burr. Electrically conductive debris inside the drive can cause damage or
malfunction.
Electrical safety
WARNING! The ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a

qualified electrician.
WARNING! Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage is present at the
power circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2 and, depending on the frame
size, UDC+ and UDC-, or BRK+ and BRK-.
Safety instructions
6 ACS550-01/U1 User’s Manual
WARNING! Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected. After

disconnecting the supply, wait at least 5 minutes (to let the intermediate circuit
capacitors discharge) before removing the cover.
WARNING! Even when power is switched off from the input terminals of the
ACS550, there may be dangerous voltage (from external sources) on the terminals
of the relay outputs RO1…RO3.
WARNING! When the control terminals of two or more drives are connected in
parallel, the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a
single source which can either be one of the drives or an external supply.
WARNING! If you install the drive on an IT system (an ungrounded power system or
a high-resistance-grounded [over 30 ohms] power system), disconnect the internal
EMC filter, otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the
EMC filter capacitors. This can cause danger or damage the drive.
If you install the drive on a corner-grounded TN system, disconnect the internal EMC
filter, otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC
filter capacitors. This will damage the drive.
Note: Disconnecting the internal EMC filter increases the conducted emission and
reduces the drive EMC compatibility considerably.
See section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27. Also see sections IT
systems on page 286 and Corner-grounded TN systems on page 285.
WARNING! Do not attempt to install or remove EM1, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while

power is applied to the drive’s input terminals.
Maintenance
WARNING! The ACS550-01/U1 is not field repairable. Never attempt to repair a

malfunctioning drive; contact your local ABB representative for replacement.
Safety instructions
Control of the drive and motor
WARNING! Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device (disconnecting
means); instead, use the control panel start and stop keys and , or
commands via the I/O board of the drive. The maximum allowed number of charging
cycles of the DC capacitors (i.e. power-ups by applying power) is five in ten minutes.
WARNING! The ACS550 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption
if the external run command is on.
Note: For more technical information, contact your local ABB representative.
Safety instructions
Safety instructions
Table of contents
List of related manuals
Safety instructions
Use of warnings and notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Control of the drive and motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Table of contents
Contents of this manual

Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation
Installation flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Preparing for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Installing the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

How to start up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
How to perform the ID Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Control panels
About control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Application macros
ABB Standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Motor Potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Hand-Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
PID Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
PFC macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Torque Control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Connection for obtaining 0…10 V from analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
User parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Table of contents
Macro default values for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Parameters
Complete parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Complete parameter descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Embedded fieldbus
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Mechanical and electrical installation – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Communication set-up – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Activate drive control functions – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Feedback from the drive – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Diagnostics – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Modbus protocol technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ABB control profiles technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Fieldbus adapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Mechanical and electrical installation – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Communication set-up – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Activate drive control functions – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Feedback from the drive – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Diagnostics – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
ABB Drives profile technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Generic profile technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Diagnostics
Diagnostic displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Correcting faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Correcting alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Maintenance
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Main fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Internal enclosure fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Technical data
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Input power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Brake components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Losses, cooling data and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Table of contents
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Compliance with the IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 +A1:2012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Index
Further information
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Table of contents
Table of contents
Compatibility
This manual covers ACS550-01/U1 drives. The manual is compatible with the
ACS550-01/U1 drive firmware version 3.14e or later. See parameter 3301
FIRMWARE on page 155.
Intended use
The ACS550-01/U1 is a general purpose drive. The macros should only be applied
to the applications defined in the respective section.
Intended audience
This manual is intended for personnel who install, commission, operate and service
the drive. Read the manual before working on the drive. The reader is expected to
know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical components and electrical
schematic symbols.


Installation
Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding. Failure to observe

the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard.
WARNING! Before you begin read chapter Safety instructions on page 5.
Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable
local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if
the recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience
problems that the warranty does not cover.
Installation flow chart

The installation of the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below.
The steps must be carried out in the order shown. At the right of each step are
references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the drive.
Task See
PREPARE for installation Preparing for installation on page 16
PREPARE the mounting location Prepare the mounting location on page 20
REMOVE the front cover Remove the front cover on page 21
MOUNT the drive Mount the drive on page 22
INSTALL wiring Wiring overview on page 23 and

Check the insulation of the assembly on page 30
CHECK installation Check installation on page 35
REINSTALL the cover Reinstall the cover on page 36
START-UP How to start up the drive on page 37
Installation
Preparing for installation
Lifting the drive

Lift the drive only by the metal
chassis.
Unpacking the drive

1. Unpack the drive.
2. Check for any damage and
notify the shipper immediately
if damaged components are
found. IP2040
3. Check the contents against

the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received.
Drive identification
Drive labels
To determine the type of drive you are installing, refer to either:
• serial number label attached on upper part of the choke plate between the
mounting holes, or
Type designation
Serial number
• type designation label attached on the heat sink – on the right side of the drive
cover. Two examples of the type designation label are given below.
Serial number
Type designation
Serial number
Type designation
Installation
The labels contain information on the Type designation (page 17), Ratings and frame
size (page 17), Serial number (page 17), degree of protection (see also Degrees of
protection on page 306) and valid markings (see also Markings on page 309).
Type designation
Use the following chart to interpret the type designation found on both the type
designation and the serial number label.
ACS550-01-08A8-4+J404+…
AC, Standard Drive – 550 product series
Construction (region specific)

01 = Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance
U1 = Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance
Output current rating

e.g. 08A8 = 8.8 A, see section Ratings on page 277 for details
Voltage rating
2 = 208…240 V AC
4 = 380…480 V AC
6 = 500…600 V AC
Options
Examples of options:
B055 = IP54 / UL type 12 (no specification = IP21 / UL type 1).
UL type 12 is not available for type ACS550-01-290A-4.
0J400 = No control panel
J404 = ACS-CP-C Basic Control Panel
L511 = OREL-01 Relay output extension
K451 = RDNA-01 DeviceNet
K454 = RPBA-01 PROFIBUS DP
Ratings and frame size

The chart in section Ratings on page 277 lists technical specifications and identifies
the drive’s frame size – significant, since some instructions in this document vary,
depending on the drive’s frame size. To read the ratings table, you need the “Output
current rating” entry from the type designation. Also, when using the ratings table,
note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive’s “Voltage rating”.
Serial number
The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below.
Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX, where
C: Country of manufacture
YY: Year of manufacture
WW: Week of manufacture; 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, …
XXXXX: Integer starting every week from 00001.
Installation
Motor compatibility
The motor, drive and supply power must be compatible:
Motor
Verify Reference
specification
Motor type 3-phase induction motor –
Nominal current Motor value is within this • Type designation label on drive, entry for
range: 0.2…2.0 · I2hd Output I2hd, or
(I2hd = drive heavy duty • Type designation on drive and rating table in
current) chapter Technical data on page 277.
Nominal frequency 10…500 Hz –
Voltage range Motor is compatible with 208…240 V (for ACS550-X1-XXXX-2) or
the ACS550 voltage range. 380…480 V (for ACS550-X1-XXXX-4) or
500…600 V (for ACS550-U1-XXXX-6)
Insulation 500…600 V drives: Either For ACS550-U1-XXXX-6
the motor complies with
NEMA MG1 Part 31, or a
du/dt filter is used between
the motor and drive.
Tools required
To install the ACS550 you need the following:
• screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware used)
• wire stripper
• tape measure
• drill
• for installations involving ACS550-U1, frame sizes R5 or R6 and IP54 / UL type
12 enclosures: punch for creating conduit mounting holes
• for installations involving ACS550-U1, frame size R6: appropriate crimping tool
for power cable lugs. See section Power terminal considerations – R6 frame size
on page 287.
• mounting hardware: screws or nuts and bolts, four each. The type of hardware
depends on the mounting surface and the frame size. For the dimensions and
weights of the frames, see Dimensions and weights on page 303.
Frame size Mounting hardware
R1…R4 M5 #10
R5 M6 1/4 in
R6 M8 5/16 in
Suitable environment and enclosure

Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements. To prevent damage
prior to installation, store and transport the drive according to the environmental
requirements specified for storage and transportation. See section Ambient
conditions on page 307.
Installation
Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate, based on the site contamination level:
• IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure: The site must be free of airborne dust, corrosive
gases or liquids, and conductive contaminants such as dripping water,
condensation, carbon dust and metallic particles.
• IP54 / UL type 12 enclosure: This enclosure provides protection from airborne
dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions.
• If, for some reason, an IP21 drive needs to be installed without the conduit box or
cover, or an IP54 drive without the conduit plate or hood, see the note in chapter
Technical data, page 310.
Suitable mounting location

Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints:
• The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth, solid surface, and in a suitable
environment as defined above. For horizontal installation, contact your local ABB
representative for more information.
• The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions (see
section Outside dimensions on page 304), plus air flow space around the drive
(see section Losses, cooling data and noise on page 301).
• The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor
cable length. See section Motor connection specifications on page 289.
• The mounting site must support the drive’s modest weight. See section Weight on
page 306.
Installation
Installing the drive
WARNING! Before installing the ACS550, ensure the input power supply to the drive
is off.
For flange mounting (mounting the drive in a cooling air duct), see the appropriate
Flange Mounting Instructions:
IP21 / UL type 1 IP54 / UL type 12
Frame size
Kit Code (English) Kit Code (English)
R1 FMK-A-R1 100000982 FMK-B-R1 100000990
R2 FMK-A-R2 100000984 FMK-B-R2 100000992
R3 FMK-A-R3 100000986 FMK-B-R3 100000994
R4 FMK-A-R4 100000988 FMK-B-R4 100000996
R5 AC8-FLNGMT-R5 1
ACS800-PNTG01U- - -
1 EN
R6 AC8-FLNGMT-R6 - -
1. Not available in ACS550-01 series.
Prepare the mounting location

The ACS550 should only be mounted where all of the
requirements defined in section Preparing for installation
on page 16 are met.
1. Mark the position of the mounting holes with the help of 1
the mounting template provided with the drive. X0002
2. Drill the holes.
Note: Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top. Use only two. If
possible, use the two outside holes (to allow room to remove the fan for
maintenance).
Note: ACS400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes. For R1 and
R2 frame sizes, the mounting holes are identical. For R3 and R4 frame sizes, the
inside mounting holes on the top of ACS550 drives match ACS400 mounts.
Installation
Remove the front cover

3
IP21 / UL type 1
1. Remove the control panel, if attached.
2
2. Loosen the captive screw at the top.
3. Pull near the top to remove the cover.
IP2000
IP54 / UL type 12 R6 R1…R5
1. If hood is present: Remove screws

(2) holding hood in place. 1
2
1
2. If hood is present: Slide hood up and
off of the cover.
3. Loosen the captive screws around
the edge of the cover.
4. Remove the cover.
4
FM
Installation
Mount the drive 1
IP21 / UL type 1
1. Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or
bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.
Note: Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis (frame

size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top).
2
2. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning

sticker in the appropriate language over the existing
warning on the top of the module. IP2002
IP54 / UL type 12
For the IP54 / UL type 12 enclosures, rubber plugs are required in the holes
provided for access to the drive mounting slots.
1. As required for access, remove the rubber plugs. 3
Push plugs out from the back of the drive.
2. R5 & R6: Align the sheet metal hood (not shown) in
front of the drive’s top mounting holes. (Attach as
part of next step.) 1, 4
3. Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or
bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.
5
Note: Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis (frame
size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top).
4. Reinstall the rubber plugs. FM
5. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language

over the existing warning on the top of the module.
Installation
Wiring overview
Conduit/Gland kit
Wiring drives with the IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure requires a conduit/gland kit with the
following items:
• conduit/gland box
• five (5) cable clamps (ACS550-01 only)
• screws
• cover.
The kit is included with IP21 / UL type 1 enclosures.
Wiring requirements
WARNING! Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACS550. The drive must
be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in
section Preparing for installation on page 16. If in doubt, contact your local ABB
representative.
As you install the wiring, observe the following:

• There are four sets of wiring instructions – one set for each combination of drive
enclosure type (IP21 / UL type and IP54 / UL type 12) and wiring type (conduit or
cable). Be sure to select the appropriate procedure.
• Determine electro-magnetic compliance (EMC) requirements per local codes.
See section Motor cable requirements for CE & C-Tick compliance on page 293.
In general:
– Follow local codes for cable size.
– Keep these four classes of wiring separated: input power wiring, motor wiring,
control/communications wiring and braking unit wiring.
• When installing input power and motor wiring, refer to the following, as
appropriate:
Terminal Description Specifications and notes
U1, V1, W11 3-phase power supply input Input power connections on page 281
PE Protective Ground Ground connections on page 285
U2, V2, W2 Power output to motor Motor connections on page 289
1
The ACS550 -x1-xxxx-2 (208…240 V series) can be used with a single phase supply, if output
current is derated by 50%. For single phase supply voltage, connect power at U1 and W1.
• To locate input power and motor connection terminals, see section Power
connection diagrams on page 25. For specifications on power terminals, see
section Drive’s power connection terminals on page 286.
• For corner-grounded TN systems, see section Corner-grounded TN systems on
page 285.
• For IT systems, see section IT systems on page 286.
Installation
• For frame size R6, see section Power terminal considerations – R6 frame size on
page 287 to install the appropriate cable lugs.
• For drives using braking (optional), refer to the following, as appropriate:
Frame size Terminal Description Braking accessory
R1, R2 BRK+, BRK- Braking resistor Braking resistor. See section Brake
components on page 295.
R3, R4, R5, R6 UDC+, UDC- DC bus Contact your ABB representative to
order either:
• braking unit or
• chopper and resistor
• When installing control wiring, refer to the following chapters or sections, as

appropriate:
– Control terminals table on page 28
– Control connections on page 299
– Application macros on page 77
– Complete parameter descriptions on page 106
– Embedded fieldbus on page 203
– Fieldbus adapter on page 237.
Installation
Power connection diagrams

The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3, which, in
general, applies to frame sizes R1…R6, except for the R5/R6 power and ground
terminals.
J1 – DIP switches for analog inputs (two types can be used)
J1 J1 Diagram shows the R3 frame.
AI1: (in voltage position) Other frames have similar layouts.
ON
1 2
ON
AI2: (in current position)
ON
Panel connector
X1 – Analog inputs and outputs

(and 10 V ref. voltage output)
FlashDrop option
X1 – Digital inputs
(and 24 V aux. voltage output) Power LED (green)
Fault LED (red)
X1 – Relay outputs
J2 – DIP switch
for RS485 termination Optional module 1
J2 J2 X1 – Communications
(RS485)
ON
ON
Optional module 2
off position on position
Power input Power output to motor

(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2)
Frame sizes
R5/R6 differ.
See EM3
next page. EM1
GND
PE
3AUA0000001571
Optional braking
Frame Terminal
Brake options
size labels
R1, R2 BRK+, BRK- Brake resistor
R3, R4 UDC+, UDC- • Braking unit
• Chopper and resistor
WARNING! To avoid danger, or damage to the drive, on IT systems and corner-

grounded TN systems, see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27.
Installation
The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes
R5 and R6end
R5 R6
F2
F1
F2
PE GND
X0011
GND

(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2) F1
Optional braking
Frame Terminal
Brake options
size labels
R5, R6 UDC+, UDC- • Braking unit
• Chopper and resistor
X0013
PE GND
(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2)
WARNING! To avoid danger, or damage to the drive, on IT systems and corner-

grounded TN systems, see section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27.
Installation
Disconnecting the internal EMC filter

On certain types of systems, you must disconnect the internal EMC filter, otherwise
the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors,
which might cause danger, or damage the drive.
Note: Disconnecting the internal EMC filter increases the conducted emission and
reduces the drive EMC compatibility considerably.
The following table shows the installation rules for the EMC filter screws in order to
connect or disconnect the filter, depending on the system type and the frame size.
For more information on the different system types, see IT systems on page 286 and
Corner-grounded TN systems on page 285.
The locations of screws EM1 and EM3 are shown in the diagram on page 25. The
locations of screws F1 and F2 are shown in the diagram on page 26.
Symmetrically IT systems (ungrounded
Frame Corner-grounded
Screw grounded TN systems or high-resistance-
sizes TN systems
(TN-S systems) grounded [> 30 ohm])
EM1 x x
R1…R3
EM31 x
EM1 x x –
R4 1
EM3 x – –
F1 x x –
R5…R6
F2 x x –
x = Install the screw. (EMC filter will be connected.)
= Replace the screw with the provided polyamide screw. (EMC filter will be disconnected.)
– = Remove the screw. (EMC filter will be disconnected.)
1 ACS550-U1 drives are shipped with screw EM3 already removed.
Installation
Control terminals table

The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive.
X1 Hardware description
1 SCR Terminal for signal cable shield (screen). (Connected internally to chassis ground.)
2 AI1 Analog input channel 1, programmable. Default2 = frequency reference. Resolution
0.1%, accuracy ±1%.
Two different DIP switch types can be used.
J1: AI1 OFF: 0…10 V (Ri = 312 kohm)
ON
ON ON
1
J1: AI1 ON: 0…20 mA (Ri = 100 ohm)
ON
1
3 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 Mohm).
Analog I/O
4 +10 V Potentiometer reference source: 10 V ±2%, max. 10 mA (1 kohm < R < 10 kohm).
5 AI2 Analog input channel 2, programmable. Default2 = not used. Resolution 0.1%,
accuracy ±1%.
Two different DIP switch types can be used.
J1: AI2 OFF: 0…10 V (Ri = 312 kohm)
ON
ON ON
1
J1: AI2 ON: 0…20 mA (Ri = 100 ohm)
ON
1
6 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 Mohm).
7 AO1 Analog output, programmable. Default2 = frequency. 0…20 mA (load < 500 ohm).
Accuracy ±3%.
8 AO2 Analog output, programmable. Default2 = current. 0…20 mA (load < 500 ohm).
Accuracy ±3%.
9 AGND Analog output circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 Mohm).
10 +24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC / 250 mA (reference to GND), short circuit
protected.
11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common (connected internally as floating).
12 DCOM Digital input common. To activate a digital input, there must be  10 V
(or  -10 V) between that input and DCOM. The 24 V may be provided by the
Digital inputs1
ACS550 (X1-10) or by an external 12…24 V source of either polarity.

13 DI1 Digital input 1, programmable. Default2 = start/stop.
14 DI2 Digital input 2, programmable. Default2 = fwd/rev.
15 DI3 Digital input 3, programmable. Default2 = constant speed sel (code).
16 DI4 Digital input 4, programmable. Default2 = constant speed sel (code).
17 DI5 Digital input 5, programmable. Default2 = ramp pair selection (code).
18 DI6 Digital input 6, programmable. Default2 = not used.
Installation
X1 Hardware description
19 RO1C Relay output 1, programmable. Default2 = Ready
20 RO1A Maximum: 250 V AC / 30 V DC, 2 A
Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
Relay outputs 21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable. Default2 = Running
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable. Default2 = Fault (-1)
27 RO3B
1 Digital input impedance 1.5 kohm. Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V.
2
Default values depend on the macro used. Values specified are for the default macro. See chapter
Application macros on page 77.
Note: Terminals 3, 6 and 9 are at the same potential.
Note: For safety reasons the fault relay signals a “fault” when the ACS550 is
powered down.
WARNING! All ELV (Extra Low Voltage) circuits connected to the drive must be used
within a zone of equipotential bonding, i.e. within a zone where all simultaneously
accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages
appearing between them. This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding.
The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to
the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in
EN 50178, provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil
the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m (6562 ft).
You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration.
PNP connection (source) NPN connection (sink)
X1 X1
10 +24V 10 +24V
11 GND 11 GND
12 DCOM 12 DCOM
13 DI1 13 DI1
14 DI2 14 DI2
15 DI3 15 DI3
16 DI4 16 DI4
17 DI5 17 DI5
18 DI6 18 DI6
Installation
Check the insulation of the assembly

Drive
Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests on any part of the
drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has been tested for insulation
between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory. Also, there are voltage-
limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically.
Supply cable
Check the insulation of the supply (input) cable according to local regulations before
connecting to the drive.
Motor and motor cable
Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:
1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor, and disconnected from the
drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2.
2. Measure the insulation resistance between phase
U1
conductors and between each phase conductor and M
V1
the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring 3~
ohm W1
voltage of 1000 V DC. The insulation resistance of an PE
ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm (reference value
at 25 °C or 77 °F). For the insulation resistance of
other motors, please consult the manufacturer’s instructions. Note: Moisture inside
the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance. If moisture is suspected, dry
the motor and repeat the measurement.
Install the wiring

Wiring IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure with cables
1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit/gland
box. (See section Conduit/Gland kit on page 23.)
2
2. Install the cable clamps for the power/motor cables.
1 X0004
Installation
3. On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back far 6

enough to route individual wires.
7
4. On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far
enough to expose the copper wire shield so that the 6
4
shield can be twisted into a bundle (pig-tail). Keep the 3
bundle not longer than five times its width to minimize
noise radiation. 8
360° grounding under the clamp is recommended for IP2001
the motor cable to minimize noise radiation. In this Frame Tightening torque
case, remove the sheathing at the cable clamp. size N·m lb·ft
5. Route both cables through the clamps. R1, R2 1.4 1
R3 2.5 1.8
6. Strip and connect the power/motor wires and the R4 5.6; PE: 2 4; PE 1.5
power ground wire to the drive terminals. See the R5 15 11
table on the right for tightening torques. R6 40; PE: 8 30; PE: 6
Note: For R6 frame size, refer to section Power 8

terminal considerations – R6 frame size on page 287.
7. Connect the bundle (pig-tail) created from the motor

cable shield to the GND terminal.
8. Install conduit/gland box and tighten the cable clamps. X0005
9. Install the cable clamp(s) for the control cable(s).

(Power/motor cables and clamps not shown in the
figure.)
9
X0006
10. Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper

shield into a bundle (pig-tail).
12
11. Route control cable(s) through clamp(s) and tighten
13
clamp(s).
12. Connect the ground shield bundle (pig-tail) for digital and
analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only at the drive end.)
13. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the
drive terminals. See section Control terminals table
on page 28. Use a tightening torque of 0.4 N·m
11
(0.3 lb·ft).
14. Install the conduit/gland box cover (1 screw).
IP2003
Installation
Wiring IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure with conduit

1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit/gland
box. (See section Conduit/Gland kit on page 23.)
2. Install thin-wall conduit clamps (not supplied).
2 X0007
3. Install conduit/gland box.

4. Connect conduit runs to box. 3
X0005
5. Route input power and motor wiring through 7

conduits (must be separate conduit runs).
6. Strip wires.
7
7. Connect power, motor and ground wires to the drive
terminals. See the table on the right for tightening 5
torques. 4 IP2004
Note: For R6 frame size, refer to section Power Frame Tightening torque
terminal considerations – R6 frame size on page size N·m lb·ft
287. R1, R2 1.4 1
R3 2.5 1.8
R4 5.6; PE: 2 4; PE 1.5
R5 15 11
R6 40; PE: 8 30; PE: 6
8. Route the control cable through the conduit (must be
separate from input power and motor conduit runs).
10
9. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper
shield into a bundle (pig-tail). 11
10. Connect the ground shield bundle (pig-tail) for digital
and analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only at the
drive end.)
drive terminals. See section Control terminals table 8
(0.3 lb·ft).
12. Install the conduit/gland box cover (1 screw).
IP2005
Installation
Wiring IP54 / UL type 12 enclosure with cables

1. Cut the cable seals as needed for the power, motor
and control cables. The cable seals are cone-
shaped, rubber seals on the bottom of the drive.
The conical part of the seals must face downwards
when the seals are inserted in the lead-through
plate holes.
IP5003
1
2. On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back
far enough to route individual wires. 5
3. On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far
enough to expose the copper wire shield so that 2
3
the shield can be twisted into a bundle (pig-tail). 4 4
Keep the bundle not longer than five times its width
to minimize noise radiation.
360° grounding under the clamp is recommended
for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation. In IP5004
this case, remove the sheathing at the cable

clamp. Frame Tightening torque
size N·m lb·ft
4. Route both cables through the clamps and tighten
R1, R2 1.4 1
the clamps. R3 2.5 1.8
5. Strip and connect the power/motor wires and the R4 5.6; PE: 2 4; PE 1.5
power ground wire to the drive terminals. See the R5 15 11
R6 40; PE: 8 30; PE: 6
table on the right for tightening torques.
Note: For R6 frame size, refer to section Power terminal considerations – R6 frame
size on page 287.
6. Connect the bundle (pig-tail) created from the

motor cable shield to the GND terminal.
7. Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper
shield into a bundle (pig-tail).
8. Route control cable(s) through clamp(s) and
tighten clamp(s). 9, 10
9. Connect the ground shield bundle (pig-tail) for

digital and analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only
at the drive end.)
drive terminals. See section Control terminals table
8
(0.3 lb·ft).
IP5005
Installation
Wiring IP54 / UL type 12 enclosure with conduit

1. Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit
will be installed. (The cable seals are cone-shaped,
rubber seals on the bottom of the drive.)
IP5013
1
2. For each conduit run, install water tight conduit
connectors (not supplied).
IP5016
3. Route the power wiring through the conduit.
6
4. Route the motor wiring through the conduit.
5. Strip the wires.
6. Connect the power, motor and ground wires to the
drive terminals. See the table on the right for 3
4
tightening torques. IP5007
Frame Tightening torque

Note: For R6 frame size, refer to section Power size N·m lb·ft
terminal considerations – R6 frame size on page R1, R2 1.4 1
287. R3 2.5 1.8
R4 5.6; PE: 2 4; PE 1.5
R5 15 11
7. Route the control cable through the conduit.
R6 40; PE: 8 30; PE: 6
8. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the
copper shield into a bundle (pig-tail).
9. Connect the ground shield bundle (pig-tail) for digital and analog I/O cables at X1-1.
(Ground only at the drive end.)
10. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals. See section
Control terminals table on page 28. Use a tightening torque of 0.4 N·m (0.3 lb·ft).
Installation
Check installation
Before applying power, perform the following checks.
Check
Installation environment conforms to the drive’s specifications for ambient conditions.
The drive is mounted securely.
Space around the drive meets the drive’s specifications for cooling.
The motor and driven equipment are ready for start.
For IT systems and corner-grounded TN systems: The internal EMC filter is disconnected (see
section Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27).
The drive is properly grounded.
The input power (mains) voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.
The input power (mains) connections at U1, V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as
specified.
The input power (mains) fuses are installed.
The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified.
The motor cable is routed away from other cables.
NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable.
The control connections are connected and tightened as specified.
NO tools or foreign objects (such as drill shavings) are inside the drive.
NO alternate power source for the motor (such as a bypass connection) is connected – no
voltage is applied to the output of the drive.
Installation
Reinstall the cover

1
IP21 / UL type 1
1. Align the cover and slide it on.
2. Tighten the captive screw. 2
3. Reinstall the control panel.

4. Continue with start-up. See chapter Start-up,
control with I/O and ID Run on page 37. 3
IP2009
IP54 / UL type 12 R6 R1…R5

1. Align the cover and slide it on.
2. Tighten the captive screws around 4
3
the edge of the cover. 4
3. Slide the hood down over the top

of the cover. (Only needed for UL
type 12 installations.)
4. Install the two screws that attach
the hood. (Only needed for UL 5
type 12 installations.) 6
5. Install the control panel.
1
Note: The control panel window
must be closed to comply with 2 FM
IP54 / UL type 12.
6. Optional: Add a lock (not supplied) to secure the control panel window.
7. Continue with start-up. See chapter Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run on page
37.
Installation
The chapter instructs how to:

• perform the start-up
• start, stop, change the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor
through the I/O interface
• perform an Identification Run for the drive.
Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter. For
details on how to use the control panel, refer to chapter Control panels starting on
page 47.
How to start up the drive

How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have.
• If you have an Assistant Control Panel, you can either run the Start-up
Assistant (see section How to perform the guided start-up on page 42) or perform
a limited start-up (see section How to perform the limited start-up on page 37).
The Start-up Assistant, which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only,
guides you through all essential settings to be done. In the limited start-up, the
drive gives no guidance; you go through the very basic settings by following the
instructions given in the manual.
• If you have a Basic Control Panel, follow the instructions given in section How
to perform the limited start-up on page 37.
How to perform the limited start-up

For the limited start-up, you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control
Panel. The instructions below are valid for both control panels, but the displays
shown are the Basic Control Panel displays, unless the instruction applies to the
Assistant Control Panel only.
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions given in chapter Safety instructions must be followed during
the start-up procedure.
The drive will start up automatically at power up, if the external run command is on.
Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Installation, page 35.

Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
• there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
• an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. ID Run is essential only in
applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.
POWER-UP
Apply input power.
The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode.
REM
OUTPUT
00
.
FWD
Hz
The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to run the Start- REM CHOICE
Do you want to
up Assistant. If you press EXIT , the Start-up Assistant is not use the start-up
run, and you can continue with manual start-up in a similar assistant?
Yes
manner as described below for the Basic Control Panel. No
EXIT 00:00 OK
MANUAL ENTRY OF START-UP DATA (Group 99: START-UP DATA)

If you have an Assistant Control Panel, select the language REM PAR EDIT
(the Basic Control Panel does not support languages). See 9901 LANGUAGE
parameter 9901 for the values of the available language ENGLISH
alternatives. You find parameter descriptions in section [0]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Complete parameter descriptions starting on page 106.
The general parameter setting procedure is described below for the Basic
Control Panel. You find more detailed instructions for the Basic Control Panel
on page 73. Instructions for the Assistant Control Panel are on page 55.
The general parameter setting procedure:

1. To go to the Main menu, press
otherwise press
if the bottom line shows OUTPUT;
repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom.
REM
rEF
MENU FWD
2. Press keys / until you see “PAr” and press .

REM
-01- PAR FWD
3. Find the appropriate parameter group with keys /

.
and press
REM
2001 PAR FWD
4. Find the appropriate parameter in the group with keys / .

REM
2002 PAR FWD
5. Press and hold for about two seconds until the parameter value is
shown with SET under the value. REM
1500 PAR SET FWD
rpm
/
6. Change the value with keys
you keep the key pressed down.
. The value changes faster while
REM
1600 PAR SET FWD
rpm
7. Save the parameter value by pressing .

REM
2002 PAR FWD

Select the application macro (parameter 9902). The general

parameter setting procedure is given above.
REM
9902PAR FWD
The default value 1 (ABB STANDARD) is suitable in most cases.
Select the motor control mode (parameter 9904).

1 (VECTOR:SPEED) is suitable in most cases. 2 (VECTOR:TORQ) is suitable for
torque control applications. 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) is recommended
REM
9904PAR FWD
• for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the
drive is variable
• when the nominal current of the motor is less than 20% of the nominal
current of the drive
• when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected.
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate: Note: Set the motor data to
exactly the same value as on
the motor nameplate. For
ABB Motors example, if the motor nominal
3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4
speed is 1470 rpm on the
IEC 200 M/L 55
No nameplate, setting the value of
Ins.cl. F IP 55 parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM
V Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the
690 Y 50 30 1475 32.5 0.83
400 D 50 30 1475 56 0.83 wrong operation of the drive.
660 Y 50 30 1470 34 0.83 380 V
380 D 50 30 1470 59 0.83 supply
415 D 50 30 1475 54 0.83
440 D 35 1770 59 0.83
voltage
60
Cat. no 3GAA 202 001 - ADA
6312/C3 6210/C3 180

IEC 34-1
• motor nominal voltage (parameter 9905)

REM
9905PAR FWD
• motor nominal current (parameter 9906)

Allowed range: 0.2…2.0 · I2hd A
REM
9906PAR FWD
• motor nominal frequency (parameter 9907)

REM
9907PAR FWD
• motor nominal speed (parameter 9908)

REM
9908PAR FWD
• motor nominal power (parameter 9909)

REM
9909PAR FWD

Select the motor identification method (parameter 9910).

The default value 0 (OFF/IDMAGN) using the identification magnetization is suitable for most
applications. It is applied in this basic start-up procedure. Note however that this requires
that:
• parameter 9904 is set to 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ), or
• parameter 9904 is set to 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 is set to 3 (SCALAR FLYST)
or 5 (FLY + BOOST).
If your selection is 0 (OFF/IDMAGN), move to the next step.
Value 1 (ON), which performs a separate ID Run, should be selected if:
• vector control mode is used [parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ)],
and/or
• the operation point is near zero speed, and/or
• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and
without any measured speed feedback is required.
If you decide to do the ID Run [value 1 (ON)], continue by following the separate instructions
given on page 45 in section How to perform the ID Run and then return to step DIRECTION
OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 40.
IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATION WITH ID RUN SELECTION 0 (OFF/IDMAGN)
As stated above, the identification magnetization is performed only if:
• parameter 9904 is set to 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ), or
• parameter 9904 is set to 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 is set to 3 (SCALAR FLYST)
or 5 (FLY + BOOST).
Press key LOC
REM to switch to local control (LOC shown on the left).
Press to start the drive. The motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor
for 10 to 15 s at zero speed (motor not rotating).
DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION
Check the direction of the motor rotation.
• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the left),
switch to local control by pressing LOC
• To go to the Main menu, press
REM .
if the bottom line shows

LOC
xxx
.SET FWD
Hz
OUTPUT; otherwise press repeatedly until you see

MENU at the bottom.
• Press keys / until you see “rEF” and press .
• Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value
with key .
• Press to start the motor.
• Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as
indicated on the display (FWD means forward and REV
reverse).
• Press to stop the motor.

To change the direction of the motor rotation:

• Disconnect input power from the drive, and wait 5 minutes forward
direction
for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge. Measure
the voltage between each input terminal (U1, V1 and W1)
and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the drive is
discharged. reverse
direction
• Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors
at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box.
• Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the
check as described above.
SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES
Set the minimum speed (parameter 2001). LOC
2001PAR FWD
Set the maximum speed (parameter 2002). LOC

2002PAR FWD
Set the acceleration time 1 (parameter 2202).

Note: Check also acceleration time 2 (parameter 2205) if two
LOC
2202PAR FWD
acceleration times will be used in the application.
Set the deceleration time 1 (parameter 2203).
Note: Set also deceleration time 2 (parameter 2206) if two
LOC
2203PAR FWD
deceleration times will be used in the application.
SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK
The start-up is now completed. However, it might be useful at
this stage to set the parameters required by your application
and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in
LOC
9902PAR FWD
section User parameter sets on page 88.

Check that the drive state is OK.
Basic Control Panel: Check that there are no faults or alarms
shown on the display. If you want to check the LEDs on the
front of the drive, switch first to remote control (otherwise a
fault is generated) before removing the panel and verifying that
the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking.
Assistant Control Panel: Check that there are no faults or
alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green
and does not blink.
The drive is now ready for use.

How to perform the guided start-up

To be able to perform the guided start-up, you need the Assistant Control Panel.
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
SAFETY
The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician.
The safety instructions given in chapter Safety instructions must be followed during
the start-up procedure.
The drive will start up automatically at power up, if the external run command is on.
Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Installation, page 35.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger.
De-couple the driven machine if:
• there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation, or
• an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start-up. ID Run is essential only in
applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy.
POWER-UP
Apply input power. The control panel first asks if you want to use REM CHOICE
Do you want to
the Start-up Assistant. use the start-up
assistant?
• Press OK (when Yes is highlighted) to run the Start-up Yes
Assistant. No
EXIT 00:00 OK
• Press EXIT if you do not want to run the Start-up Assistant.
• Press key to highlight No and then press OK if you want to REM CHOICE
Show start-up
make the panel ask (or not ask) the question about running the assistant on
Start-up Assistant again the next time you switch on the power to next boot?
Yes
the drive. No
EXIT 00:00 OK
SELECTING THE LANGUAGE

If you decided to run the Start-up Assistant, the display then asks REM PAR EDIT
you to select the language. Scroll to the desired language with 9901 LANGUAGE
keys / and press SAVE to accept. ENGLISH
[0]
If you press EXIT , the Start-up Assistant is stopped. EXIT 00:00 SAVE
STARTING THE GUIDED SET-UP

The Start-up Assistant now guides you through the set-up tasks, REM PAR EDIT
starting with the motor set-up. Set the motor data to exactly the 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
same value as on the motor nameplate. 220 V
Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys / and EXIT 00:00 SAVE
press SAVE to accept and continue with the Start-up Assistant.
Note: At any time, if you press EXIT , the Start-up Assistant is
stopped and the display goes to the Output mode.

After completing a set-up task, the Start-up Assistant suggests the REM CHOICE
Do you want to
next one. continue with
application setup?
• Press OK (when Continue is highlighted) to continue with the Continue
suggested task. Skip
EXIT 00:00 OK
• Press key to highlight Skip and then press OK to move to
the following task without doing the suggested task.
• Press EXIT to stop the Start-up Assistant.
SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK
The start-up is now completed. However, it might be useful at this
stage to set the parameters required by your application and save
the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User
parameter sets on page 88.
After the whole set-up is completed, check there are no faults or
alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does
not blink.
The drive is now ready for use.

How to control the drive through the I/O interface

The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog
inputs when:
• the motor start-up is performed, and
• the default (standard) parameter settings are valid.
Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example.
PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
If you need to change the direction of rotation, check that parameter
1003 is set to 3 (REQUEST).
Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the See section ABB Standard
connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro. macro on page 78.
Ensure that the drive is in remote control. Press key LOC

REM to switch In remote control, the panel
between remote and local control. display shows text REM.
STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR

Start by switching digital input DI1 on.
Assistant Control Panel: The arrow starts rotating. It is dotted until the
setpoint is reached.
REM
OUTPUT
00
. FWD
Hz
Basic Control Panel: Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the
setpoint is reached
Regulate the drive output frequency (motor speed) by adjusting the
voltage of analog input AI1.
REM
OUTPUT
500
. FWD
Hz
CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF THE MOTOR

Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on.
REM
OUTPUT
500
. Hz
REV
Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off.

REM
OUTPUT
500
. FWD
Hz
STOPPING THE MOTOR

Switch digital input DI1 off. The motor stops.
Assistant Control Panel: The arrow stops rotating.
Basic Control Panel: Text FWD starts flashing slowly.
REM
OUTPUT
00
. FWD
Hz

How to perform the ID Run

The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically using identification
magnetization when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor
parameter (Group 99: START-UP DATA) is changed. This is valid when parameter
9910 ID RUN has value 0 (OFF/IDMAGN), and
• parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ), or
• parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 = 3 (SCALAR FLYST) or
5 (FLY + BOOST).
In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run [9910 ID RUN =
1 (ON)]. The ID Run should be selected if:
• vector control mode is used [parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or
2 (VECTOR:TORQ)], and/or
• the operation point is near zero speed, and/or
• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed
range and without any measured speed feedback is required.
Note: If motor parameters (Group 99: START-UP DATA) are changed after the ID
Run, it must be repeated.
ID Run procedure
The general parameter setting procedure is not repeated here. For Assistant Control
Panel see page 55 and for Basic Control Panel page 73 in chapter Control panels.
PRE-CHECK
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…80% of the nominal speed
during the ID Run. The motor will rotate in the forward direction. Ensure that it is
safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run!
De-couple the motor from the driven equipment.
Check that the values of the motor data parameters 9905…9909 are equivalent to those on
the motor nameplate, as shown in the steps on page 39.
If parameter values (Group 01: OPERATING DATA to Group 98: OPTIONS) are changed
before the ID Run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions:
2001 MINIMUM SPEED < 0 rpm
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of the motor rated speed
2003 MAXIMUM CURRENT > I2hd
2017 MAX TORQUE 1 > 50% or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 > 50%, depending on which limit is in
use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL.
Check that the Run Enable signal is on (parameter 1601).
Ensure that the panel is in local control (LOC shown on the left / at the top). Press key LOC
REM to
switch between local and remote control.

ID RUN WITH THE ASSISTANT CONTROL PANEL

Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 (ON). Save the new setting LOC PAR EDIT
by pressing SAVE . 9910 ID RUN
ON
[1]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run, go to LOC 50.0Hz
the Output mode by pressing EXIT repeatedly until you get 0.0 Hz
there. 0.0 A
0.0 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
Press to start the ID Run. The panel keeps switching LOC ALARM
between the display that was shown when you started the ID ALARM 2019
Run and the alarm display presented on the right. ID run
In general, it is recommended not to press any control panel 00:00
keys during the ID Run. However, you can stop the ID Run at
any time by pressing .
After the ID Run is completed, the alarm display is not shown LOC FAULT
any more. FAULT 11
If the ID Run fails, the fault display presented on the right is ID RUN FAIL
shown. 00:00
ID RUN WITH THE BASIC CONTROL PANEL

Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 (ON). Save the new setting
by pressing .
LOC
9910
PAR FWD
LOC
1
PAR SET FWD
If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run, go to

the Output mode by pressing
there.
repeatedly until you get
LOC
OUTPUT
00
.FWD
Hz
Press to start the ID Run. The panel keeps switching

between the display that was shown when you started the ID
Run and the alarm display presented on the right.
LOC
A2019 FWD
In general, it is recommended not to press any control panel

keys during the ID Run. However, you can stop the ID Run at
any time by pressing .
After the ID Run is completed, the alarm display is not shown
any more.
LOC
F0011 FWD
If the ID Run fails, the fault display presented on the right is
shown.

Control panels
About control panels

Use a control panel to control the drive, read status data and adjust parameters. The
drive works with either of two different control panel types:
• Basic Control Panel – This panel (described in section Basic Control Panel on
page 68) provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values.
• Assistant Control Panel – This panel (described below) includes pre-programmed
assistants to automate the most common parameter setups. The panel provides
language support. It is available with different language sets.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with the following panel versions:
• Basic Control Panel: ACS-CP-C Rev. M or later
• Assistant Control Panel (Area 1): ACS-CP-A Rev. F or later
(new panel series manufactured since 2007 with serial number XYYWWRXXXX,
where year YY = 07 or greater and revision R = F, G, E, …)
• Assistant Control Panel (Asia): ACS-CP-D Rev. Q or later
See page 51 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel. See
parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to see the languages supported by the different Assistant
Control Panels.
Control panels
Assistant Control Panel
Features
The Assistant Control Panel features:
• alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display
• language selection for the display
• Start-up Assistant to ease drive commissioning
• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.
• context sensitive help
• real time clock.
Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant
Control Panel.
No. Use
1
1 Status LED – Green for normal operation. If LED is flashing, or red, see
section Diagnostic displays on page 259.
2a LOC
LOC 49.1Hz
400RPM 2 LCD display – Divided into three main areas:
49.RPM
1200 1 Hz a. Status line – variable, depending on the mode of operation, see section
2b .5 A
12.40A Status line on page 49.
10.dm3/s
405 7 % b. Center – variable; in general, shows signal and parameter values, menus or
2c DIR
DIR 12:45
00:00 MENU
MENU lists. Shows also faults and alarms.
c. Bottom line – shows current functions of the two soft keys and, if enabled,
the clock display.
3 4
5 3 Soft key 1 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower left corner
of the LCD display indicates the function.
7 6 8
4 Soft key 2 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower right
corner of the LCD display indicates the function.
9 10
5 Up –
• Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
• Increments a value if a parameter is selected.
• Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
6 Down –
• Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD
display.
• Decrements a value if a parameter is selected.
• Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
7 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
8 Help – Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed. The
information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of
the display.
9 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.
10 START – Starts the drive in local control.
Control panels
Status line
The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.
LOC 49.1Hz LOC MAIN MENU 1
1 2 4 1 2 3 4
No. Field Alternatives Significance

1 Control location LOC Drive control is local, that is, from the control
panel.
REM Drive control is remote, such as the drive I/O or
fieldbus.
2 State Forward shaft direction
Reverse shaft direction
Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint.
Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint.
Stationary arrow Drive is stopped.
Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present, but the motor is not
running, e.g. because start enable is missing.
3 Panel operation • Name of the current mode
mode • Name of the list or menu shown
• Name of the operation state, e.g. PAR EDIT.
4 Reference value • Reference value in the Output mode
or number of the • Number of the highlighted item, e.g mode,
selected item parameter group or fault.
Operation
You operate the control panel with menus and keys. The keys include two context-
sensitive soft keys, whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the
display above each key.
You select an option, e.g. operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and
arrow keys until the option is highlighted (in reverse video) and then pressing
the relevant soft key. With the right soft key you usually enter a mode, accept an
option or save the changes. The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes
and return to the previous operation level.
The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes: Output, Parameters, Assistants,
Changed Parameters, Fault Logger, Time and Date, Parameter Backup, I/O Settings
and Fault. The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter. When a
fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the
fault or alarm. You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter
Diagnostics).
Control panels
Initially, the panel is in the Output mode, where you can LOC 49.1Hz
start, stop, change the direction, switch between local and 49.1 Hz
remote control, modify the reference value and monitor up 0.5 A
to three actual values. To do other tasks, go first to the 10.7 %
Main menu and select the appropriate mode on the menu. DIR 00:00 MENU
The status line (see section Status line on page 49) shows LOC MAIN MENU 1
the name of the current menu, mode, item or state. PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
How to do common tasks EXIT 00:00 ENTER
The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and
the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to get help Any 51
How to find out the panel version At power up 51
How to adjust the display contrast Output 54
How to switch between local and remote control Any 52
How to start and stop the drive Any 52
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 53
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference Output 54
How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 55
How to select the monitored signals Parameters 56
How to do guided tasks (specification of related parameter sets) Assistants 57
with assistants
How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters 60
How to view faults Fault Logger 61
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 265
How to show/hide the clock, change date and time formats, set the Time and Date 62
clock and enable/disable automatic clock transitions according to
the daylight saving changes
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter Backup 65
How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter Backup 65
How to view backup information Parameter Backup 66
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals I/O Settings 67
Control panels
How to get help
Step Action Display
1. Press ? to read the context-sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted. LOC PAR GROUPS 10
01 OPERATING DATA
03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT 00:00 SEL
If help text exists for the item, it is shown on the display. LOC HELP
This group defines
external sources
(EXT1 and EXT2) for
commands that enable
start, stop and
EXIT 00:00
2. If the whole text is not visible, scroll the lines with keys and . LOC HELP
external sources
(EXT1 and EXT2) for
commands that enable
start, stop and
direction changes.
EXIT 00:00
EXIT
3. After reading the text, return to the previous display by pressing . LOC PAR GROUPS 10
01 OPERATING DATA
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT 00:00 SEL
How to find out the panel version
Step Action Display
1. If the power is switched on, switch it off.
2. Keep key ? pressed down while you switch on the power and read the PANEL VERSION INFO
Panel FW: x.xx
information. The display shows the following panel information: ROM CRC: xxxxxxxxxx
Flash Rev: x.xx
Panel FW: panel firmware version xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ROM CRC: panel ROM check sum
Flash Rev: flash content version
Flash content comment.
When you release the ? key, the panel goes to the Output mode.
Control panels
How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
Step Action Display
1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on the status line) and local LOC MESSAGE
Switching to the
control (LOC shown on the status line), press LOC
REM .
local control mode.
Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL
LOCK. 00:00
The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in remote control (REM) and
controlled through the drive I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) and
control the drive using the control panel, press LOCREM . The result depends on
how long you press the key:

• If you release the key immediately (the display flashes “Switching to the local
control mode”), the drive stops. Set the local control reference as instructed
on page 54.
• If you press the key for about two seconds, the drive continues as before.
The drive copies the current remote values for the run/stop status and the
reference, and uses them as the initial local control settings.
• To stop the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the

status line stops rotating.
• To start the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the

status line starts rotating. It
is dotted until the drive
reaches the setpoint.
Control panels
Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
• monitor actual values of up to three signals in Group 01: OPERATING DATA
• change the direction of the motor rotation
• set the speed, frequency or torque reference
• adjust the display contrast
• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
EXIT
You get to the Output mode by pressing repeatedly.
The top right corner of the LOC 49.1Hz LOC 5.0Hz
display shows the reference 49.1 Hz HZ 50%
value. The center can be 0.5 A 0.4 A
configured to show up to three 10.7 % 24.4 %
signal values or bar graphs. If DIR 00:00 MENU DIR 00:00 MENU
just one or two signals are
selected for display, the number and name of each displayed signal are shown in
addition to the value or bar graph. See page 56 for instructions on selecting and
modifying the monitored signals.
How to change the direction of the motor rotation
Step Action Display

EXIT
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly until you get there. REM 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status line), switch to local LOC 49.1Hz
control by pressing LOC
REM . The display briefly shows a message about changing 49.1 Hz
the mode and then returns to the Output mode. 0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
3. To change the direction from forward ( shown on the status line) to reverse ( LOC 49.1Hz
shown on the status line), or vice versa, press
DIR
. 49.1 Hz
0.5 A
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 (REQUEST).
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
Control panels
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference
Step Action Display

EXIT
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly until you get there. REM 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status line), switch to local LOC 49.1Hz
REM . The display briefly shows a message about changing 49.1 Hz
the mode and then returns to the Output mode. 0.5 A
Note: With Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT, you can allow the reference 10.7 %
modification in remote control. DIR 00:00 MENU
3. • To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the LOC 50.0Hz
display, press . The value changes immediately. It is stored in the drive 50.0 Hz
permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch-off. 0.5 A
• To decrease the value, press . 10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
How to adjust the display contrast

Step Action Display
EXIT
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly until you get there. LOC 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
MENU
2. • To increase the contrast, press keys and simultaneously. LOC 49.1Hz
• To decrease the contrast, press keys
MENU
and simultaneously. 49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
Control panels
Parameters mode
In the Parameters mode, you can:
• view and change parameter values
How to select a parameter and change its value
Step Action Display
MENU
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode, otherwise LOC MAIN MENU 1
by pressing
EXIT
repeatedly until you get to the Main menu. PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys LOC PAR GROUPS 01
ENTER 01 OPERATING DATA
and , and pressing . 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select the appropriate parameter group with keys and . LOC PAR GROUPS 99
99 START-UP DATA
01 OPERATING DATA
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
EXIT 00:00 SEL
Press
SEL
. LOC PARAMETERS
9901 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
9902 APPLIC MACRO
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
4. Select the appropriate parameter with keys and . The current LOC PARAMETERS
9901 LANGUAGE
value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter. 9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
Press
EDIT
. LOC PAR EDIT
9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
[1]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
5. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and . LOC PAR EDIT
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key 9902 APPLIC MACRO
down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the 3-WIRE
displayed value with the default value. [2]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
SAVE
6. • To save the new value, press . LOC PARAMETERS
CANCEL
9901 LANGUAGE
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press . 9902 APPLIC MACRO
3-WIRE
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
Control panels
How to select the monitored signals
Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they LOC PAR EDIT
are displayed with Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY parameters. See page 55 for 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM
detailed instructions on changing parameter values. OUTPUT FREQ
By default, the display shows three signals. The particular default signals [103]
depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO: For macros whose CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE is 1 (VECTOR:SPEED), the LOC PAR EDIT
default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED, otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ. The defaults 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM
for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE, respectively. CURRENT
To change the default signals, select up to three signals from Group 01: [104]
OPERATING DATA to be shown. CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
LOC PAR EDIT
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of
the signal parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA (= number of the 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM
parameter without the leading zero), e.g. 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE. TORQUE
Value 100 means that no signal is displayed. [105]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3 (3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM).
2. Select how you want the signals to be displayed: as a decimal number or a bar LOC PAR EDIT
graph. For decimal numbers, you can specify the decimal point location, or use 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
the decimal point location and unit of the source signal [setting (9 (DIRECT)]. For DIRECT
details, see parameter 3404. [9]
Signal 1: parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Signal 2: parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM
Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.
3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has no effect if parameter LOC PAR EDIT
3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 (DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405. 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Hz
Signal 2: parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT [3]
Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT. CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum LOC PAR EDIT
display values. This has no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN
(DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3406 and 3407. 0.0 Hz
Signal 1: parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX
Signal 2: parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Signal 3: parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX. LOC PAR EDIT
3407 OUTPUT1 MAX
500.0 Hz
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Control panels
Assistants mode
When the drive is first powered up, the Start-up Assistant guides you through the
setup of the basic parameters. The Start-up Assistant is divided into assistants, each
of which guides you through the task of specifying a related parameter set, for
example Motor Set-up or PID Control. You can activate the assistants one after the
other as the Start-up Assistant suggests, or independently. The tasks of the
assistants are listed in the table on page 58.
In the Assistants mode, you can:
• use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters
How to use an assistant
The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through
assistants. The Motor Set-up Assistant is used as an example.
Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
by pressing repeatedly until you get to the Main menu. PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu with keys LOC ASSISTANTS 1
and , and pressing
ENTER
. Start-up assistant
Motor Set-up
Application
Speed control EXT1
Speed control EXT2
EXIT 00:00 SEL
SEL
3. Select the assistant with keys and , and press . LOC PAR EDIT
If you select any other assistant than the Start-up Assistant, it guides you 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. and 5. 220 V
below. After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit
the Assistants mode. The Motor Set-up Assistant is used here as an example. EXIT 00:00 SAVE
If you select the Start-up Assistant, it activates the first assistant, which guides LOC CHOICE
Do you want to
you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. continue with
and 5. below. The Start-up Assistant then asks if you want to continue with the application setup?
Continue
next assistant or skip it – select the appropriate answer with keys and Skip
SEL EXIT 00:00 OK
, and press . If you choose to skip, the Start-up Assistant asks the
same question about the next assistant, and so on.
4. • To specify a new value, press keys and . LOC PAR EDIT

9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
240 V
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
• To ask for information on the requested parameter, press key ? . Scroll the LOC HELP
EXIT Set as given on the
help text with keys and . Close the help by pressing . motor nameplate.
Voltage value must
correspond to motor
D/Y connection.
EXIT 00:00
Control panels
Step Action Display
5. • To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter, LOC PAR EDIT
SAVE
press . 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
• To stop the assistant, press
EXIT
. 1.2 A
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
The table below lists the tasks of the assistants and the relevant drive parameters.
Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO), the Start-up Assistant decides, which consequent tasks it suggests.
Name Description Set parameters
Language select Selecting the language 9901
Motor set-up Setting the motor data 9904…9909
Performing the motor identification. (If the speed limits are not in 9910
the allowed range: Setting the limits.)
Application Selecting the application macro 9902, parameters associated to
the macro
Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS
Group 52: PANEL COMM
9802
Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1103
EXT1 (If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 limits, scale, inversion) (1301…1303, 3001)
Setting the reference limits 1104, 1105
Setting the speed (frequency) limits 2001, 2002, (2007, 2008)
Setting the acceleration and deceleration times 2202, 2203
Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1106
EXT2 (If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 limits, scale, inversion) (1301…1303, 3001)
Torque control Selecting the source for the torque reference 1106
(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 limits, scale, inversion) (1301…1303, 3001)
Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times 2401, 2402
PID control Selecting the source for the process reference 1106
(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 limits, scale, inversion) (1301…1303, 3001)
Setting the speed (reference) limits 2001, 2002, (2007, 2008)
Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 4016, 4018, 4019
Start/Stop control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external 1001, 1002
control locations, EXT1 and EXT2
Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102
Defining the direction control 1003
Defining the start and stop modes 2101…2103
Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1601
Timed functions Setting the timed functions Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS
Selecting the timed start/stop control for external control locations 1001, 1002
EXT1 and EXT2
Selecting timed EXT1/EXT2 control 1102
Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201
Control panels
Name Description Set parameters

Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1401
Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1/2 control 4027
Protections Setting the current and torque limits 2003, 2017
Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS
Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Group 15: ANALOG OUTPUTS
Setting the minimum, maximum, scaling and inversion
Control panels
Changed Parameters mode

In the Changed Parameters mode, you can:
• view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default
values
• change these parameters
How to view and edit changed parameters
Step Action Display
MENU
by pressing
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the LOC CHANGED PAR
ENTER 1202 CONST SPEED 1
menu with keys and , and pressing . 10.0 Hz
1203 CONST SPEED 2
1204 CONST SPEED 3
9902 APPLIC MACRO
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
3. Select the changed parameter on the list with keys and . The LOC PAR EDIT
EDIT
value of the selected parameter is shown below it. Press to modify the 1202 CONST SPEED 1
value. 10.0 Hz
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
4. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys and . LOC PAR EDIT
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key 1202 CONST SPEED 1
down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the 15.0 Hz
displayed value with the default value.
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
SAVE
5. • To accept the new value, press . If the new value is the default value, the LOC CHANGED PAR
1202 CONST SPEED 1
parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters. 15.0 Hz
CANCEL 1203 CONST SPEED 2
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press . 1204 CONST SPEED 3
9902 APPLIC MACRO
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
Control panels
Fault Logger mode

In the Fault Logger mode, you can:
• view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults (after a power off, only the three
latest faults are kept in the memory)
• see the details of the three latest faults (after a power off, the details of only the
most recent fault is kept in the memory)
• read the help text for the fault
How to view faults
Step Action Display
MENU
by pressing
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with LOC FAULT LOGGER
ENTER 10: PANEL LOSS
keys and , and pressing . The display shows the fault log 19.03.05 13:04:57
starting with the latest fault. 6: DC UNDERVOLT
6: AI1 LOSS
The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and
corrective actions are listed in chapter Diagnostics. EXIT 00:00 DETAIL
3. To see the details of a fault, select it with keys and , and press LOC PANEL LOSS
DETAIL FAULT
. 10
FAULT TIME 1
13:04:57
FAULT TIME 2
EXIT 00:00 DIAG
DIAG
4. To show the help text, press . Scroll the help text with keys and LOC DIAGNOSTICS
Check: Comm lines
. and connections,
After reading the help, press
OK
to return to the previous display. parameter 3002,
parameters in groups
10 and 11.
EXIT 00:00 OK
Control panels
Time and Date mode

In the Time and Date mode, you can:
• show or hide the clock
• change date and time display formats
• set the date and time
• enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving
changes
The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock
when the panel is not powered by the drive.
How to show or hide the clock, change display formats, set the date and time and enable
or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes
Step Action Display

MENU
by pressing
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Time and Date mode by selecting TIME & DATE on the menu with LOC TIME & DATE 1
ENTER CLOCK VISIBILITY
keys and , and pressing . TIME FORMAT
DATE FORMAT
SET TIME
SET DATE
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. • To show (hide) the clock, select CLOCK VISIBLILITY on the menu, press LOC CLOCK VISIB 1
SEL
, select Show clock (Hide clock) and press
SEL
, or, if you want to return Show clock
EXIT
Hide clock
to the previous display without making changes, press .
EXIT 00:00 SEL
• To specify the date format, select DATE FORMAT on the menu, press
SEL LOC DATE FORMAT 1
OK CANCEL dd.mm.yy
and select a suitable format. Press to save or to cancel your mm/dd/yy
changes. dd.mm.yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
CANCEL 00:00 OK
• To specify the time format, select TIME FORMAT on the menu, press
SEL LOC TIME FORMAT 1
OK CANCEL 24-hour
and select a suitable format. Press to save or to cancel your 12-hour
changes.
CANCEL 00:00 OK
• To set the time, select SET TIME on the menu and press
SEL
. Specify the LOC SET TIME
OK
hours with keys and , and press .Then specify the minutes.
Press
OK
to save or
CANCEL
to cancel your changes. 15:41
CANCEL 00:00 OK
Control panels
Step Action Display
• To set the date, select SET DATE on the menu and press
SEL
. Specify the LOC SET DATE
first part of the date (day or month depending on the selected date format) with
keys and , and press
OK
. Repeat for the second part. After 19.03.05
OK CANCEL
specifying the year, press . To cancel your changes, press .
CANCEL 00:00 OK
• To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1
SEL Off
saving changes, select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press . EU
US
Pressing ? opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the Australia1:NSW,Vict..
period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area Australia2:Tasmania..
EXIT 00:00 SEL
whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed.
LOC HELP
• To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving EU:
changes, select Off and press
SEL
. On: Mar last Sunday
Off: Oct last Sunday
• To enable automatic clock transitions, select the country or area whose US:
SEL
daylight saving changes are followed and press . EXIT 00:00
EXIT
• To return to the previous display without making changes, press .
Control panels
Parameter Backup mode

The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another
or to make a backup of the drive parameters. Uploading to the panel stores all drive
parameters, including up to two user sets, to the Assistant Control Panel. The full
set, partial parameter set (application) and user sets can then be downloaded from
the control panel to another drive or the same drive. Uploading and downloading can
be performed in local control.
The control panel memory is non-volatile and does not depend on the panel battery.
In the Parameter Backup mode, you can:
• copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (UPLOAD TO PANEL).
This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by
the user) parameters such as those created by the ID Run.
• view the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD
TO PANEL (BACKUP INFO). This includes e.g. the type and rating of the drive
where the backup was made. It is useful to check this information when you are
going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to
ensure that the drives match.
• restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
FULL SET). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable
motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer
parameters to systems that are identical to the original system.
• copy a partial parameter set (part of the full set) from the control panel to a drive
(DOWNLOAD APPLICATION). The partial set does not include user sets, internal
motor parameters, parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any Group
51: EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
USER SET1). A user set includes Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters and
the internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User parameter sets on page
88) and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL.
• copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
USER SET2). As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above.
Control panels
How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above. Note that the drive has
to be in local control for uploading and downloading.
Step Action Display
MENU
by pressing
EXIT
repeatedly until you get to the Main menu. – If REM is shown PARAMETERS
on the status line, press LOC
REM to switch to local control. ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys LOC PAR BACKUP 1
ENTER UPLOAD TO PANEL
and , and pressing . BACKUP INFO
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD APPLICATION
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. • To copy all parameters (including user sets and internal parameters) from the LOC PAR BACKUP
drive to the control panel, select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par Backup Copying parameters
SEL 50%
menu with keys and , and press . During the transfer, the
ABORT
display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion. Press if
you want to stop the operation. ABORT 00:00
After the upload is completed, the display shows a message about the LOC MESSAGE
OK Parameter upload
completion. Press to return to the Par Backup menu. successful.
OK 00:00
• To perform downloads, select the appropriate operation (here DOWNLOAD LOC PAR BACKUP
Downloading
FULL SET is used as an example) on the Par Backup menu with keys parameters (full
SEL
and , and press . The display shows the transfer status as a set)
ABORT 50%
percentage of completion. Press if you want stop the operation.
ABORT 00:00
After the download is completed, the display shows a message about the LOC MESSAGE
OK Parameter download
completion. Press to return to the Par Backup menu. successfully
completed.
OK 00:00
Control panels
How to view information about the backup
Step Action Display

MENU
by pressing
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys LOC PAR BACKUP 1
ENTER UPLOAD TO PANEL
and , and pressing . BACKUP INFO
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select BACKUP INFO on the Par Backup menu with keys and , LOC BACKUP INFO
and press
SEL
. The display shows the following information about the drive DRIVE TYPE
ACS550
where the backup was made: 3304 DRIVE RATING
4A62i
DRIVE TYPE: type of the drive 3301 FIRMWARE
DRIVE RATING: rating of the drive in format XXXYZ, where EXIT 00:00
XXX: nominal current rating. If present, an “A” indicates LOC BACKUP INFO
a decimal point, e.g. 4A6 means 4.6 A. ACS550
3304 DRIVE RATING
Y: 2 = 200 V 4A62i
4 = 400 V 3301 FIRMWARE
300F hex
6 = 600 V EXIT 00:00
Z: i = European loading package
n = US loading package
FIRMWARE: firmware version of the drive.
You can scroll the information with keys and .
4. Press
EXIT
to return to the Par Backup menu. LOC PAR BACKUP 1
UPLOAD TO PANEL
BACKUP INFO
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT 00:00 SEL
Control panels
I/O Settings mode

In the I/O Settings mode, you can:
• check the parameter settings related to any I/O terminal
• edit the parameter setting. For example, if “1103: REF1” is listed under Ain1
(Analog input 1), that is, parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value AI1, you can
change its value to e.g. AI2. You cannot, however, set the value of parameter 1106
REF2 SELECT to AI1.
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals
Step Action Display
MENU
by pressing
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go the I/O Settings mode by selecting I/O SETTINGS on the menu with keys LOC I/O SETTINGS 1
ENTER DIGITAL INPUTS (DI)
and , and pressing . ANALOG INPUTS (AI)
RELAY OUTPUTS (ROUT)
ANALOG OUTPUTS (AOUT)
PANEL
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select the I/O group, e.g. DIGITAL INPUTS, with keys and , and LOC I/O SETTINGS
SEL —DI1—
press . After a brief pause, the display shows the current settings for the 1001:START/STOP (E1)
selection. —DI2—
—DI3—
EXIT 00:00
4. Select the setting (line with a parameter number) with keys and , LOC PAR EDIT
EDIT
and press . 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
DI1
[1]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
5. Specify a new value for the setting with keys and . LOC PAR EDIT
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value. Holding the key 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
down changes the value faster. Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the DI1,2
displayed value with the default value. [2]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
SAVE
6. • To save the new value, press . LOC I/O SETTINGS
CANCEL
—DI1—
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press . 1001:START/STOP (E1)
—DI2—
1001:DIR (E1)
—DI3—
EXIT 00:00
Control panels
Basic Control Panel
Features
The Basic Control Panel features:
• numeric control panel with an LCD display
• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.
Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control
Panel.
No. Use
1 LCD display – Divided into five areas:
a. Upper left – Control location:
1a LOC 1b
1d OUTPUT
1c 11
.
FWD
A
1e
LOC: drive control is local, that is, from the control panel
REM: drive control is remote, such as the drive I/O or fieldbus.
b. Upper right – Unit of the displayed value.
c. Center – Variable; in general, shows parameter and signal values, menus or
RESET MENU
EXIT ENTER lists. Shows also fault and alarm codes.
2 3 d. Lower left and center – Panel operation state:
4 OUTPUT: Output mode
5 PAR: Parameter mode
6 7
MENU: Main menu
FAULT : Fault mode.
8 9
e. Lower right – Indicators:
FWD (forward) / REV (reverse): direction of the motor rotation
Flashing slowly: stopped
Flashing rapidly: running, not at setpoint
Steady: running, at setpoint
SET : Displayed value can be modified (in the Parameter and Reference
modes).
2 RESET/EXIT – Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed
values. Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes.
3 MENU/ENTER – Enters deeper into menu level. In the Parameter mode,
saves the displayed value as the new setting.
4 Up –
• Scrolls up through a menu or list.
• Increases a value if a parameter is selected.
• Increases the reference value in the Reference mode.
5 Down –
• Scrolls down through a menu or list.
• Decreases a value if a parameter is selected.
• Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode.
6 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
7 DIR – Changes the direction of the motor rotation.
8 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.
9 START – Starts the drive in local control.
Control panels
Operation
You operate the control panel with menus and keys. You select an option, e.g.
operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and arrow keys until the
option is visible in the display and then pressing the key.
With the key, you return to the previous operation level without saving the made
changes.
The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes: Output, Reference, Parameter, Copy
and Fault. The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter. When a
fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the
fault or alarm code. You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode (see
chapter Diagnostics).
After the power is switched on, the panel is in the
Output mode, where you can start, stop, change the
direction, switch between local and remote control and
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
monitor up to three actual values (one at a time). To do

other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the
appropriate mode.
REM
PAr
MENU FWD
How to do common tasks

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and
the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to switch between local and remote control Any 70
How to start and stop the drive Any 70
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 70
How to browse the monitored signals Output 71
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference Reference 72
How to change the value of a parameter Parameter 73
How to select the monitored signals Parameter 74
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 265
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 76
How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 76
Control panels
How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
Step Action Display
1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on the left) and local
control (LOC shown on the left), press LOC
REM .
Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606

LOC
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
LOCAL LOCK.
After pressing the key, the display briefly shows message “LoC” or “rE”,
as appropriate, before returning to the previous display.
LOC
LoC FWD
The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in remote control (REM)
and controlled through the drive I/O terminals. To switch to local control
(LOC) and control the drive using the control panel, press LOCREM . The result
depends on how long you press the key:

• If you release the key immediately (the display flashes “LoC”), the drive
stops. Set the local control reference as instructed on page 72.
• If you press the key for about two seconds (release when the display
changes from “LoC” to “LoC r”), the drive continues as before. The drive
copies the current remote values for the run/stop status and the
reference, and uses them as the initial local control settings.
• To stop the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing slowly.
• To start the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing rapidly. It
stops flashing when the drive
reaches the setpoint.
How to change the direction of the motor rotation

You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode.
Step Action Display
1. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the left), switch to local
control by pressing LOCREM . The display briefly shows message “LoC” before
returning to the previous display.

LOC
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
2. To change the direction from forward (FWD shown at the bottom) to

reverse (REV shown at the bottom), or vice versa, press .
LOC
OUTPUT
491
. Hz
REV
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 (REQUEST).
Control panels
Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
• monitor actual values of up to three Group 01: OPERATING DATA signals, one
signal at a time
You get to the Output mode by pressing until the display shows text OUTPUT at
the bottom.
The display shows the value of one Group 01:
OPERATING DATA signal. The unit is shown on the
right. Page 74 tells how to select up to three signals to
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
be monitored in the Output mode. The table below

shows how to view them one at a time.
How to browse the monitored signals
Step Action Display
1. If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored (see page
74), you can browse them in the Output mode. REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
To browse the signals forward, press key repeatedly. To browse

them backward, press key repeatedly.
REM
OUTPUT
05
. FWD
A
REM
OUTPUT
107
. FWD
%
Control panels
Reference mode
In the Reference mode, you can:
• set the speed, frequency or torque reference
How to set the speed, frequency or torque reference
Step Action Display
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing

otherwise by pressing
if you are in the Output mode,
repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom. REM
PAr
MENU FWD
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the left), switch to local
to local control.
REM . The display briefly shows “LoC” before switching
LOC
PAr
MENU FWD
Note: With Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT, you can allow the reference
modification in remote control (REM).
3. If the panel is not in the Reference mode (“rEF” not visible), press key
or until you see “rEF” and then press . Now the display
shows the current reference value with SET under the value.
LOC
rEF
MENU FWD
LOC
491
. SET FWD
Hz
4. • To increase the reference value, press

• To decrease the reference value, press
.
.
LOC
500
.
SET FWD
Hz
The value changes immediately when you press the key. It is stored in the
drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch-off.
Control panels
Parameter mode
In the Parameter mode, you can:
• view and change parameter values
• select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode
How to select a parameter and change its value
Step Action Display

LOC
rEF
MENU FWD
2. If the panel is not in the Parameter mode (“PAr” not visible), press key
or until you see “PAr” and then press
shows the number of one of the parameter groups.
. The display
LOC
PAr
MENU FWD
LOC
-01- PAR FWD
3. Use keys and to find the desired parameter group. LOC

-11- PAR FWD
4. Press . The display shows one of the parameters in the selected

group.
LOC
1101 PAR FWD
5. Use keys and to find the desired parameter. LOC

1103 PAR FWD
6. Press and hold for about two seconds until the display shows the
value of the parameter with SET underneath indicating that changing of the
value is now possible.
LOC
1
PAR SET FWD
Note: When SET is visible, pressing keys and
simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the
parameter.
7. Use keys and to select the parameter value. When you have
changed the parameter value, SET starts flashing.
LOC
2 PAR SET FWD
• To save the displayed parameter value, press

• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press
.
.
LOC
1103 PAR FWD
Control panels
How to select the monitored signals
Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how
they are displayed with Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY parameters. See page
55 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values.
LOC
103
PAR SET FWD
By default, you can monitor three signals by browsing (see page 71). The
particular default signals depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO: For macros whose default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL
LOC
104
PAR SET FWD
MODE is 1 (VECTOR:SPEED), the default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED, otherwise
0103 OUTPUT FREQ. The defaults for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104
CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE, respectively.
LOC
105
PAR SET FWD
To change the default signals, select from Group 01: OPERATING DATA
up to three signals to be browsed.
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index
of the signal parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA (= number of the
parameter without the leading zero), e.g. 105 means parameter 0105
TORQUE. Value 100 means that no signal is displayed.
Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3 (3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM).
For example, if 3401 = 0 and 3415 = 0, browsing is disabled and only the
signal specified by 3408 appears in the display. If all three parameters are
set to 0, i.e. no signals are selected for monitoring, the panel displays text
“n.A”.
2. Specify the decimal point location, or use the decimal point location and
unit of the source signal [setting (9 (DIRECT)]. Bar graphs are not available
for Basic Operation Panel. For details, see parameter 3404.
LOC
9
PAR SET FWD
Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.
3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has no effect if
parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 (DIRECT). For details, see
parameter 3405.
LOC
3
PAR SET FWD
Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
Signal 2: parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT
Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT.
4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and
maximum display values. This has no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is
set to 9 (DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3406 and 3407.
LOC
00
.
PAR SET FWD
Hz

Signal 3: parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX.
LOC
5000
.
PAR SET FWD
Hz
Control panels
Copy mode
The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user
sets of drive parameters to the control panel. The control panel memory is non-
volatile.
In the Copy mode, you can:
• copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (uL – Upload). This
includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by the
user) parameters such as those created by the ID Run.
• restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (dL A – Download
All). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable motor
parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to
systems that are identical to the original system.
• copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive (dL P – Download
Partial). The partial set does not include user sets, internal motor parameters,
parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any Group 51: EXT COMM
MODULE and Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u1 – Download
User Set 1). A user set includes Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters and the
internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section User parameter sets on page
88) and then uploaded to panel.
• copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u2 – Download
User Set 2). As dL u1 – Download User Set 1 above.
Control panels
How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above.
Step Action Display

LOC
PAr
MENU FWD
2. If the panel is not in the Copy mode (“CoPY” not visible), press key
or until you see “CoPY”.
LOC
CoPY
MENU FWD
Press . LOC
dL u1
MENU FWD
3. • To upload all parameters (including user sets) from the drive to the control
panel, step to “uL” with keys and .
LOC
uL
MENU FWD
Press . During the transfer, the display shows the transfer status as a
percentage of completion.
LOC
uL 50 FWD
%
• To perform downloads, step to the appropriate operation (here “dL A”,

Download All, is used as an example) with keys and .
LOC
dL A
MENU FWD
Press . During the transfer, the display shows the transfer status as a
percentage of completion.
LOC
dL 50 FWD
%
Basic Control Panel alarm codes

In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive (see chapter Diagnostics),
the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx.
See section Alarm codes (Basic Control Panel) on page 269 for a list of the alarm
codes and descriptions.
Control panels
Application macros
Macros change a group of parameters to new, predefined values. Use macros to

minimize the need for manual editing of parameters. Selecting a macro sets all other
parameters to their default values, except:
• Group 99: START-UP DATA parameters (except parameter 9904)
• 1602 PARAMETER LOCK
• 1607 PARAM SAVE
• 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME
• 9802 COMM PROT SEL

• Group 50: ENCODER … Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL parameters
• Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG parameters.
After selecting a macro, you can make additional parameter changes manually with
the control panel.
You enable application macros by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO. By default, 1, ABB STANDARD, is the enabled macro.
The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a
connection example for each macro.
The last section in this chapter, Macro default values for parameters, lists the
parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each
macro.
Application macros
ABB Standard macro

This is the default macro. It provides a general purpose, 2-wire I/O configuration,
with three (3) constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values defined in
section Complete parameter list on page 91.
Connection example:
X1
1…10 kohm 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External frequency reference 1: 0…10 V1
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC
5 AI2 Not used
7 AO1 Output frequency: 0…20 mA
8 AO2 Output current: 0…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common
10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start
14 DI2 Fwd/Rev: Activate to reverse rotation direction
15 DI3 Constant speed selection2
17 DI5 Ramp pair selection: Activate to select 2nd acc/dec ramp pair
18 DI6 Not used
19 RO1C Note 1. The external reference is

Relay output 1, programmable
used as a speed reference if a vector
20 RO1A Default operation:
Ready =>19 connected to 21 mode is selected.
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Note 2. Code:
0 = open, 1 = connected
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 DI3 DI4 Output
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable 0 0 Reference through AI1
26 RO3A Default operation: 1 0 CONST SPEED 1 (1202)
27 RO3B Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27 0 1 CONST SPEED 2 (1203)
(Fault => 25 connected to 26) 1 1 CONST SPEED 3 (1204)
Input signals Output signals Jumper setting

• Analog reference (AI1) • Analog output AO1: Frequency J1
• Start, stop and direction (DI1,2) • Analog output AO2: Current AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Constant speed selection (DI3,4) • Relay output 1: Ready AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

ON
• Ramp pair (1 of 2) selection (DI5) • Relay output 2: Running or

• Relay output 3: Fault (-1) J1
AI1: 0…10 V
1 2
ON
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
Application macros
3-wire macro
This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons. It
provides three (3) constant speeds. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to
2 (3-WIRE).
Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input), the control panel start/stop
buttons are disabled.
Connection example:
X1
2 AI1 External speed reference 1: 0…10 V
5 AI2 Not used
7 AO1 Motor output speed: 0…20 mA

13 DI1 Start: Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive
14 DI2 Stop: Momentary deactivation stops the drive
15 DI3 Fwd/Rev: Activation reverses rotation direction
18 DI6 Not used
19 RO1C Relay output 1, programmable

Note 1. Code:
21 RO1B Ready =>19 connected to 21
0 = open, 1 = connected
23 RO2A Default operation: DI4 DI5 Output
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 0 0 Reference through AI1
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable 1 0 CONST SPEED 1 (1202)
(Fault => 25 connected to 26)

• Analog reference (AI1) • Analog output AO1: Speed J1
• Start, stop and direction (DI1,2,3) • Analog output AO2: Current AI1: 0…10 V
ON

ON
• Relay output 2: Running or

AI1: 0…10 V
1 2
ON
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
Application macros
Alternate macro
This macro provides an I/O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control
signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor. To enable, set the
value of parameter 9902 to 3 (ALTERNATE).
Connection example:
X1
5 AI2 Not used

13 DI1 Start fwd: If DI1 state is the same as DI2, the drive stops
14 DI2 Start reverse
17 DI5 Ramp pair selection: Activation selects 2nd acc/dec ramp pair
18 DI6 Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive

20 RO1A Default operation: Note 1. Code:
21 RO1B Ready =>19 connected to 21 0 = open, 1 = connected
23 RO2A Default operation: DI3 DI4 Output
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 0 0 Reference through AI1
25 RO3C 1 0 CONST SPEED 1 (1202)

• Start, stop and direction (DI1,2) • Analog output AO2: Current AI1: 0…10 V
ON

ON
• Ramp pair 1/2 selection (DI5) • Relay output 2: Running or

• Run enable (DI6) • Relay output 3: Fault (-1) J1
AI1: 0…10 V
1 2
ON
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
Application macros
Motor Potentiometer macro

This macro provides a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the
motor using only digital signals. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to
4 (MOTOR POT).
Connection example:
X1
1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 Not used
5 AI2 Not used

13 DI1 Start/stop: Activation starts the drive.
14 DI2 Forward/reverse: Activation reverses rotation direction.
15 DI3 Reference up: Activation increases the reference1
16 DI4 Reference down: Activation decreases the reference1
17 DI5 Constant speed 1: 1202
18 DI6 Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive.

22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable Note 1. For DI3 and DI4:
• If both are active or inactive the
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 speed reference is unchanged.
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable • The existing speed reference is
26 RO3A Default operation: stored during stop or power down.
27 RO3B Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
(Fault => 25 connected to 26) Note 2.
• Settings of the ramp times with
acceleration and deceleration time
2 (parameters 2205 and 2206).

• Start, stop and direction (DI1,2) • Analog output AO1: Speed J1
• Reference up/down (DI3,4) • Analog output AO2: Current AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Constant speed selection (DI5) • Relay output 1: Ready AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

ON
• Run enable (DI6) • Relay output 2: Running or

AI1: 0…10 V
1 2
ON
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
Application macros
Hand-Auto macro
This macro provides an I/O configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications.
To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 (HAND/AUTO).
Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting, 0 (OFF).
Connection example:
X1
2 AI1 External reference 1: 0…10 V (Hand Control)
1
5 AI2 External reference 2: 0…20 mA (Auto Control)
8 AO2 Output current: 0 …20 mA

13 DI1 Start/Stop (Hand): Activation starts the drive
14 DI2 Forward/Reverse (Hand): Activation reverses rotation direction
15 DI3 EXT1/EXT2 Selection: Activation selects auto control
17 DI5 Forward/Reverse (Auto): Activation reverses rotation direction
18 DI6 Start/Stop (Auto): Activation starts the drive
22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable Note 1.
23 RO2A Default operation: The sensor for AI2 is powered
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 externally. See the manufacturer’s
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable instructions. To use sensors
26 RO3A Default operation: supplied by the drive aux. voltage
27 RO3B Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27 output, see page 86.

• Two analog references (AI1, 2) • Analog output AO1: Speed J1
• Start/stop – hand/auto (DI1, 6) • Analog output AO2: Current AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Direction – hand/auto (DI2, 5) • Relay output 1: Ready AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

ON
• Control location selection (DI3) • Relay output 2: Running or

• Run enable (DI4) • Relay output 3: Fault (-1) J1
AI1: 0…10 V
1 2
ON
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
Application macros
PID Control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for closed-loop control systems such as
pressure control, flow control, etc. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to
6 (PID CONTROL).
Connection example:
X1
2 AI1 External ref. 1 (Manual) or Ext ref. 2 (PID): 0…10 V1
Note 1.
3
4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual: 0…10V => speed reference
5 AI2 Actual signal (PID): 4…20 mA PID: 0…10V => 0…100% PID
6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint
8 AO2 Output current: 0…20 mA Note 3.
9 AGND Analog output circuit common The sensor for AI2 is powered exter-
nally. See the manufacturer’s instruc-
10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC tions. To use sensors supplied by the
Auxiliary voltage output common drive aux. voltage output, see page 86.
11 GND
13 DI1 Start/Stop (Hand): Activation starts the drive
14 DI2 EXT1/EXT2 selection: Activation selects PID control
15 DI3 Constant speed selection 1: (Not used in PID control)2
16 DI4 Constant speed selection 2: (Not used in PID control)2
18 DI6 Start/Stop (PID): Activation starts the drive

20 RO1A Default operation: Note 2. Code:
21 RO1B Ready =>19 connected to 21 0 = open, 1 = connected
22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable DI3 DI4 Output
23 RO2A Default operation: 0 0 Reference through AI1
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24
1 0 CONST SPEED 1 (1202)
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable 0 1 CONST SPEED 2 (1203)

• Actual value (AI2) • Analog output AO2: Current AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Start/stop – hand/PID (DI1, 6) • Relay output 1: Ready AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

ON
• EXT1/EXT2 selection (DI2) • Relay output 2: Running or

• Constant speed selection (DI3, 4) • Relay output 3: Fault (-1) J1
• Run enable (DI5) AI1: 0…10 V
1 2
ON
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
Note: Use the following switch-on order:
1. EXT1/EXT2
2. Run Enable
3. Start.
Application macros
PFC macro
This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control (PFC) applications.
To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 (PFC CONTROL).
Connection example:
X1
2 AI1 External ref. 1 (Manual) or Ext ref. 2 (PID/PFC): 0…10 V1
3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1.
4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual: 0 …10V => 0…50 Hz
2
5 AI2 Actual signal (PID): 4 …20 mA PID/PFC: 0 …10V => 0…100% PID
6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint
7 AO1 Output frequency: 0…20 mA
8 AO2 Actual 1 (PI controller actual value): 0(4)…20 mA

13 DI1 Start/Stop (Manual): Activation starts the drive
15 DI3 EXT1/EXT2 selection: Activation selects PFC control
16 DI4 Interlock: Deactivation always stops the drive
17 DI5 Interlock: Deactivation stops constant speed motor
18 DI6 Start/Stop (PFC): Activation starts the drive
Note 2.
19 RO1C Relay output 1, programmable The sensor for AI2 is powered exter-
20 RO1A Default operation: nally. See the manufacturer’s instruc-
21 RO1B Running =>19 connected to 21 tions. To use sensors supplied by the
22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable drive aux. voltage output, see page 86.
24 RO2B Fault (-1) =>22 connected to 24 (Fault => 22 connected to 23)
27 RO3B Auxiliary motor switched on=>25 connected to 27

• Analog ref. and actual (AI1, 2) • Analog output AO1: Frequency J1
• Start/stop – manual/PFC (DI1, 6) • Analog output AO2: Actual 1 AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Run enable (DI2) • Relay output 1: Running AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

ON
• EXT1/EXT2 selection (DI3) • Relay output 2: Fault (-1) or

• Interlock (DI4, 5) • Relay output 3: Aux. motor ON J1
AI1: 0…10 V
1 2
ON
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
Note: Use the following switch-on order:
1. EXT1/EXT2
2. Run Enable
3. Start.
Application macros
Torque Control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of
the motor. Control can also be switched to speed control. To enable, set the value of
parameter 9902 to 8 (TORQUE CTRL).
Connection example:
X1
2
5 AI2 External torque reference: 4…20 mA
7 AO1 Motor output speed: 0…20 mA Note 1.
• Reverses rotation direction in
9 AGND Analog output circuit common speed control.
10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 V DC • Reverses torque direction in
11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common torque control.
13 DI1 Start/stop: Activation starts the drive.
14 DI2 Forward/reverse: Activation reverses direction1
15 DI3 Speed/torque control: Activation selects torque control
16 DI4 Constant speed 1: 1202
17 DI5 Ramp pair selection: Activate to select 2nd acc/dec ramp pair
19 RO1C Relay output 1, programmable Note 2.

20 RO1A Default operation: The sensor for AI2 is powered
21 RO1B Ready =>19 connected to 21 externally. See the manufacturer’s
22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable instructions. To use sensors supplied
23 RO2A Default operation: by the drive aux. voltage output, see
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 page 86.

• Two analog references (AI1, 2) • Analog output AO1: Speed J1
• Start/stop and direction (DI1, 2) • Analog output AO2: Current AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Speed/torque control (DI3) • Relay output 1: Ready AI2: 0(4)…20 mA

ON
• Constant speed selection (DI4) • Relay output 2: Running or

• Ramp pair 1/2 selection (DI5) • Relay output 3: Fault (-1) J1
• Run enable (DI6) AI1: 0…10 V
1 2
ON
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
Application macros
Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors

Many applications use process PI(D) and need a feedback signal from the process.
The feedback signal is typically connected to analog input 2 (AI2).
The macro wiring diagrams for each macro earlier in this chapter use an externally
powered sensor (connections not shown). The figures below give examples of
connections using a two-wire or three-wire sensor/transmitter supplied by the drive
auxiliary voltage output.
Two-wire sensor/transmitter
X1 / control board
– 4…20 mA 5 AI2 Process actual value measurement,
P
+ 6 AGND 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
I
…
X1 / control board
10 +24 V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
11 GND 24 V DC, 250 mA
Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output and the drive feeds the supply voltage (+24 V).
Thus the output signal must be 4…20 mA, not 0…20 mA
Three-wire sensor/transmitter
X1 / control board
OUT 0(4)…20 mA 5 AI2 Process actual value measurement,
P –
I 6 AGND 0(4) … 20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
+ …
X1 / control board
10 +24 V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
11 GND 24 V DC, 250 mA
Application macros
Connection for obtaining 0…10 V from analog outputs

To obtain 0…10 V from analog outputs, connect a 500 ohm resistor (or two 1 kohm
resistors in parallel) between the analog output and analog output circuit common
AGND.
Examples for analog output 2 AO2 are shown in the figure below.
X1
8 AO2 Analog output 2. Default output 0…20 mA.

0…10 V
500 ohm
Analog input circuit common. Internally connected to chassis
9 AGND
through a 1 Mohm resistor.
X1
8 AO2 Analog output 2. Default output 0…20 mA.

0…10 V
1 kohm 1 kohm
Analog input circuit common. Internally connected to chassis
9 AGND
through a 1 Mohm resistor.
Application macros
User parameter sets

In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to save two user
parameter sets into the permanent memory and load them at a later time. A user
parameter set consists of the user parameter settings, including Group 99: START-
UP DATA, and the results of the motor identification. The panel reference is also
saved if the user parameter set is saved and loaded in local control. The remote
control setting is saved into the user parameter set, but the local control setting is
not.
The steps below show how to save and load User Parameter Set 1. The procedure
for User Parameter Set 2 is identical, only the parameter 9902 values are different.
To save User Parameter Set 1:
• Adjust the parameters. Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the
application but it is not done yet.
• Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the
permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to -1 (USER S1 SAVE).
MENU
SAVE ENTER
• Press (Assistant Control Panel) or (Basic Control Panel).
To load User Parameter Set 1:

• Change parameter 9902 to 0 (USER S1 LOAD).
MENU
SAVE ENTER
• Press (Assistant Control Panel) or (Basic Control Panel) to load.
The user parameter set can also be switched through digital inputs (see parameter
1605).
Note: Loading the user parameter set restores the parameter settings including
Group 99: START-UP DATA and the results of the motor identification. Check that
the settings correspond to the motor used.
Hint: The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having
to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the
motor is changed. The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor
identification once for each motor and then to save the data as two user parameter
sets. When the motor is changed, only the corresponding user parameter set needs
to be loaded, and the drive is ready to operate.
Application macros
Macro default values for parameters

Parameter default values are listed in section Complete parameter list on page 91.
Changing from the default macro (ABB Standard), that is, editing the value of
parameter 9902, changes the parameter default values as defined in the following
tables.
Note: There are two sets of values because the defaults are configured for 50 Hz/
IEC compliance (ACS550-01) and 60 Hz/NEMA compliance (ACS550-U1).
ACS550-01
Motor
ABB PID PFC Torque
Parameter 3-wire Alternate Potenti- Hand-auto
Standard Control Control Control
ometer
9902 APPLIC MACRO 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8=
ABB STANDARD 3-WIRE ALTERNATE MOTOR POT HAND/AUTO PID CONTROL PFC CONTROL TORQUE CTRL
9904 MOTOR CTRL 3 = SCALAR: 1 = VECTOR: 1 = VECTOR: 1 = VECTOR: 1 = VECTOR: 1 = VECTOR: 3 = SCALAR: 2 = VECTOR:
MODE FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED FREQ TORQUE
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 = DI1,2 4 = DI1P,2P,3 9 = DI1F,2 R 2 = DI1,2 2 = DI1,2 1 = DI1 1 = DI1 2 = DI1,2
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 = NOT SEL
0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 7 = DI6,5 6 = DI6 6 = DI6 2 = DI1,2
1003 DIRECTION 3 = REQUEST
3 = REQUEST 3 = REQUEST 3 = REQUEST 3 = REQUEST 1 = FORWARD 1 = FORWARD 3 = REQUEST
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 3 = DI3 2 = DI2 3 = DI3 3 = DI3
1103 REF1 SELECT 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 12 = 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1
DI3U,4D(NC)
1106 REF2 SELECT 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 19 = PID1OUT 19 = PID1OUT 2 = AI2
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 = DI3,4 10 = DI4,5 9 = DI3,4 5 = DI5 0 = NOT SEL 9 = DI3,4 0 = NOT SEL 4 = DI4
1304 MINIMUM AI2 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0%
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 = READY 1 = READY 1 = READY 1 = READY 1 = READY 1 = READY 2 = RUN 1 = READY
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 3 = FAULT(-1) 2 = RUN
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 31 = PFC 3 = FAULT(-1)
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 103 = 0103 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 103 = 0103 102 = 0102
OUTPUT FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED OUTPUT FREQ SPEED
1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 104 = 104 = 104 = 104 = 104 = 104 =
130 = 104 =
CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT PID 1 FBK
CURRENT CURRENT
1510 MINIMUM AO2 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 4.0 mA 0.0 mA
1601 RUN ENABLE 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 6 = DI6 6 = DI6 4 = DI4 5 = DI5 2 = DI2 6 = DI6
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 5 = DI5 0 = NOT SEL 5 = DI5 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 5 = DI5
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 = 0103 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 103 = 0103 102 = 0102
3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 = 0103 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 103 = 0103 102 = 0102
4001 GAIN 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 1.0
4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 3.0 s 60.0 s
4101 GAIN 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 1.0
8123 PFC ENABLE 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 1 = ACTIVE 0 = NOT SEL
Application macros
ACS550-U1
Motor
ABB PID PFC Torque
Parameter 3-wire Alternate Potenti- Hand-auto
Standard Control Control Control
ometer
9902 APPLIC MACRO 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8=
ABB STANDARD 3-WIRE ALTERNATE MOTOR POT HAND/AUTO PID CONTROL PFC CONTROL TORQUE CTRL
9904 MOTOR CTRL 3 = SCALAR: 1 = VECTOR: 1 = VECTOR: 1 = VECTOR: 1 = VECTOR: 1 = VECTOR: 3 = SCALAR: 2 = VECTOR:
MODE FREQ SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED FREQ TORQUE
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 = DI1,2 4 = DI1P,2P,3 9 = DI1F,2R 2 = DI1,2 2 = DI1,2 1 = DI1 1 = DI1 2 = DI1,2
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 = NOT SEL
0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 7 = DI6,5 6 = DI6 6 = DI6 2 = DI1,2
1003 DIRECTION 3 = REQUEST
3 = REQUEST 3 = REQUEST 3 = REQUEST 3 = REQUEST 1 = FORWARD 1 = FORWARD 3 = REQUEST
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 0 = EXT1 3 = DI3 2 = DI2 3 = DI3 3 = DI3
1103 REF1 SELECT 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 12 = 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1
DI3U,4D(NC)
1106 REF2 SELECT 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 19 = PID1OUT 19 = PID1OUT 2 = AI2
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 = DI3,4 10 = DI4,5 9 = DI3,4 5 = DI5 0 = NOT SEL 9 = DI3,4 0 = NOT SEL 4 = DI4
1304 MINIMUM AI2 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0%
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 = READY 1 = READY 1 = READY 1 = READY 1 = READY 1 = READY 2 = RUN 1 = READY
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 2 = RUN 3 = FAULT(-1) 2 = RUN
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 3 = FAULT(-1) 31 = PFC 3 = FAULT(-1)
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 103 = 0103 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 103 = 0103 102 = 0102
1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 104 = 104 = 104 = 104 = 104 = 104 =
130 = 104 =
CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT PID 1 FBK
CURRENT CURRENT
1510 MINIMUM AO2 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 0.0 mA 4.0 mA 0.0 mA
1601 RUN ENABLE 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 6 = DI6 6 = DI6 4 = DI4 5 = DI5 2 = DI2 6 = DI6
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 5 = DI5 0 = NOT SEL 5 = DI5 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 5 = DI5
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 = 0103 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 103 = 0103 102 = 0102
3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 = 0103 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 102 = 0102 103 = 0103 102 = 0102
4001 GAIN 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 1.0
4101 GAIN 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 1.0
8123 PFC ENABLE 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 0 = NOT SEL 1 = ACTIVE 0 = NOT SEL
Application macros
Parameters
Complete parameter list

The following table lists all parameters. Table header abbreviations are:
• S = Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped.
• User = Space to enter desired parameter values.
Some values depend on the “construction” as indicated in the table by
“-01:” = Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance or
“-U1:” = Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance.
Refer to the type designation on the drive, for example ACS550-01-08A8-4.
Code Name Range Resolution Default User S
Group 99: START-UP DATA
9901 LANGUAGE 0…16 / 0…3 1 0 (ENGLISH)
9902 APPLIC MACRO -3…8, 31 1 1 (ABB STANDARD) 
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 = VECTOR:SPEED, 2 = VECTOR:TORQUE, 1 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) 
3 = SCALAR:FREQ
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT -01-yyyy-2: 115…345 V / 1V -01-yyyy-2: 230 V / 
-U1-yyyy-2: 115…345 V -U1-yyyy-2: 230 V
-01-yyyy-4: 200…600 V / -01:-yyyy-4 400 V /
-U1-yyyy-4: 230…690 V -U1-yyyy-4: 460 V
-U1-yyyy-6: 288…862 V -U1-yyyy-6: 575 V
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0.2 · I2hd … 2.0 · I2hd 0.1 A 1.0 · I2hd 
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz -01: 50.0 Hz / 
-U1: 60.0 Hz
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50…30000 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent 
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 0.2…3.0 · Phd -01: 0.1 kW / 1.0 · Phd 
-U1: 0.1 hp
9910 ID RUN 0 = OFF/IDMAGN, 1 = ON 1 0 (OFF/IDMAGN) 
9915 MOTOR COSPHI 0 = IDENTIFIED, 0.01…0.97 0.01 0 (IDENTIFIED) 
Group 01: OPERATING DATA
0101 SPEED & DIR -30000…30000 rpm 1 rpm -
0102 SPEED 0…30000 rpm 1 rpm -
0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz -
0104 CURRENT 0.0…2.0 · I2hd 0.1 A -
0105 TORQUE -200.0…200.0% 0.1% -
0106 POWER -2.0…2.0 · Phd 0.1 kW -
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0…2.5 · VdN 1V -
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0…2.0 · VdN 1V -
0110 DRIVE TEMP 0.0…150.0 C 0.1 C -
0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm 0.1 Hz / 1 rpm -
0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0.0…100.0% (0.0…600.0% for torque) 0.1% -
0113 CTRL LOCATION 0 = LOCAL, 1 = EXT1, 2 = EXT2 1 -
Parameters

0114 RUN TIME (R) 0…9999 h 1h -
0115 KWH COUNTER (R) 0…65535 kWh 1 kWh -
0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0.0…100.0% (0.0…600.0% for torque) 0.1% -
0118 DI 1-3 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 -
0119 DI 4-6 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 -
0120 AI 1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
0121 AI 2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
0122 RO 1-3 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 -
0123 RO 4-6 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 -
0124 AO 1 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA -
0125 AO 2 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA -
0126 PID 1 OUTPUT -1000.0…1000.0% 0.1% -
0127 PID 2 OUTPUT -100.0…100.0% 0.1% -
0128 PID 1 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par. 4006/ - -
4106 and 4007/4107
0129 PID 2 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and -
4207
0130 PID 1 FBK Unit and scale defined by par. 4006/ - -
4106 and 4007/4107
0131 PID 2 FBK Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and - -
4207
0132 PID 1 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par. 4006/ - -
4106 and 4007/4107
0133 PID 2 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and - -
4207
0134 COMM RO WORD 0…65535 1 -
0135 COMM VALUE 1 -32768…+32767 1 -
0136 COMM VALUE 2 -32768…+32767 1 -
0137 PROCESS VAR 1 - 1
0140 RUN TIME 0.00…499.99 kh 0.01 kh -
0141 MWH COUNTER 0…65535 MWh 1 MWh -
0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0…65535 Mrev 1 Mrev -
0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI 0…65535 days 1 day -
0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO 00:00:00…23:59:58 1=2s -
0145 MOTOR TEMP Par. 3501 = 1…3: -10…200 °C 1 -
Par. 3501 = 4: 0…5000 ohm
Par. 3501 = 5…6: 0…1
0146 MECH ANGLE 0…32768 1 -
0147 MECH REVS -32768 …+32767 1 -
0148 Z PLS DETECTED 0 = NOT DETECTED, 1 = DETECTED 1 -
0150 CB TEMP -20.0…150.0 °C 1.0 °C -
0153 MOT THERM STRESS 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 -32768 …+32767 1 -
0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 -32768 …+32767 1 -
0174 SAVED KWH 0.0…999.9 kWh 0.1 kWh -
Parameters

0175 SAVED MWH 0…65535 MWh 1 MWh -
0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0.0…999.9 0.1 -
0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 0…65535 1 -
0178 SAVED CO2 0.0…6553.5 tn 0.1 tn -
Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS
0301 FB CMD WORD 1 - - -
0302 FB CMD WORD 2 - - -
0303 FB STS WORD 1 - - -
0304 FB STS WORD 2 - 1 -
0305 FAULT WORD 1 - 1 -
0306 FAULT WORD 2 - 1 -
0307 FAULT WORD 3 - 1 -
0308 ALARM WORD 1 - 1 -
0309 ALARM WORD 2 - 1 -
Group 04: FAULT HISTORY
0401 LAST FAULT Fault codes (panel displays as text) 1 0
0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd.mm.yy / power-on time in days 1 day 0
0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh.mm.ss 2s 0
0404 SPEED AT FLT -32768…+32767 1 rpm 0
0405 FREQ AT FLT -3276.8…+3276.7 0.1 Hz 0
0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0.0…6553.5 0.1 V 0
0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0.0…6553.5 0.1 A 0
0408 TORQUE AT FLT -3276.8…+3276.7 0.1% 0
0409 STATUS AT FLT 0000…FFFF hex 1 0
0410 DI 1-3 AT FLT 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 0
0411 DI 4-6 AT FLT 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 0
0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 As par. 0401 1 0
0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 As par. 0401 1 0
Group 10: START/STOP/DIR
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0…14 1 2 (DI1,2) 
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0…14 1 0 (NOT SEL) 
1003 DIRECTION 1 = FORWARD, 2 = REVERSE, 1 3 (REQUEST) 
3 = REQUEST
1004 JOGGING SEL -6…6 1 0 (NOT SEL) 
Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT
1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 = REF1(Hz/rpm), 2 = REF2(%) 1 1 [REF1(Hz/rpm)]
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL -6…12 1 0 (EXT1) 
1103 REF1 SELECT 0…17, 20…21 1 1 (AI1) 
1104 REF1 MIN 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm 0.1 Hz / 1 rpm 0.0 Hz / 0 rpm
1105 REF1 MAX 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm 0.1 Hz / 1 rpm -01: 50.0 (52.0) Hz /
1500 rpm
-U1: 60.0 (62.0) Hz /
1800 rpm
1106 REF2 SELECT 0…17, 19…21 1 2 (AI2) 
1107 REF2 MIN 0.0…100.0% (0.0…600.0% for torque) 0.1% 0.0%
1108 REF2 MAX 0.0…100.0% (0.0…600.0% for torque) 0.1% 100.0%
Parameters

Group 12: CONSTANT SPEEDS
1201 CONST SPEED SEL -14 …19 1 9 (DI3,4) 
1202 CONST SPEED 1 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm 0.1 Hz / 1 rpm -01: 5.0 Hz / 300 rpm
-U1: 6.0 Hz / 360 rpm
-U1: 12.0 Hz / 720 rpm
-U1: 18.0 Hz / 1080 rpm
-U1: 24.0 Hz / 1440 rpm
-U1: 30.0 Hz / 1800 rpm
-U1: 48.0 Hz / 2880 rpm
-U1: 60.0 Hz / 3600 rpm
1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 = EXT/CS1/2/3, 2 = CS1/2/3/4 1 2 (CS1/2/3/4) 
Group 13: ANALOG INPUTS
1301 MINIMUM AI1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
1302 MAXIMUM AI1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
1303 FILTER AI1 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
1304 MINIMUM AI2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
1305 MAXIMUM AI2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
1306 FILTER AI2 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0…44, 46, 47, 52 1 1 (READY)
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0…44, 46, 47, 52 1 2 (RUN)
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0…44, 46, 47, 52 1 3 [FAULT(-1)]
1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1408 RO 3 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 0…44, 46, 47, 52 1 0 (NOT SEL)
1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Group 15: ANALOG OUTPUTS
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99…178 1 103 (parameter 0103
OUTPUT FREQ)
Parameters

1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN - - Depends on the signal
selected with par. 1501
1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX - - Depends on the signal
1504 MINIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 0.0 mA
1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 20.0 mA
1506 FILTER AO1 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99…178 1 104 (parameter 0104
CURRENT)
1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN - - Depends on the signal
1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX - - Depends on the signal
1510 MINIMUM AO2 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 0.0 mA
1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 20.0 mA
1512 FILTER AO2 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Group 16: SYSTEM CONTROLS
1601 RUN ENABLE -6…7 1 0 (NOT SEL) 
1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 = LOCKED, 1 = OPEN, 2 = NOT SAVED 1 1 (OPEN)
1603 PASS CODE 0…65535 1 0
1604 FAULT RESET sEL -6…8 1 0 (KEYPAD)
1605 USER PAR SET CHG -6…6 1 0 (NOT SEL)
1606 LOCAL LOCK -6…8 1 0 (NOT SEL)
1607 PARAM SAVE 0 = DONE, 1 = SAVE… 1 0 (DONE)
1608 START ENABLE 1 -6…7 1 0 (NOT SEL) 
1609 START ENABLE 2 -6…7 1 0 (NOT SEL) 
1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0 = NO, 1 = YES 1 0 (NO)
1611 PARAMETER VIEW 0 = DEFAULT, 1 = FLASHDROP 1 0 (DEFAULT)
1612 FAN CONTROL 0 = AUTO,1 = ON 1 0 (AUTO)
1613 FAULT RESET 0 = DEFAULT, 1 = RESET NOW 1 0 (DEFAULT)
Group 20: LIMITS
2001 MINIMUM SPEED -30000…30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm 
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0…30000 rpm 1 rpm -01: 1500 rpm / 
-U1: 1800 rpm
2003 MAX CURRENT 0… 1.8 · I2hd 0.1 A 1.8 · I2hd 
2005 OVERVOLT CTRL 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1 (ENABLE)
2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE(TIME), 1 1 [ENABLE(TIME)]
2 = ENABLE
2007 MINIMUM FREQ -500.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz -01: 50.0 (52.0) Hz / 
-U1: 60.0 (62.0) Hz
2013 MIN TORQUE SEL -6…7 1 0 (MIN TORQUE 1)
2014 MAX TORQUE SEL -6…7 1 0 (MAX TORQUE 1)
2015 MIN TORQUE 1 -600.0…0.0% 0.1% -300.0%
2016 MIN TORQUE 2 -600.0…0.0% 0.1% -300.0%
2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0.0…600.0% 0.1% 300.0%
2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0.0…600.0% 0.1% 300.0%
Parameters

Group 21: START/STOP
2101 START FUNCTION Vector control modes: 1, 2, 8 1 8 (RAMP) 
Scalar control mode: 1…5, 8
2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 = COAST, 2 = RAMP 1 1 (COAST)
2103 DC MAGN TIME 0.00…10.00 s 0.01 s 0.30 s
2104 DC HOLD CTL 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = DC HOLD, 1 0 (NOT SEL) 
2 = DC BRAKING
2105 DC HOLD SPEED 0…360 rpm 1 rpm 5 rpm
2106 DC CURR REF 0…100% 1% 30%
2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0.0…250.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
2108 START INHIBIT 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 0 (OFF)
2109 EMERG STOP SEL -6…6 1 0 (NOT SEL)
2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15…300% 1% 100%
2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY 0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1…60.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s (NOT SEL)
2113 START DELAY 0.00…60.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s
Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL -6…7 1 5 (DI5)
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
2203 DECELER TIME 1 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0.0 = LINEAR, 0.1…1000.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
2206 DECELER TIME 2 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0.0 = LINEAR, 0.1…1000.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s
2209 RAMP INPUT 0 -6…7 1 0 (NOT SEL)
Group 23: SPEED CONTROL
2301 PROP GAIN 0.00…200.00 0.01 5.00
2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0.00…600.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s
2303 DERIVATION TIME 0…10000 ms 1 ms 0 ms
2304 ACC COMPENSATION 0.00…600.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s
2305 AUTOTUNE RUN 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 0 (OFF)
Group 24: TORQUE CONTROL
2401 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00…120.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s
2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00…120.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s
Group 25: CRITICAL SPEEDS
2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 0 (OFF)
2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm 0.1 Hz / 1 rpm 0.0 Hz / 0 rpm
2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm 0.1 Hz / 1 rpm 0.0 Hz / 0 rpm
Group 26: MOTOR CONTROL
2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 0 (OFF)
2602 FLUX BRAKING 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 0 (OFF)
Parameters

2603 IR COMP VOLT 0.0…100.0 V 0.1 V Size dependent
2604 IR COMP FREQ 0…100% 1% 80%
2605 U/F RATIO 1 = LINEAR, 2 = SQUARED 1 1 (LINEAR)
2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1, 2, 4, 8, 12 kHz - 4 kHz
2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 1 (ON)
2608 SLIP COMP RATIO 0…200% 1% 0%
2609 NOISE SMOOTHING 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE)
2619 DC STABILIZER 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE)
2625 OVERMODULATION 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE)
Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG
2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0.0…6553.5 kh, 0.0 disables 0.1 kh 0.0 kh
2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0.0…6553.5 kh 0.1 kh 0.0 kh
2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0…65535 Mrev, 0 disables 1 Mrev 0 Mrev
2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0…65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0 Mrev
2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0.0…6553.5 kh, 0.0 disables 0.1 kh 0.0 kh
2906 RUN TIME ACT 0.0…6553.5 kh 0.1 kh 0.0 kh
2907 USER MWh TRIG 0.0…6553.5 MWh, 0.0 disables 0.1 MWh 0.0 MWh
2908 USER MWh ACT 0.0…6553.5 MWh 0.1 MWh 0.0 MWh
Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS
3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION 0…3 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1…3 1 1 (FAULT)
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 -6…6 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 -6…6 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3005 MOT THERM PROT 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = FAULT, 2 = ALARM 1 1 (FAULT)
3006 MOT THERM TIME 256…9999 s 1s 500 s
3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50…150% 1% 100%
3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25…150% 1% 70%
3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1…250 Hz 1 Hz 35 Hz
3010 STALL FUNCTION 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = FAULT, 2 = ALARM 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0.5…50.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 20.0 Hz
3012 STALL TIME 10…400 s 1s 20 s
3017 EARTH FAULT 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1 (ENABLE) 
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = FAULT, 2 = CONST SP 7, 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3 = LAST SPEED
3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0.0…600.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
3023 WIRING FAULT 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1 (ENABLE) 
3024 CB TEMP FAULT 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1 (ENABLE)
3028 EARTH FAULT LVL 1…3 1 -01: 2 (MEDIUM)
-U1: 1 (LOW)
Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET
3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0…5 1 0
3102 TRIAL TIME 1.0…600.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s
3103 DELAY TIME 0.0…120.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Parameters

3104 AR OVERCURRENT 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE)
3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE)
3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE)
3107 AR AI<MIN 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE)
3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE)
Group 32: SUPERVISION
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 100 = NOT SELECTED, 101…178 1 103 (parameter 0103
OUTPUT FREQ)
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO - - Depends on the signal
3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI - - Depends on the signal
CURRENT)
TORQUE)
Group 33: INFORMATION
3301 FIRMWARE 0000…FFFF hex 1 Firmware version
3302 LOADING PACKAGE 0000…FFFF hex 1 Type dependent
3303 TEST DATE yy.ww 0.01 -
3304 DRIVE RATING - - Type dependent
3305 PARAMETER TABLE 0000…FFFF hex 1 Type dependent
Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY
3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 = NOT SELECTED, 101…178 1 103 (parameter 0103
OUTPUT FREQ)
3402 SIGNAL1 MIN - - Depends on the signal
3403 SIGNAL1 MAX - - Depends on the signal
3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 0…9 1 9 (DIRECT)
3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 0…127 1 Depends on the signal
3406 OUTPUT1 MIN - - Depends on the signal
3407 OUTPUT1 MAX - - Depends on the signal
CURRENT)
Parameters

TORQUE)
Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS
3501 SENSOR TYPE 0…6 1 0 (NONE)
3502 INPUT SELECTION 1…8 1 1 (AI1)
3503 ALARM LIMIT Par. 3501 = 1…3: -10…200 °C 1 110 °C / 1500 ohm / 0
Par. 3501 = 4: 0…5000 ohm
Par. 3501 = 5…6: 0…1
3504 FAULT LIMIT Par. 3501 = 1…3: -10…200 °C 1 130 °C / 4000 ohm / 0
Par. 3501 = 4: 0…5000 ohm
Par. 3501 = 5…6: 0…1
Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS
3601 TIMERS ENABLE -6…7 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3602 START TIME 1 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
3603 STOP TIME 1 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
3604 START DAY 1 1…7 1 1 (MONDAY)
3605 STOP DAY 1 1…7 1 1 (MONDAY)
3606 START TIME 2 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
3607 STOP TIME 2 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
3610 START TIME 3 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
3611 STOP TIME 3 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
3614 START TIME 4 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
3615 STOP TIME 4 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
3622 BOOSTER SEL -6…6 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3623 BOOSTER TIME 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
Parameters

3626 TIMED FUNC 1…4 SRC 0…31 1 0 (NOT SEL)
…
3629
Group 37: USER LOAD CURVE
3701 USER LOAD C MODE 0…3 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3702 USER LOAD C FUNC 1 = FAULT, 2 = ALARM 1 1 (FAULT)
3703 USER LOAD C TIME 10…400 s 1s 20 s
3704 LOAD FREQ 1 0…500 Hz 1 Hz 5 Hz
3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 0…600% 1% 10%
3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 0…600% 1% 300%
3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0…500 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz
3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 0…600% 1% 15%
3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0…600% 1% 300%
3710 LOAD FREQ 3 0…500 Hz 1 Hz 43 Hz
3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 0…600% 1% 25%
3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 0…600% 1% 300%
3713 LOAD FREQ 4 0…500 Hz 1 Hz 50 Hz
3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 0…600% 1% 30%
3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0…600% 1% 300%
3716 LOAD FREQ 5 0…500 Hz 1 Hz 500 Hz
3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 0…600% 1% 30%
3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0…600% 1% 300%
Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1
4001 GAIN 0.1…100.0 0.1 1.0
4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1…3600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
4003 DERIVATION TIME 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s
4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0 = NO, 1 = YES 1 0 (NO)
4006 UNITS 0…127 1 4 (%)
4007 UNIT SCALE 0…4 1 1
4008 0% VALUE Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and - 0.0
4007
4007
4010 SET POINT SEL 0…2, 8…17, 19…20 1 1 (AI1) 
4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and - 40.0
4007
4012 SETPOINT MIN -500.0…500.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4013 SETPOINT MAX -500.0…500.0% 0.1% 100.0%
4014 FBK SEL 1…13 1 1 (ACT1)
4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 0.000 = NOT SEL, -32.768…32.767 0.001 0.000 (NOT SEL)
4016 ACT1 INPUT 1…7 1 2 (AI2) 
4017 ACT2 INPUT 1…7 1 2 (AI2) 
4018 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4020 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
Parameters

4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4022 SLEEP SELECTION -6…7 1 0 (NOT SEL)
4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm 0.1 Hz / 1 rpm 0.0 Hz / 0 rpm
4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
4025 WAKE-UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and - 0.0
4007
4026 WAKE-UP DELAY 0.00…60.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s
4027 PID 1 PARAM sET -6…14 1 0 (SET 1)
4101 GAIN 0.1…100.0 0.1 1.0
4106 UNITS 0…127 1 4 (%)
4107 UNIT SCALE 0…4 1 1
4107
4107
4110 SET POINT SEL 0…2, 8…17, 19…20 1 1 (AI1) 
4107
4112 SETPOINT MIN -500.0…500.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4113 SETPOINT MAX -500.0…500.0% 0.1% 100.0%
4114 FBK SEL 1…13 1 1 (ACT1)
4116 ACT1 INPUT 1…7 1 2 (AI2) 
4117 ACT2 INPUT 1…7 1 2 (AI2) 
4118 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4119 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4120 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4122 SLEEP SELECTION -6…7 1 0 (NOT SEL)
4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0…30000 rpm 0.1 Hz / 1 rpm 0.0 Hz / 0 rpm
4124 PID SLEEP DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
4125 WAKE-UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par. 4106 and - 0.0
4107
4126 WAKE-UP DELAY 0.00…60.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s
Group 42: EXT / TRIM PID
4201 GAIN 0.1…100.0 0.1 1.0
4206 UNITS 0…127 1 4 (%)
Parameters

4207 UNIT SCALE 0…4 1 1
4207
4207
4210 SET POINT SEL 0…2, 8…17, 19…20 1 1 (AI1) 
4207
4212 SETPOINT MIN -500.0…500.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4213 SETPOINT MAX -500.0…500.0% 0.1% 100.0%
4214 FBK SEL 1…13 1 1 (ACT1)
4216 ACT1 INPUT 1…7 1 2 (AI2) 
4217 ACT2 INPUT 1…7 1 2 (AI2) 
4218 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4219 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4220 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4221 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4228 ACTIVATE -6…12 1 0 (NOT SEL)
4229 OFFSET 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4230 TRIM MODE 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = PROPORTIONAL, 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3 = DIRECT
4231 TRIM SCALE -100.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 = PID2REF, 2 = PID2OUTPUT 1 1 (PID2REF)
Group 45: ENERGY SAVING
4502 ENERGY PRICE 0.00…655.35 0.01 0.00
4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR 0.0…10.0 tn/MWh 0.1 tn/MWh 0.5 tn/MWh
4508 PUMP POWER 0.0…1000.0% 0.1% 100.0%
4509 ENERGY RESET 0 = DONE, 1 = RESET 1 0 (DONE)
Group 50: ENCODER
5001 PULSE NR 50…16384 1 1024 
5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE) 
5003 ENCODER FAULT 1 = FAULT, 2 = ALARM 1 1 (FAULT) 
5010 Z PLS ENABLE 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE) 
5011 POSITION RESET 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0 (DISABLE)
Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE
5101 FBA TYPE - - 0 (NOT DEFINED)
5102 … FB PAR 2…26 0…65535 1 0
5126
5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0 = DONE, 1 = REFRESH 1 0 (DONE) 
5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0000…FFFF hex 1 0
5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0000…FFFF hex 1 0
5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0000…FFFF hex 1 0
5131 FBA STATUS 0…6 1 0 (IDLE)
5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0000…FFFF hex 1 0
5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0000…FFFF hex 1 0
Parameters

5201 STATION ID 1…247 1 1
5202 BAUD RATE 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2 kbits/s - 9.6 kbits/s
5203 PARITY 0 = 8 NONE 1, 1 = 8 NONE 2, 1 0 (8 NONE 1)
2 = 8 EVEN 1, 3 = 8 ODD 1
5204 OK MESSAGES 0…65535 1 -
5205 PARITY ERRORS 0…65535 1 -
5206 FRAME ERRORS 0…65535 1 -
5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0…65535 1 -
5208 CRC ERRORS 0…65535 1 -
Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL
5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0…0xFFFF 1 0
5302 EFB STATION ID 0…65535 1 1 
5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 76.8 - 9.6 kbits/s
kbits/s
5304 EFB PARITY 0 = 8 NONE 1, 1 = 8 NONE 2, 0 (8 NONE 1)
2 = 8 EVEN 1, 3 = 8 ODD 1
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 = ABB DRV LIM, 1 = DCU PROFILE, 1 0 (ABB DRV LIM)
2 = ABB DRV FULL
5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0…65535 1 0
5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0…65535 1 0
5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0…65535 1 0
5309 EFB STATUS 0…7 1 0 (IDLE)
5310 EFB PAR 10 0…65535 1 0
5311 EFB PAR 11 0…65535 1 0
5312 EFB PAR 12 0…65535 1 0
5313 EFB PAR 13 0…65535 1 0
5314 EFB PAR 14 0…65535 1 0
5315 EFB PAR 15 0…65535 1 0
5316 EFB PAR 16 0…65535 1 0
5317 EFB PAR 17 0…65535 1 0
5318 EFB PAR 18 0…65535 1 0
5319 EFB PAR 19 0000…FFFF hex 1 0
5320 EFB PAR 20 0000…FFFF hex 1 0
Group 64: LOAD ANALYZER
6401 PVL SIGNAL 100…178 1 103 (parameter 0103
OUTPUT FREQ)
6402 PVL FILTER TIME 0.0…120.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
6403 LOGGERS RESET -6…7 1 0 (NOT SEL)
6404 AL2 SIGNAL 101…178 1 103 (parameter 0103
OUTPUT FREQ)
6405 AL2 SIGNAL BASE - - Depends on the signal
selected with par. 6404.
6406 PEAK VALUE - - -
6407 PEAK TIME 1 Date dd.mm.yy / power-on time in days 1 d -
6408 PEAK TIME 2 Time hh.mm.ss 2s -
6409 CURRENT AT PEAK 0.0…6553.5 A 0.1 A -
Parameters

6410 UDC AT PEAK 0…65535 V 1V -
6411 FREQ AT PEAK 0.0…6553.5 Hz 0.1 Hz -
6412 TIME OF RESET 1 Date dd.mm.yy / power-on time in days 1 d -
6413 TIME OF RESET 2 Time hh.mm.ss 2s -
6414 AL1RANGE0TO10 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6415 AL1RANGE10TO20 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6416 AL1RANGE20TO30 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6417 AL1RANGE30TO40 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6418 AL1RANGE40TO50 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6419 AL1RANGE50TO60 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6420 AL1RANGE60TO70 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6421 AL1RANGE70TO80 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6422 AL1RANGE80TO90 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6423 AL1RANGE90TO 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6424 AL2RANGE0TO10 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6425 AL2RANGE10TO20 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6426 AL2RANGE20TO30 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6427 AL2RANGE30TO40 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6428 AL2RANGE40TO50 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6429 AL2RANGE50TO60 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6430 AL2RANGE60TO70 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6431 AL2RANGE70TO80 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6432 AL2RANGE80TO90 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
6433 AL2RANGE90TO 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
Group 81: PFC CONTROL
8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
8109 START FREQ 1 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz -01: 50.0 Hz /
-U1: 60.0 Hz
-U1: 60.0 Hz
-U1: 60.0 Hz
8112 LOW FREQ 1 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz -01: 25.0 Hz /
-U1: 30.0 Hz
8113 LOW FREQ 2 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz -01: 25.0 Hz /
-U1: 30.0 Hz
8114 LOW FREQ 3 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz -01: 25.0 Hz /
-U1: 30.0 Hz
8115 AUX MOT START D 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s
8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0…4 1 1 
8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV -0.1 = TEST MODE, 0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1 h 0.0 h (NOT SEL) 
0.1…336.0 h
8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 50.0%
8120 INTERLOCKS 0…6 1 4 (DI4) 
Parameters

8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 = NO, 1 = YES 1 0 (NO)
8122 PFC START DELAY 0.00…10.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s
8123 PFC ENABLE 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = ACTIVE 1 0 (NOT SEL) 
8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1…1800.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s (NOT SEL)
8125 DEC IN AUX START 0.0 = NOT SEL, 0.1…1800.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s (NOT SEL)
8126 TMED AUTOCHNG 0…4 1 0 (NOT SEL)
8127 MOTORS 1…7 1 2 
8128 AUX START ORDER 1 = EVEN RUNTIME, 2 = RELAY ORDER 1 1 (EVEN RUNTIME) 
Group 98: OPTIONS
9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = STD MODBUS, 1 0 (NOT SEL) 
4 = EXT FBA
Parameters
Complete parameter descriptions

This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACS550.
Group 99: START-UP DATA

This group defines special start-up data required to:
• set up the drive
• enter motor information.
Code Description
9901 LANGUAGE
Selects the display language. There are two different Assistant Control Panels, each supporting a different language
set. (Panel ACS-CP-L supporting languages 0, 2, 11…15 has been integrated into ACS-CP-A.)
Assistant Control Panel ACS-CP-A:
0 = ENGLISH 1 = ENGLISH (AM) 2 = DEUTSCH 3 = ITALIANO 4 = ESPAÑOL
5 = PORTUGUES 6 = NEDERLANDS 7 = FRANÇAIS 8 = DANSK 9 = SUOMI
10 = SVENSKA 11 = RUSSKI 12 = POLSKI 13 = TÜRKÇE 14 = CZECH
15 = MAGYAR 16 = ELLINIKA
Assistant Control Panel ACS-CP-D (Asia):
0 = ENGLISH 1 = CHINESE 2 = KOREAN 3 = JAPANESE
9902 APPLIC MACRO
Selects an application macro. Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS550 for a
particular application.
1 = ABB STANDARD 2 = 3-WIRE 3 = ALTERNATE 4 = MOTOR POT 5 = HAND/AUTO

6 = PID CONTROL 7 = PFC CONTROL 8 = TORQUE CTRL 31 = LOAD FD SET
0 = USER S1 LOAD -1 = USER S1 SAVE -2 = USER S2 LOAD -3 = USER S2 SAVE
31 = LOAD FD SET – FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file. Parameter view is selected by
parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW.
• FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives. FlashDrop allows easy
customization of the parameter list, e.g. selected parameters can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-01
FlashDrop User’s Manual (3AFE68591074 [English]).
-1 = USER S1 SAVE, -3 = USER S2 SAVE – With these it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the
drive permanent memory for later use. Each set contains parameter settings, including Group 99: START-UP
DATA, and the results of the motor identification run.
0 = USER S1 LOAD, -2 = USER S2 LOAD – With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use.
Selects the motor control mode.
1 = VECTOR:SPEED – sensorless vector control mode.
• Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm.
• Reference 2 is speed reference in % (100% is absolute maximum speed, equal to the value of parameter 2002
MAXIMUM SPEED, or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum
speed).
2 = VECTOR:TORQ.
• Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm.
• Reference 2 is torque reference in % (100% is nominal torque.)
3 = SCALAR:FREQ – scalar control mode.
• Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz.
• Reference 2 is frequency reference in % (100% is absolute maximum frequency, equal to the value of parameter
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ, or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the
maximum speed).
Parameters
Code Description
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
Defines the nominal motor voltage.
• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate. Output voltage
• The ACS550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input
power (mains) voltage.
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR P 9905
Defines the nominal motor current.
• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
• Range allowed: 0.2…2.0 · I2hd (where I2hd is drive current). Output
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ frequency
Defines the nominal motor frequency. P 9907
• Range: 10…500 Hz (typically 50 or 60 Hz)
• Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT.
• Field weakening point = Nom Freq · Supply Volt / Mot Nom Volt
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED
Defines the nominal motor speed.
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER
Defines the nominal motor power.
9910 ID RUN
This parameter controls a self-calibration process called the Motor ID Run. During this process, the drive operates
the motor (motor rotating) and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model
used for internal calculations. An ID Run is especially effective when:
• vector control mode is used [parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ)], and/or
• operation point is near zero speed, and/or
• operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque, over a wide speed range, and without any
measured speed feedback (i.e. without a pulse encoder).
0 = OFF/IDMAGN – The Motor ID Run process is not run. Identification magnetization is performed, depending on
parameter 9904 and 2101 settings. In identification magnetization, the motor model is calculated at first start by
magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed (motor not rotating). The model is recalculated always at start
after motor parameter changes.
• Parameter 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ): Identification magnetization is performed.
• Parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 = 3 (SCALAR FLYST) or 5 (FLY + BOOST): Identification
magnetization is performed.
• Parameter 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ) and parameter 2101 has other value than 3 (SCALAR FLYST) or 5 (FLY +
BOOST): Identification magnetization is not performed.
1 = ON – Enables the Motor ID Run, during which the motor is rotating, at the next start command. After run
completion, this value automatically changes to 0.
Note: The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment.
Note: If motor parameters are changed after ID Run, repeat the ID Run.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50…80% of the nominal speed during the ID Run. The
motor will rotate in the forward direction.
Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run!
See also section How to perform the ID Run on page 45.
9915 MOTOR COSPHI
Defines the nominal motor cos phi (power factor). The parameter improves performance especially with high
efficiency motors.
0 = IDENTIFIED – Drive identifies the cos phi automatically by estimation.
0.01…0.97 – Value entered used as the cos phi.
Parameters
Group 01: OPERATING DATA

This group contains drive operating data, including actual signals. The drive sets the
values for actual signals, based on measurements or calculations. You cannot set
these values.
Code Description
0101 SPEED & DIR
The calculated signed speed of the motor (rpm). The absolute value of 0101 SPEED & DIR is the same as the value of
0102 SPEED.
• The value of 0101 SPEED & DIR is positive if the motor runs in the forward direction.
• The value of 0101 SPEED & DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction.
0102 SPEED
The calculated speed of the motor (rpm). (Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output
mode.)
0103 OUTPUT FREQ
The frequency (Hz) applied to the motor. (Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output
mode.)
0104 CURRENT
The motor current, as measured by the ACS550. (Shown by default in the control panel Output mode.)
0105 TORQUE
Output torque. Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in % of motor nominal torque. (Shown by default in the
control panel Output mode.)
0106 POWER
The measured motor power in kW.
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE
The DC bus voltage in V DC, as measured by the ACS550.
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE
The voltage applied to the motor.
0110 DRIVE TEMP
The temperature of the drive power transistors in degrees Celsius.
0111 EXTERNAL REF 1
External reference, REF1, in rpm or Hz – units determined by parameter 9904.
0112 EXTERNAL REF 2
External reference, REF2, in %.
0113 CTRL LOCATION
Active control location. Alternatives are:
0 = LOCAL
1 = EXT1
2 = EXT2
0114 RUN TIME (R)
The drive’s accumulated running time in hours (h).
• Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode.
0115 KWH COUNTER (R)
The drive’s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours.
• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.
0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT
Application block output signal. Value is from either:
• PFC control, if PFC Control is active, or
• Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2.
Parameters
Code Description
0118 DI 1-3 STATUS
Status of the three digital inputs.
• Status is displayed as a binary number.
• 1 indicates that the input is activated.
• 0 indicates that the input is deactivated.
0119 DI 4-6 STATUS DI 1 DI 2 DI 3
Status of the three digital inputs.
• See parameter 0118 DI 1-3 STATUS.
0120 AI 1
The relative value of analog input 1 in %.
0121 AI 2
The relative value of analog input 2 in %.
0122 RO 1-3 STATUS
Status of the three relay outputs.
• 1 indicates that the relay is energized.
• 0 indicates that the relay is de-energized.
0123 RO 4-6 STATUS RELAY 1 STATUS
Status of the three relay outputs. Available if OREL-01 Relay Output RELAY 2 STATUS
Extension Module is installed. RELAY 3 STATUS
• See parameter 0122.
0124 AO 1
The analog output 1 value in milliamperes.
0125 AO 2
The analog output 2 value in milliamperes.
0126 PID 1 OUTPUT
The PID controller 1 output value in %.
0127 PID 2 OUTPUT
The PID controller 2 output value in %.
0128 PID 1 SETPNT
The PID 1 controller setpoint signal.
• Units and scale defined by PID parameters.
0129 PID 2 SETPNT
The PID 2 controller setpoint signal.
0130 PID 1 FBK
The PID 1 controller feedback signal.
0131 PID 2 FBK
The PID 2 controller feedback signal.
0132 PID 1 DEVIATION
The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value.
0133 PID 2 DEVIATION
The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value.
0134 COMM RO WORD
Free data location that can be written from serial link.
• Used for relay output control.
0135 COMM VALUE 1
Parameters
Code Description
0136 COMM VALUE 2
0137 PROCESS VAR 1
Process variable 1
• Defined by parameters in Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY.
0138 PROCESS VAR 2
Process variable 2
0139 PROCESS VAR 3
Process variable 3
0140 RUN TIME
The drive’s accumulated running time in thousands of hours (kh).
• Cannot be reset.
0141 MWH COUNTER
The drive’s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours.
0142 REVOLUTION CNTR
The motor’s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions.
0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI
The drive’s accumulated power-on time in days.
0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO
The drive’s accumulated power-on time in 2 second ticks (30 ticks = 60 seconds).
• Shown in format hh.mm.ss.
0145 MOTOR TEMP
Motor temperature in degrees Celsius / PTC resistance in ohms.
• Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up.
0146 MECH ANGLE
Defines the motor shaft’s angular position to about 0.01° (32,768 divisions for 360°). The position is defined as 0 at
power up.
During operation the zero position can be set by:
• a Z-pulse input, if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE = 1 (ENABLE)
• parameter 5011 POSITION RESET, if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE = 2 (DISABLE)
• any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE.
0147 MECH REVS
A signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft. The value:
• increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0
• decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 0 to 32767.
0148 Z PLS DETECTED
Encoder zero pulse detector. When a Z-pulse defines the zero position, the shaft must pass through the zero position
to trigger a Z-pulse. Until then, the shaft position is unknown (the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero).
This parameter signals when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid. The parameter starts at 0 = NOT DETECTED on
power-up and changes to 1 = DETECTED only if:
• parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE = 1 (ENABLE) and
• an encoder Z-pulse has been detected.
0150 CB TEMP
Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius.
Note: Some drives have a control board (OMIO) that does not support this feature. These drives always show the
constant value of 25.0 °C.
Parameters
Code Description
0153 MOT THERM STRESS
Estimated rise of the motor temperature. Value equals to the estimated motor thermal stress as a percentage of the
motor temperature trip level.
0158 PID COMM VALUE 1
Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2).
0159 PID COMM VALUE 2
Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2).
0174 SAVED KWH
Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply. See the note
on page 180.
• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999.9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.0
and the counter value of signal 0175 is incremented by one. Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET
(resets all energy calculators at the same time).
• See Group 45: ENERGY SAVING.
0175 SAVED MWH
Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply. See the note
on page 180.
• Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all energy calculators at the same time).
0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1
Energy saved in local currency (remainder when the total saved energy is divided by 1000). See the note on page
180.
• To find out the total saved energy in currency units, add the value of parameter 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the
value of parameter 0176.
Example:
0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 = 123.4
0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 = 5
Total saved energy = 5 · 1000 + 123.4 = 5123.4 currency units.
• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999.9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.0
and the counter value of signal 0177 is incremented by one.
• Local energy price is set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE.
0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2
Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units. Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units. See the note on
page 180.
• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 (the counter does not roll over).
• See parameter 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1.
0178 SAVED CO2
Reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn. See the note on page 180.
• The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 6553.5 (the counter does not roll over).
• CO2 conversion factor is set with parameter 4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR.
Parameters
Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS

This group monitors fieldbus communications.
Code Description
0301 FB CMD WORD 1
Read-only copy of the Fieldbus Bit # 0301, FB CMD WORD 1 0302, FB CMD WORD 2
Command Word 1.
0 STOP FBLOCAL_CTL
• The fieldbus command is the principal
means for controlling the drive from a 1 START FBLOCAL_REF
fieldbus controller. The command 2 REVERSE START_DISABLE1
consists of two Command Words. Bit-
coded instructions in the Command 3 LOCAL START_DISABLE2
Words switch the drive between 4 RESET Reserved
states.
5 EXT2 Reserved
• To control the drive, using the
Command Words, an external location 6 RUN_DISABLE Reserved
(EXT1 or EXT2) must be active and set 7 STPMODE_R Reserved
to COMM. (See parameters 1001 and
1002.) 8 STPMODE_EM Reserved
• The control panel displays the word in 9 STPMODE_C Reserved
hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in
10 RAMP_2 Reserved
Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a
1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000. 11 RAMP_OUT_0 REF_CONST
0302 FB CMD WORD 2 12 RAMP_HOLD REF_AVE
Read-only copy of the Fieldbus 13 RAMP_IN_0 LINK_ON
Command Word 2.
14 RREQ_LOCALLOC REQ_STARTINH
15 TORQLIM2 OFF_INTERLOCK
0303 FB STS WORD 1

Read-only copy of the Status Word 1. Bit # 0303, FB STS WORD 1 0304, FB STS WORD 2
• The drive sends status information to
0 READY ALARM
the fieldbus controller. The status
consists of two Status Words. 1 ENABLED NOTICE
• The control panel displays the word in 2 STARTED DIRLOCK
Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK
1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000. 4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE
0304 FB STS WORD 2 5 ACCELERATE Reserved
Read-only copy of the Status Word 2. 6 DECELERATE Reserved
7 AT_SETPOINT CPY_CTL
8 LIMIT CPY_REF1
9 SUPERVISION CPY_REF2
10 REV_REF REQ_CTL
11 REV_ACT REQ_REF1
12 PANEL_LOCAL REQ_REF2
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL REQ_REF2EXT
14 EXT2_ACT ACK_STARTINH
15 FAULT ACK_OFF_ILCK
Parameters
Code Description
0305 FAULT WORD 1
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 1. Bit # 0305, FAULT WORD 1 0306, FAULT WORD 2 0307, FAULT WORD 3
• When a fault is active, the
0 OVERCURRENT Obsolete EFB 1
corresponding bit for the active fault is
set in the Fault Words. 1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2
• Each fault has a dedicated bit 2 DEV OVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3
allocated within Fault Words.
• See section Fault listing on page 260 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR INCOMPATIBLE SW
for a description of the faults. 4 Reserved CURR MEAS USER LOAD CURVE
• The control panel displays the word in
5 DC UNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved
Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a 6 AI1 LOSS ENCODER ERR Reserved
1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000. 7 AI2 LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved
0306 FAULT WORD 2 8 MOT OVERTEMP Reserved Reserved
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 2.
9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved
10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System error
0307 FAULT WORD 3
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 3. 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System error
• See parameter 0305. 12 CB OVERTEMP EFB CON FILE System error
13 EXT FAULT 1 FORCE TRIP System error
14 EXT FAULT 2 MOTOR PHASE System error
15 EARTH FAULT OUTP WIRING Param. setting fault
0308 ALARM WORD 1

• When an alarm is active, the Bit # 0308, ALARM WORD 1 0309, ALARM WORD 2
corresponding bit for the active alarm
is set in the Alarm Words. 0 OVERCURRENT Reserved
• Each alarm has a dedicated bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP
allocated within Alarm Words.
2 UNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN
• Bits remain set until the whole alarm
word is reset. (Reset by writing zero to 3 DIR LOCK Reserved
the word.) 4 IO COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING
• The control panel displays the word in
hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in 5 AI1 LOSS START ENABLE 2 MISSING
Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and a 6 AI2 LOSS EMERGENCY STOP
1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.
7 PANEL LOSS ENCODER ERROR
0309 ALARM WORD 2
8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START
See parameter 0308.
9 MOTOR TEMP Reserved
10 Reserved USER LOAD CURVE
11 MOTOR STALL START DELAY
12 AUTORESET Reserved
13 AUTOCHANGE Reserved
14 PFC I LOCK Reserved
15 Reserved Reserved
Parameters
Group 04: FAULT HISTORY

This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive.
Code Description
0401 LAST FAULT
0 – Clear the fault history (on panel = NO RECORD).
n – Fault code of the last recorded fault. The fault code is displayed as a name. See section Fault listing on page 260
for the fault codes and names. The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding
name in the fault listing, which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display.
0402 FAULT TIME 1
The day on which the last fault occurred. Either as:
• A date – if real time clock is operating.
• The number of days after power on – if real time clock is not used, or was not set.
0403 FAULT TIME 2
The time at which the last fault occurred. Either as:
• Real time, in format hh:mm:ss – if real time clock is operating.
• The time since power on (minus the whole days reported in 0402), in format hh:mm:ss – if real time clock is not
used, or was not set.
• Format on the Basic Control Panel: The time since power on in 2-second ticks (minus the whole days reported in
0402). 30 ticks = 60 seconds. E.g. Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds (= 514/30).
0404 SPEED AT FLT
The motor speed (rpm) at the time the last fault occurred.
0405 FREQ AT FLT
The frequency (Hz) at the time the last fault occurred.
0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT
The DC bus voltage (V) at the time the last fault occurred.
0407 CURRENT AT FLT
The motor current (A) at the time the last fault occurred.
0408 TORQUE AT FLT
The motor torque (%) at the time the last fault occurred.
0409 STATUS AT FLT
The drive status (hex code word) at the time the last fault occurred.
0410 DI 1-3 AT FLT
The status of digital inputs 1…3 at the time the last fault occurred.
0411 DI 4-6 AT FLT
The status of digital inputs 4…6 at the time the last fault occurred.
0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1
Fault code of the second last fault. Read-only.
0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2
Fault code of the third last fault. Read-only.
Parameters
Group 10: START/STOP/DIR

This group:
• defines external sources (EXT1 and EXT2) for commands that enable start, stop
and direction changes
• locks direction or enables direction control.
To select between the two external locations use the next group (parameter 1102).
Code Description
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
Defines external control location 1 (EXT1) – the configuration of start, stop and direction commands.
0 = NOT SEL – No external start, stop and direction command source.
1 = DI1 – Two-wire Start/Stop.
• Start/Stop is through digital input DI1 (DI1 activated = Start; DI1 de-activated = Stop).
• Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = 1 (FORWARD).
2 = DI1,2 – Two-wire Start/Stop, Direction.
• Direction control [requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)] is through digital input DI2
(DI2 activated = Reverse; de-activated = Forward).
3 = DI1P,2P – Three-wire Start/Stop.
• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons (the P stands for “pulse”).
• Start is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI1. In order to start the drive, the digital
input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1.
• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.
• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital input DI2.
• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.
4 = DI1P,2P,3 – Three-wire Start/Stop, Direction.
• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons, as described for DI1P,2P.
• Direction control [requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)] is through digital input DI3
5 = DI1P,2P,3P – Start Forward, Start Reverse and Stop.
• Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push-buttons (the P stands
for “pulse”).
• Start Forward command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI1. In order to start the
drive, the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1.
• Start Reverse command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI2. In order to start
the drive, the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2.
• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.
• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital input DI3.
• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.
• Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
6 = DI6 – Two-wire Start/Stop.
7 = DI6,5 – Two-wire Start/Stop/Direction.
• Direction control [requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)] is through digital input DI5.
8 = KEYPAD – Control Panel.
• Start/Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active.
• Direction control requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
9 = DI1F,2R – Start/Stop/Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations.
• Start forward = DI1 activated and DI2 de-activated.
• Start reverse = DI1 de-activated and DI2 activated.
• Stop = both DI1 and DI2 activated, or both de-activated.
10 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start/stop and direction commands.
• Bits 0,1, 2 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the start/stop and direction commands.
• See Fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
Parameters
Code Description
11 = TIMED FUNC 1. – Assigns Start/Stop control to Timed Function 1 (Timed Function activated = START; Timed
Function de-activated = STOP). See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
12…14 = TIMED FUNC 2…4 – Assigns Start/Stop control to Timed Function 2…4. See TIMED FUNC 1 above.
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS
Defines external control location 2 (EXT2) – the configuration of start, stop and direction commands.
• See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above.
1003 DIRECTION
Defines the control of motor rotation direction.
1 = FORWARD – Rotation is fixed in the forward direction.
2 = REVERSE – Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction.
3 = REQUEST – Rotation direction can be changed on command.
1004 JOGGING SEL
Defines the signal that activates the jogging function. Jogging uses Constant Speed 7 (parameter 1208) for speed
reference and ramp pair 2 (parameters 2205 and 2206) for accelerating and decelerating. When the jogging
activation signal is lost, the drive uses ramp stop to decelerate to zero speed, even if coast stop is used in normal
operation (parameter 2102). The jogging status can be parameterized to relay outputs (parameter 1401). The jogging
status is also seen in DCU Profile status bit 21.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the jogging function.
1 = DI1 – Activates/de-activates jogging based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = jogging active; DI1 de-activated =
jogging inactive).
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input. See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Activates jogging based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = jogging inactive; DI1 de-activated = jogging
active).
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input. See DI1(INV) above.
Parameters
Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT

This group defines:
• how the drive selects between command sources
• characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2.
Code Description
1101 KEYPAD REF SEL
Selects the reference controlled in local control mode.
1 = REF1(Hz/rpm) – Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.
• Speed reference (rpm) if 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:sPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ).
• Frequency reference (Hz) if 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).
2 = REF2(%)
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL
Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2. Thus, defines the source for
Start/Stop/Direction commands and reference signals.
0 = EXT1 – Selects external control location 1 (EXT1).
• See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1’s Start/Stop/Dir definitions.
• See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1’s reference definitions.
1 = DI1 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = EXT2; DI1 de-activated = EXT1).
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input. See DI1 above.
7 = EXT2 – Selects external control location 2 (EXT2).
• See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2’s Start/Stop/Dir definitions.
• See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2’s reference definitions.
8 = COMM – Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word.
• Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) defines the active external control location (EXT1 or EXT2).
• See Fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
9 = TIMED FUNC 1 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function (Timed Function
activated = EXT2; Timed Function de-activated = EXT1). See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
10…12 = TIMED FUNC 2…4 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function. See TIMED
FUNC 1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = EXT1; DI1 de-activated =
EXT2).
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input. See
DI1(INV) above.
1103 REF1 SELECT
EXT REF 1 MAX
Selects the signal source for external reference REF1.
0 = KEYPAD – Defines the control panel as the reference
source.
1 = AI1 – Defines analog input 1 (AI1) as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN
source.
2 = AI2 – Defines analog input 2 (AI2) as the reference - EXT REF 1 MIN
source. 10 V /
3 = AI1/JOYST – Defines analog input 1 (AI1), configured for 20 mA
joystick operation, as the reference source. - EXT REF 1 MAX
• The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum
reference in the reverse direction. Define the minimum 2 V / 4 mA
0 V / 0 mA
using parameter 1104. EXT REF 1 MIN
• The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum -2% +2%
reference in the forward direction. Define the maximum - EXT REF 1 MIN
using parameter 1105.
Hysteresis 4% of full scale
WARNING! Because the low end of the reference
range commands full reverse operation, do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range. Doing so
means that if the control signal is lost (which is a 0 V input) the result is full reverse operation. Instead, use
the following set-up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault, stopping the drive:
• Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 (1304 MINIMUM AI2) at 20% (2 V or 4 mA).
• Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5% or higher.
• Set parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION to 1 (FAULT).
4 = AI2/JOYST – Defines analog input 2 (AI2), configured for joystick operation, as the reference source.
• See above (AI1/JOYST) description.
Parameters
Code Description
5 = DI3U,4D(R) – Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source (motor potentiometer control).
• Digital input DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”).
• Digital input DI4 decreases the speed (the D stands for “down”).
• A Stop command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for “reset”).
• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate of change.
6 = DI3U,4D – Same as above (DI3U,4D(R)), except:
• A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero. The reference is stored.
• When the drive restarts, the motor ramps up (at the selected acceleration rate) to the stored reference.
7 = DI5U,6D – Same as above (DI3U,4D), except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used.
8 = COMM – Defines the fieldbus as the reference source.
9 = COMM+AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog input
reference correction below.
10 = COMM*AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog input
11 = DI3U,4D(RNC) – Same as DI3U,4D(R) above, except that:
• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1, LOC to REM) does not copy the reference.
12 = DI3U,4D(NC) – Same as DI3U,4D above, except that:
• Stop command resets reference to zero.
13 = DI5U,6D(NC) – Same as DI5U,6D above, except that:
14 = AI1+AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog input reference correction below.
15 = AI1*AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
16 = AI1-AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
17 = AI1/AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
20 = KEYPAD(RNC) – Defines the control panel as the reference source.
• A Stop command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for reset.).
• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1) does not copy the reference.
21 = KEYPAD(NC) – Defines the control panel as the reference source.
• A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero. The reference is stored.
• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1) does not copy the reference.
Analog input reference correction
Parameter values 9, 10 and 14…17 use the formula in the following table.
Value setting Calculation of the AI reference
C+B C value + (B value - 50% of reference value)
C*B C value · (B value / 50% of reference value)
C-B (C value + 50% of reference value) - B value
C/B (C value · 50% of reference value) / B value
Where:
• C = Main reference value 120
( = COMM for values 9, 10 and 17 (/)
= AI1 for values 14…17). 100
• B = Correcting reference
( = AI1 for values 9, 10 and 80
= AI2 for values 14…17). 9, 14 (+)
Example: 60
The figure shows the reference source curves for value 40 10, 15 (*)
settings 9, 10 and 14…17, where:
• C = 25%. 20
• P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0. 16 (-)
• P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0. 0
0 100% B
• B varies along the horizontal axis.
Parameters
Code Description
1104 REF1 MIN Ext ref
Sets the minimum for external reference 1.
• The minimum analog input signal (as a percent of the full
signal in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF1 MIN in P 1105
Hz/rpm. (MAX)
• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets
the minimum analog input signal.
• These parameters (reference and analog min. and max.
settings) provide scale and offset adjustment for the
reference. P 1104 Analog
1105 REF1 MAX (MIN) input signal
Sets the maximum for external reference 1. P 1301 P 1302
• The maximum analog input signal (as a percent of full or 1304 or 1305
the signal in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF1 MAX
in Hz/rpm. Ext ref
• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets
the maximum analog input signal. P 1104
(MIN)
P 1105
(MAX)
Analog
P 1301 P 1302 input signal

or 1304 or 1305
1106 REF2 SELECT

Selects the signal source for external reference REF2.
0…17 – Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT.
19 = PID1OUT – The reference is taken from the PID1 output. See Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41:
PROCESS PID SET 2.
20…21 – Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT.
If PFC is used
19= PID1 REF2 LIMIT
SELECT MAX (1107, 1108) PFC
1…17
20…21 MIN (1107, 1108)
1107 REF2 MIN

Sets the minimum for external reference 2.
• The minimum analog input signal (in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF2 MIN in %.
• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal.
• This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference.
• The value is a percentage of the:
– maximum frequency or speed
– maximum process reference
– nominal torque.
1108 REF2 MAX
Sets the maximum for external reference 2.
• The maximum analog input signal (in volts or amperes) corresponds to REF2 MAX in %.
• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal.
• This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference.
• The value is a percentage of the:
– maximum frequency or speed
– maximum process reference
– nominal torque.
Parameters
Group 12: CONSTANT SPEEDS

This group defines a set of constant speeds. In general:
• You can program up to 7 constant speeds, ranging from 0…500 Hz or
0…30000 rpm.
• Values must be positive (No negative speed values for constant speeds).
• Constant speed selections are ignored if:
– the torque control is active, or
– the process PID reference is followed, or
– the drive is in local control mode, or
– PFC (Pump-Fan Control) is active.
Note: Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so-called fault speed which
may be activated if the control signal is lost. For example, see parameters 3001
AI<MIN FUNCTION, 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
Code Description
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds. See general comments in introduction.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the constant speed function.
1 = DI1 – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1.
• Digital input activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2…DI6. See above.
7 = DI1,2 – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI1 and DI2.
• Uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 Function
0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
• Can be set up as a so-called fault speed, which is activated if the control signal is lost. Refer to parameter 3001
AI<MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR.
• See above (DI1,2) for code.
12 = DI1,2,3 – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI1, DI2 and DI3.
• Uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 DI3 Function
0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
Parameters
Code Description
• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.
• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.
15…18 = TIMED FUNC 1…4 – Selects Constant Speed 1, Constant Speed 2 or the external reference, depending on
the state of the Timed Function (1…4) and constant speed mode. See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and Group
36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
19 = TIMED FUN1&2 – Selects a constant speed or the external reference, depending on the state of Timed Functions
1 & 2 and constant speed mode. See parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1.
• Inverse operation: Digital input de-activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.
-2…- 6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input. See above.
-7 = DI1,2(INV) – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI1 and DI2.
• Inverse operation uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 Function
1 1 No constant speed
• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.
-12 = DI1,2,3(INV) – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI1, DI2 and DI3.
• Inverse operation uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 DI3 Function

1 1 1 No constant speed
• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.
• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.
1202 CONST SPEED 1
Sets value for Constant Speed 1.
• The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.
• Range: 0…30000 rpm when 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ).
• Range: 0…500 Hz when 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).
1203 CONST SPEED 2…CONST SPEED 7
… Each sets a value for a Constant Speed. See CONST SPEED 1 above.
1208 Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed. See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL.
Parameters
Code Description
1209 TIMED MODE SEL
Defines timed function activated constant speed mode. Timed function can be used to change between the external
reference and constant speeds when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = 15…18 (TIMED FUNC 1…4) or 19 (TIMED
FUN1&2).
1 = EXT/CS1/2/3
• If parameter 1201 = 15…18 (TIMED FUNC 1…4), selects an external speed when this timed function (1…4) is not
active and selects Constant speed 1 when it is active.
TIMED FUNCTION 1…4 Function
0 External reference
1 Constant speed 1 (1202)
• If parameter 1201 = 19 (TIMED FUN1&2), selects an external speed when neither timed function is active, selects
Constant speed 1 when only Timed function 1 is active, selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 2 is
active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active.
TIMED FUNCTION 1 TIMED FUNCTION 2 Function
0 0 External reference
2 = CS1/2/3/4
• If parameter 1201 = 15…18 (TIMED FUNC 1…4), selects Constant speed 1 when this timed function (1…4) is not
active and selects Constant speed 2 when it is active.
TIMED FUNCTION 1…4 Function
• If parameter 1201 = 19 (TIMED FUN1&2), selects Constant speed 1 when neither timed function is active, selects
Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 1 is active, selects Constant speed 3 when only Timed function 2 is
active and selects Constant speed 4 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active.
TIMED FUNCTION 1 TIMED FUNCTION 2 Function
Parameters
Group 13: ANALOG INPUTS

This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs.
Code Description
1301 MINIMUM AI1
Defines the minimum value of the analog input.
• Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range. See example below.
• The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN.
• MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM AI.
• These parameters (reference and analog min. and max. settings) provide scale and offset adjustment for the
reference.
• See the figure at parameter 1104.
Example: To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA:
• Configure the analog input for 0…20 mA current signal.
• Calculate the minimum (4 mA) as a percent of full range (20 mA) = 4 mA / 20 mA · 100% = 20%
1302 MAXIMUM AI1
Defines the maximum value of the analog input.
• Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range.
• The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX.
• See the figure at parameter 1104.
1303 FILTER AI1 Unfiltered signal
%
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 (AI1).
• The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time
specified. 100
63
Filtered signal
t
Time constant
1304 MINIMUM AI2
Defines the minimum value of the analog input.
• See MINIMUM AI1 above.
1305 MAXIMUM AI2
Defines the maximum value of the analog input.
• See MAXIMUM AI1 above.
1306 FILTER AI2
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 (AI2).
• See FILTER AI1 above.
Parameters
Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS

This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs. Relay
outputs 4…6 are only available if OREL-01 Relay Output Extension Module is
installed.
Code Description
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1
Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 – what relay output 1 means.
0 = NOT SEL – Relay is not used and is de-energized.
1 = READY – Energize relay when drive is ready to function. Requires:
• Run enable signal present.
• No faults exist.
• Supply voltage is within range.
• Emergency Stop command is not on.
2 = RUN – Energize relay when the drive is running.
3 = FAULT(-1) – Energize relay when power is applied. De-energizes when a fault occurs.
4 = FAULT – Energize relay when a fault is active.
5 = ALARM – Energize relay when an alarm is active.
6 = REVERSED – Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction.
7 = STARTED – Energize relay when drive receives a start command (even if Run Enable signal is not present). De-
energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs.
8= SUPRV1 OVER – Energize relay when first supervised parameter (3201) exceeds the limit (3203).
• See Group 32: SUPERVISION starting on page 153.
9 = SUPRV1 UNDER – Energize relay when first supervised parameter (3201) drops below the limit (3202).
10 = SUPRV2 OVER – Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3204) exceeds the limit (3206).
11 = SUPRV2 UNDER – Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3204) drops below the limit (3205).
12 = SUPRV3 OVER – Energize relay when third supervised parameter (3207) exceeds the limit (3209).
13 = SUPRV3 UNDER – Energize relay when third supervised parameter (3207) drops below the limit (3208).
14 = AT SET POINT – Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency.
15 = FAULT(RST) – Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto-reset
delay.
• See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME.
16 = FLT/ALARM – Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs.
17 = EXT CTRL – Energize relay when external control is selected.
18 = REF 2 SEL – Energize relay when EXT2 is selected.
19 = CONST FREQ – Energize relay when a constant speed is selected.
20 = REF LOSS – Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost.
21 = OVERCURRENT – Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs.
22 = OVERVOLTAGE – Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs.
23 = DRIVE TEMP – Energize relay when a drive or control board overtemperature alarm or fault occurs.
24 = UNDERVOLTAGE – Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs.
25 = AI1 LOSS – Energize relay when AI1 signal is lost.
26 = AI2 LOSS – Energize relay when AI2 signal is lost.
27 = MOTOR TEMP – Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs.
28 = STALL – Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists.
30 = PID SLEEP – Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active.
31 = PFC – Use relay to start/stop motor in PFC control (See Group 81: PFC CONTROL).
• Use this option only when PFC control is used.
• Selection activated / deactivated when drive is not running.
32 = AUTOCHANGE – Energize relay when PFC autochange operation is performed.
• Use this option only when PFC control is used.
33 = FLUX READY – Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque (motor has
reached nominal magnetizing).
34 = USER MACRO 2 – Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active.
Parameters
Code Description
35 = COMM – Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication.
• Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1…relay 6 according to the following:
Par. 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1

0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0
3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1
• 0 = De-energize relay, 1 = Energize relay.

36 = COMM(-1) – Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication.
• Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1…relay 6 according to the following:
Par. 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1
0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0
2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1
3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0
4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0
• 0 = De-energize relay, 1 = Energize relay.
37 = TIMED FUNC 1 – Energize relay when Timed Function 1 is active. See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
38…40 = TIMED FUNC 2…4 – Energize relay when Timed Function 2…4 is active. See TIMED FUNC 1 above.
41 = MNT TRIG FAN – Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered. See Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG.
42 = MNT TRIG REV – Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered. See Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG.
43 = MNT TRIG RUN – Energize relay when run time counter is triggered. See Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG.
44 = MNT TRIG MWH – Energize relay when MWh counter is triggered. See Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG.
46 = START DELAY – Energize relay when a start delay is active.
47 = USER LOAD C – Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs.
52 = JOG ACTIVE – Energize relay when the jogging function is active.
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2
• See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3
1404 RO 1 ON DELAY
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 1. Control event
• On / off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC.
1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY
Relay status
Defines the switch-off delay for relay 1.
• On / off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC.
1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY
1406 RO 2 ON DELAY
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 2.
• See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY
• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1408 RO 3 ON DELAY
Parameters
Code Description
1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY
Switch-off delay for relay 3.
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4…6
… Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4…6 – what relay output 4…6 means. Available if OREL-01 Relay
1412 Output Extension Module is installed.
1413 RO 4 ON DELAY
1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY
1415 RO 5 ON DELAY
1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY
1417 RO 6 ON DELAY
1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY
Parameters
Group 15: ANALOG OUTPUTS

This group defines the drive’s analog (current signal) outputs. The drive’s analog
outputs can be:
• any parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA
• limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current
• scaled (and/or inverted) by defining the minimum and maximum values of the
source parameter (or content). Defining an maximum value (parameter 1503 or
1509) that is less than the content minimum value (parameter 1502 or 1508)
results in an inverted output.
• filtered.
Code Description
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL
Defines the content for analog output AO1.
99 = EXCITE PTC – Provides a current source for sensor type PTC. Output = 1.6 mA. See Group 35: MOTOR TEMP
MEAS.
100 = EXCITE PT100 – Provides a current source for sensor type PT100. Output = 9.1 mA. See Group 35: MOTOR
TEMP MEAS.
101…178 – Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01: OPERATING DATA.
• Parameter defined by value (value 102 = parameter 0102)
1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN AO (mA)
Sets the minimum content value. P 1505 /
• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501. P 1511
• Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be
converted to an analog output.
• These parameters (content and current min. and max. settings)
provide scale and offset adjustment for the output. See the
figure. P 1504 /
1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX P 1510 AO CONTENT
Sets the maximum content value P 1502 / 1508

• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501. P 1503 / 1509
• Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will AO (mA)
be converted to an analog output. P 1505 /
P 1511
1504 MINIMUM AO1
Sets the minimum output current.
1505 MAXIMUM AO1
Sets the maximum output current.
P 1504 /
1506 FILTER AO1
P 1510
Defines the filter time constant for AO1. AO CONTENT
• The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time
specified. P 1502 / 1508
P 1503 / 1509
• See the figure in parameter 1303.
1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL
Defines the content for analog output AO2. See AO1 CONTENT SEL above.
1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN
Sets the minimum content value. See AO1 CONTENT MIN above.
1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX
Sets the maximum content value. See AO1 CONTENT MAX above.
1510 MINIMUM AO2
Sets the minimum output current. See MINIMUM AO1 above.
Parameters
Code Description
1511 MAXIMUM AO2
Sets the maximum output current. See MAXIMUM AO1 above.
1512 FILTER AO2
Defines the filter time constant for AO2. See FILTER AO1 above.
Parameters
Group 16: SYSTEM CONTROLS

This group defines a variety of system level locks, resets and enables.
Code Description
1601 RUN ENABLE
Selects the source of the run enable signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal.
• This digital input must be activated for run enable.
• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable
signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the run enable signal.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal.
• Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the run disable signal.
• See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal.
• This digital input must be de-activated for run enable.
• If this digital input activates, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the run enable signal.
• See DI1(INV) above.
1602 PARAMETER LOCK
Determines if the control panel can change parameter values.
• This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros.
• This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs.
• This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered. See parameter 1603 PASS CODE.
0 = LOCKED – You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values.
• The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603.
1 = OPEN – You can use the control panel to change parameter values.
2 = NOT SAVED – You can use the control panel to change parameter values, but they are not stored in permanent
memory.
• Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 (SAVE) to store changed parameter values to memory.
1603 PASS CODE
Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock.
• See parameter 1602 above.
• The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once.
• This entry reverts back to 0 automatically.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no
longer exists.
0 = KEYPAD – Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source.
• Fault reset is always possible with control panel.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source.
• Activating the digital input resets the drive.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as a fault reset source.
• See DI1 above.
7 = START/STOP – Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source.
• Do not use this option when fieldbus communication provides the start, stop and direction commands.
8 = COMM – Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source.
• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
• The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) resets the drive.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source.
• De-activating the digital input resets the drive.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as a fault reset source.
Parameters
Code Description
1605 USER PAR SET CHG
Defines control for changing the user parameter set.
• See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO.
• The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets.
• During a change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings, or performing a motor
identification.
• Whenever the power is cycled, or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed, the drive loads the last settings
saved. Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost.
Note: The value of this parameter (1605) is not included in the User Parameter Sets, and it does not change if User
Parameter Sets change.
Note: You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2.
0 = NOT SEL – Defines the control panel (using parameter 9902) as the only control for changing User Parameter
Sets.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input.
• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input.
• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
1606 LOCAL LOCK
Defines control for the use of the LOC mode. The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel.
• When LOCAL LOCK is active, the control panel cannot change to LOC mode.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the lock. The control panel can select LOC and control the drive.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• Activating the digital input locks out local control.
• De-activating the digital input enable the LOC selection.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for setting the local lock.
• See DI1 above.
7 = ON – Sets the lock. The control panel cannot select LOC and cannot control the drive.
8 = COMM – Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• The Command Word is 0301.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• De-activating the digital input locks out local control.
• Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for setting the local lock.
1607 PARAM SAVE
Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory.
• Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory. To save, you must use
this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 2 (NOT SAVED), parameters altered from the control panel are not saved. To save, you
must use this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 1 (OPEN), parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to
permanent memory.
0 = DONE – Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved.
1 = SAVE… – Saves altered parameters to permanent memory.
Parameters
Code Description
1608 START ENABLE 1
Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal.
Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal.
• This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal.
• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the
panel display. The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 1 signal.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal.
• Bit 2 of the Command word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 1 signal.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal.
-2…-6 = DI2 (INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 1 signal.
• See DI1 (INV) above.
Drive started
START/STOP
COMMAND
(Group 10)
START ENABLE
SIGNAL
(Parameters
1608 & 1609)
Relay energized
Relay STARTED
de-energized RELAY STATUS
(Group 14)
Damper open
Damper Damper
closed closed DAMPER
STATUS
Damper Damper
opening closing
time time
RUN ENABLE SIGNAL

from the damper end
switch when the
damper is fully opened.
(Parameter 1601)
MOTOR STATUS
Acceleration Drive coasts
time to stop
(Par 2202)
Parameters
Code Description
1609 START ENABLE 2
Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal.
Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal.
• This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal.
• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on the
panel display. The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 2 signal.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal. Bit 3 of the Command
word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 2 signal.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 2 signal.
• See DI1 (INV) above.
1610 DISPLAY ALARMS
Controls the visibility of the following alarms:
• 2001, Overcurrent alarm
• 2002, Overvoltage alarm
• 2003, Undervoltage alarm
• 2009, Device overtemperature alarm.
For more information, see section Alarm listing on page 267.
0 = NO – The above alarms are suppressed.
1 = YES – All of the above alarms are enabled.
1611 PARAMETER VIEW
Selects the parameter view, i.e. which parameters are shown.
Note: This parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device. FlashDrop is designed for
fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives. It allows easy customization of the parameter list, e.g. selected
parameters can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-01 FlashDrop User’s Manual (3AFE68591074
[English]).
FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 to 31 (LOAD FD SET).
0 = DEFAULT – Complete long and short parameter lists are shown.
1 = FLASHDROP – FlashDrop parameter list is shown. Does not include short parameter list. Parameters that are
hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible.
1612 FAN CONTROL
Selects drive cooling fan control. Can be used to mitigate DC voltage fluctuations.
0 = AUTO – Fan is controlled automatically (default).
1 = ON – Fan is always forced on.
1613 FAULT RESET
Allows to reset faults with a parameter. Can be used to reset faults from remote monitoring systems that have access
to drive parameters.
0 = DEFAULT – Fault is not reset (default)
1 = RESET NOW – Resets fault.
Parameters
Group 20: LIMITS

This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor –
speed, frequency, current, torque, etc.
Code Description
2001 MINIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is < 0
Defines the minimum speed (rpm) allowed. P 2002
• A positive (or zero) minimum speed value defines two ranges,
one positive and one negative.
• A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range. Speed range allowed
0 Time
• See the figure.
P 2001
2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is > 0

Defines the maximum speed (rpm) allowed. P 2002
Speed range allowed
P 2001
0 Time
-(P 2001)
Speed range allowed
-(P 2002)
2003 MAX CURRENT

Defines the maximum output current (A) supplied by the drive to the motor.
2005 OVERVOLT CTRL
Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off.
• Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the
DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by
increasing output frequency.
0 = DISABLE – Disables controller.
1 = ENABLE – Enables controller
Note: If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive, this parameter value must be set to
0 (DISABLE) to ensure proper operation of the chopper.
2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL
Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off. When on:
• If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power, the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in
order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit.
• When the motor speed decreases, the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC
bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip.
• The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride-through on systems with a high inertia, such as a
centrifuge or a fan.
0 = DISABLE – Disables controller.
1 = ENABLE(TIME) – Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation.
2 = ENABLE – Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation.
Parameters
Code Description
2007 MINIMUM FREQ Freq 2007 value is < 0
Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. P 2008
• A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two
ranges, one positive and one negative.
• A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range. Frequency range allowed
0 Time
See the figure.
Note: Keep MINIMUM FREQ  MAXIMUM FREQ.
P 2007
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ
Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency.
Freq 2007 value is > 0
P 2008
Frequency range allowed
P 2007
0 Time
-(P 2007)
Frequency range allowed
-(P 2008)
2013 MIN TORQUE SEL

Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits (2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2).
0 = MIN TORQUE 1 – Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
• The Command Word is parameter 0301.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit
used.
2014 MAX TORQUE SEL
Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits (2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2).
0 = MAX TORQUE 1 – Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit
used.
2015 MIN TORQUE 1
Sets the first minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.
2016 MIN TORQUE 2
Sets the second minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.
Parameters
Code Description
2017 MAX TORQUE 1
Sets the first maximum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.
2018 MAX TORQUE 2
Sets the second maximum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.
Parameters
Group 21: START/STOP

This group defines how the motor starts and stops. The ACS550 supports several
start and stop modes.
Code Description
2101 START FUNCTION
Selects the motor start method. The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.
1 = AUTO – Selects the automatic start mode.
• Vector control modes: Optimal start in most cases. The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to
start a rotating motor.
• SCALAR:FREQ mode: Immediate start from zero frequency. Identical to selection 8 = RAMP.
2 = DC MAGN – Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode.
Note: The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor.
Note: The drive starts when the set pre-magnetizing time (parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME) has passed, even if motor
magnetization is not complete.
• Vector control modes: Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME
using DC current. The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time. This selection guarantees
the highest possible break-away torque.
• SCALAR:FREQ mode: Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using
DC current. The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time.
3 = SCALAR FLYST – Selects the flying start mode.
• Vector control modes: Not applicable.
• SCALAR:FREQ mode: The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor – useful
if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency.
• Cannot be used in multimotor systems.
4 = TORQ BOOST – Selects the automatic torque boost mode (SCALAR:FREQ mode only).
• May be necessary in drives with high starting torque.
• Torque boost is only applied at start, ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is
equal to reference.
• In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC
current.
• See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR.
5 = FLY + BOOST – Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode (SCALAR:FREQ mode only).
• Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized. If the speed is found to be zero, the torque
boost is done.
8 = RAMP – Immediate start from zero frequency.
2102 STOP FUNCTION
Selects the motor stop method.
1 = COAST – Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method. The motor coasts to stop.
2 = RAMP – Selects using a deceleration ramp.
• Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 (whichever is active).
2103 DC MAGN TIME
Defines the pre-magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode.
• Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode.
• After the start command, the drive pre-magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor.
• Set the pre-magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization. Too long a time heats the motor
excessively.
2104 DC HOLD CTL Motor
speed DC hold
Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the DC current operation.
1 = DC HOLD – Enables the DC Hold function. See the diagram. T
• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED)
• Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when
both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter Ref
2105.
• When the reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive
resumes normal operation. DC hold
speed T
2 = DC BRAKING – Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has
stopped.
• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 (COAST), braking is applied after start is removed.
• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 (RAMP), braking is applied after ramp.
Parameters
Code Description
2105 DC HOLD SPEED
Sets the speed for DC Hold. Requires that parameter 2104 DC HOLD CTL = 1 (DC HOLD).
2106 DC CURR REF
Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR.
2107 DC BRAKE TIME
Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped, if parameter 2104 is 2 (DC BRAKING).
2108 START INHIBIT
Sets the Start inhibit function on or off. If the drive is not actively started and running, the Start inhibit function ignores
a pending start command in any of the following situations and a new start command is required:
• A fault is reset.
• Run Enable (parameter 1601) activates while start command is active.
• Mode changes from local to remote.
• Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2.
• Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1.
0 = OFF – Disables the Start inhibit function.
1 = ON – Enables the Start inhibit function.
2109 EMERG STOP SEL
Defines control of the Emergency stop command. When activated:
• Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp (parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME).
• Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
• De-activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• De-activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
• Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command.
2110 TORQ BOOST CURR
Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost.
• See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.
Parameters
Code Description
2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY
Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function. If parameter value is set to zero, the Zero Speed Delay function
is disabled.
The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential. During the delay the drive
knows accurately the rotor position.
No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay
Speed Speed
Speed controller switched off: Speed controller remains live.
Motor coasts to stop. Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed.
Zero Speed Zero Speed

t t
Delay
Zero speed delay can be used e.g. with jogging function or mechanical brake.
No Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an
internal limit (called Zero Speed), the speed controller is switched off. The drive modulation is stopped and the motor
coasts to standstill.
With Zero Speed Delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an
internal limit (called Zero Speed), the zero speed delay function activates. During the delay the functions keeps the
speed controller live: The drive modulates, motor is magnetized and drive is ready for a quick restart.
Note: Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION must be 2 = RAMP for zero speed delay to operate.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Zero Speed Delay function.
2113 START DELAY
Defines the Start delay. After the conditions for start have been fulfilled, the drive waits until the delay has elapsed
and then starts the motor. Start delay can be used with all start modes.
• If START DELAY = zero, the delay is disabled.
• During the Start delay, alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown.
Parameters
Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL

This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration. You
define these ramps as a pair, one for acceleration and one for deceleration. You can
define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair.
Code Description
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL
Defines control for selection of acceleration/deceleration ramps.
• Ramps are defined in pairs, one each for acceleration and deceleration.
• See below for the ramp definition parameters.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables selection, the first ramp pair is used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2.
• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Defines bit 10 of the Command Word 1 as the control for ramp pair selection.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2
• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection.
2202 ACCELER TIME 1
MAX Linear
Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1. See A in FREQ
the figure.
• Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1.
• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.
2203 DECELER TIME 1 B (=0)
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1.
T
• Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1.
• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.
MAX S-curve
2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 FREQ
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1. See B in
the figure.
• Shape is defined as a ramp, unless additional time is specified here to reach the
maximum frequency. A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the
slope. The shape becomes an s-curve.
B
• Rule of thumb: 1/5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the T
acceleration ramp time. A
0.0 = LINEAR – Specifies linear acceleration/deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1.
A = 2202 ACCELER TIME 1
0.1…1000.0 = S-CURVE – Specifies s-curve acceleration/deceleration ramps for
ramp pair 1. B = 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1
2205 ACCELER TIME 2

Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2.
• See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1.
• Used also as jogging acceleration time. See 1004 JOGGING SEL.
2206 DECELER TIME 2
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2.
• See 2203 DECELER TIME 1.
• Used also as jogging deceleration time. See 1004 JOGGING SEL.
2207 RAMP SHAPE 2
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2.
• See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1.
Parameters
Code Description
2208 EMERG DEC TIME
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency.
• See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL.
• Ramp is linear.
2209 RAMP INPUT 0
Defines control for forcing the speed to 0 with the currently used deceleration ramp (see parameters 2203 DECELER
TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2).
0 = NOT SEL – Not selected.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.
• Activating the digital input forces the speed to zero, after which the speed will stay at 0.
• De-activating the digital input: speed control resumes normal operation.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.
• De-activating the digital input forces the speed to 0.
• Activating the digital input: speed control resumes normal operation.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for forcing the speed to 0.
Parameters
Group 23: SPEED CONTROL

This group defines variables used for speed control operation.
Code Description
2301 PROP GAIN
Gain = Kp = 1
Sets the relative gain for the speed controller. TI = Integration time = 0
• Larger values may cause speed oscillation. TD= Derivation time = 0
• The figure shows the speed controller output %
after an error step (error remains constant). Error value
Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE
RUN to automatically set the proportional gain. Controller output
Controller
output = e = Error value
Kp · e
t
2302 INTEGRATION TIME Controller output

%
Sets the integration time for the speed
controller. Gain = Kp = 1
• The integration time defines the rate at which TI = Integration time > 0
the controller output changes for a constant Kp · e TD= Derivation time = 0
error value.
• Shorter integration times correct continuous
errors faster.
• Control becomes unstable if the integration
time is too short. Kp · e e = Error value
• The figure shows the speed controller output
after an error step (error remains constant). t
Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE
RUN to automatically set the integration time. TI
2303 DERIVATION TIME
Sets the derivation time for the speed controller.
• Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes.
• The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change.
• If the derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant.
%
Controller output
e
Kp · TD ·
Ts Kp · e
Error value
Gain = Kp = 1 e = Error value

TI = Integration time > 0 Kp · e
TD= Derivation time > 0 t
Ts= Sample time period = 2 ms
e = Error value change between two samples TI
Parameters
Code Description
2304 ACC COMPENSATION
Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation.
• Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during
acceleration.
• 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action.
• Rule of thumb: Set this parameter between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor
and the driven machine.
• The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.
* No acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation
% %
Speed reference
Actual speed
t t
*Note: You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation.
2305 AUTOTUNE RUN
Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller.
0 = OFF – Disables the Autotune creation process. (Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings.)
1 = ON – Activates speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to OFF.
Procedure:
Note: The motor load must be connected.
• Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed.
• Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON.
The drive:
• Accelerates the motor.
• Calculates values for proportional gain, integration time and acceleration compensation.
• Changes parameters 2301, 2302 and 2304 to these values.
• Resets 2305 to OFF.
Parameters
Group 24: TORQUE CONTROL

This group defines variables used for torque control operation.
Code Description
2401 TORQ RAMP UP
Defines the torque reference ramp up time – The minimum time for the reference to increase from zero to the
nominal motor torque.
2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN
Defines the torque reference ramp down time – The minimum time for the reference to decrease from the nominal
motor torque to zero.
Parameters
Group 25: CRITICAL SPEEDS

This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be
avoided due, for example, to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds.
Code Description
2501 CRIT SPEED SEL foutput
Sets the critical speeds function on or off. The critical speed
function avoids specific speed ranges.
0 = OFF – Disables the critical speeds function. 52
1 = ON – Enables the critical speeds function. 46
Example: To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly:
• Determine problem speed ranges. Assume they are found to 23
be: 18…23 Hz and 46…52 Hz. 18
• Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL = 1.
• Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO = 18 Hz.
• Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI = 23 Hz. fREF (Hz)
• Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO = 46 Hz. f1L f1H f2L f2H
• Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI = 52 Hz. 18 23 46 52
2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO
Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1.
• The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI.
• Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ), then units are Hz.
2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI
Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1.
• The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO.
• Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ), then units are Hz.
Parameters
Group 26: MOTOR CONTROL

This group defines variables used for motor control.
Code Description
2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE
Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load. Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy
consumption and noise, and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load.
0 = OFF – Disables the feature.
1 = ON – Enables the feature.
2602 FLUX BRAKING Braking
Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of torque (%) Rated motor power
magnetization in the motor when needed, instead of 120% 1 2.2 kW
limiting the deceleration ramp. By increasing the flux in Without flux braking
2 15 kW
the motor, the energy of the mechanical system is 3 37 kW
changed to thermal energy in the motor. 80 4 75 kW
• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 1 5 250 kW
1 (VECTOR:sPEED) OR 2 (VECTOR:TORQ).
40 3
0 = OFF – Disables the feature. 4
2 5
1 = ON – Enables the feature.
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
f (Hz)
120% With flux braking
80
1
40 2
4 3
5
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
f (Hz)
2603 IR COMP VOLT IR compensation
Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz. • When enabled, IR compensation provides an extra
• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. Use IR
3 (SCALAR:FREQ). compensation, for example, in applications that require a
• Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent high breakaway torque.
overheating. Motor
• Typical IR compensation values are: voltage
380…480 V drives A
PN (kW) 3 7.5 15 37 132 A = IR compensated
IR comp (V) 18 15 12 8 3 B = No compensation
P 2603
2604 IR COMP FREQ
f (Hz)
Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V (in B
% of motor frequency).
P 2604
2605 U/F RATIO
Selects the form for the U/f (voltage to frequency) ratio below field weakening point.
1 = LINEAR – Preferred for constant torque applications.
2 = SQUARED – Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications. (SQUARED is more silent for most operating
frequencies.)
Parameters
Code Description
2606 SWITCHING FREQ
Sets the switching frequency for the drive. Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching
frequency derating on page 280.
• Higher switching frequencies mean less noise.
• In multimotor systems, do not change the switching frequency from the default value.
• 12 kHz switching frequency is available in scalar control mode, that is when parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3
(SCALAR:FREQ).
• See the availability of switching frequencies for different drive types in the table below.
1, 2, 4 and 8 kHz 12 kHz
208…240 V All types Frame sizes R1…R4 in scalar control mode
380…480 V All types Frame sizes R1…R4 (except ACS550-01-097A-4) in scalar control mode
500…600 V All types Frame sizes R2…R4 in scalar control mode
2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL fsw

The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACS550 R1…R4 drives, see par 2606
limit
internal temperature rises above a limit. See the figure.
12 kHz R5…R6 drives, see par 2606
This function allows the highest possible switching
frequency to be used based on operating conditions.
Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic 8 kHz Drive
noise. temperature
• In multimotor systems, do no disable (set OFF) the 4 kHz
function.
0 = OFF – The function is disabled. 80 °C 90 °C 100 °C T
1 = ON – The switching frequency is limited according to
the figure.
2608 SLIP COMP RATIO
Sets gain for slip compensation (in %).
• A squirrel-cage motor slips under load. Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for
the slip.
• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).
0 – No slip compensation.
1…200 – Increasing slip compensation. 100% means full slip compensation.
2609 NOISE SMOOTHING
This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency. Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic
motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity.
The random component has an average of 0 Hz. It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606
SWITCHING FREQ. This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 = 12 kHz.
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE.
2619 DC STABILIZER
Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer. The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible
voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network. In case of voltage variation the
drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation.
0 = DISABLE – Disables DC stabilizer.
1 = ENABLE – Enables DC stabilizer.
2625 OVERMODULATION
Enables or disables overmodulation. Disabling overmodulation can help in some applications in field weakening
area.
0 = DISABLE – Disables overmodulation.
1 = ENABLE – Enables overmodulation.
Parameters
Group 29: MAINTENANCE TRIG

This group contains usage levels and trigger points. When usage reaches the set
trigger point, a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due.
Code Description
2901 COOLING FAN TRIG
Sets the trigger point for the drive’s cooling fan counter.
• Value is compared to parameter 2902 value.
0.0 – Disables the trigger.
2902 COOLING FAN ACT
Defines the actual value of the drive’s cooling fan counter.
• When parameter 2901 has been set to a non-zero value, the counter starts.
• When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901, a maintenance notice is
displayed on the panel.
0.0 – Resets the parameter.
2903 REVOLUTION TRIG
Sets the trigger point for the motor’s accumulated revolutions counter.
0 – Disables the trigger.
2904 REVOLUTION ACT
Defines the actual value of the motor’s accumulated revolutions counter.
0 – Resets the parameter.
2905 RUN TIME TRIG
Sets the trigger point for the drive’s run time counter.
2906 RUN TIME ACT
Defines the actual value of the drive’s run time counter.
2907 USER MWh TRIG
Sets the trigger point for the drive’s accumulated power consumption (in megawatt hours) counter.
2908 USER MWh ACT
Defines the actual value of the drive’s accumulated power consumption (in megawatt hours) counter.
Parameters
Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS

This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and
defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected.
Code Description
3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION
Defines the drive response if the analog input (AI) signal drops below the fault limits and AI is used
• as the active reference source (Group 11: REFERENCE SELECT)
• as the Process or External PID controllers' feedback or setpoint source (Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1, Group
41: PROCESS PID SET 2 or Group 42: EXT / TRIM PID) and the corresponding PID controller is active.
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits.
0 = NOT SEL – No response.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (7, AI1 LOSS or 8, AI2 LOSS) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP 7 – Displays an alarm (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays an alarm (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS) and sets speed using the last operating level.
This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds.
WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the
analog input signal is lost.
3002 PANEL COMM ERR
Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (10, PANEL LOSS) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP 7 – Displays an alarm (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays an alarm (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets speed using the last operating level. This value is
the average speed over the last 10 seconds.
Note: When either of the two external control locations are active, and start, stop and/or direction are through the
control panel – 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS / 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS = 8 (KEYPAD) – the drive follows speed/frequency
reference according to the configuration of the external control locations, instead of the value of the last speed or
parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the
control panel communication is lost.
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1
Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.
0 = NOT SEL – External fault signal is not used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input.
• Activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, EXT FAULT 1) and the drive coasts to
stop.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the external fault input.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input.
• De-activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, EXT FAULT 1) and the drive coasts to
stop.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the external fault input.
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2
Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.
• See parameter 3003 above.
3005 MOT THERM PROT
Defines the drive response to motor overheating.
0 = NOT SEL – No response and/or motor thermal protection not set up.
1 = FAULT – When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 °C, displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR TEMP). When
the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 °C, displays a fault (9, MOT OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = ALARM – When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 °C, displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR TEMP).
Parameters
Code Description
3006 MOT THERM TIME Motor load
Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature
model.
• This is the time required for the motor to reach 63% of the final t
temperature with steady load.
• For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA Temp. rise
class motors, use the rule of thumb: MOTOR THERM TIME equals 100%
35 times t6, where t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor 63%
manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six
t
times its rated current.
• The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class
}
P 3006
20 trip curve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.
3007 MOT LOAD CURVE
Output current relative to
Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor. 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
• With the default value 100%, motor overload protection is functioning
when the constant current exceeds 127% of the parameter 9906 150
MOTOR NOM CURR value.
• The default overloadability is at the same level as what motor
manufacturers typically allow below 30 °C (86 °F) ambient P 3007 100 =
temperature and below 1000 m (3300 ft) altitude. When the ambient 127%
temperature exceeds 30 °C (86 °F) or the installation altitude is over P 3008 50
1000 m (3300 ft), decrease the parameter 3007 value according to
the motor manufacturer’s recommendation. Frequency
Example: If the constant protection level needs to be 115% of
the motor nominal current, set parameter 3007 value to 91% P 3009
(= 115/127·100%).
3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD
Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed.
• Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR.
3009 BREAK POINT FREQ
Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve.
Example: Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME, 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008
ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values.
IO/IN A
3.5
3.0 60 s
IO = Output current
2.5 90 s IN = Nominal motor current
2.0 fO = Output frequency
180 s fBRK = Break point frequency
1.5 300 s A = Trip time
600 s
1.0 
0.5
fO/fBRK
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
Parameters
Code Description
3010 STALL FUNCTION
This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function. This
protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region (see the
figure) for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME. The “User Limit” is
defined in Group 20: LIMITS by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1, 2018 MAX TORQUE
2, or the limit on the COMM input. Torque/
0 = NOT SEL – Stall protection is not used. Current
1 = FAULT – When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set
by 3012 STALL TIME: Stall region
• The drive coasts to stop. 95%
• A fault indication is displayed.
2 = ALARM – When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set User
limit
by 3012 STALL TIME:
• An alarm indication is displayed.
• The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for
half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME. f
3011 STALL FREQUENCY P 3011
This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function. Refer to Stall frequency
the figure.
3012 STALL TIME
This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function.
3017 EARTH FAULT
Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables. The drive monitors for
ground faults while the drive is running, and while the drive is not running. See also parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT
and 3028 EARTH FAULT LVL.
Note: Disabling earth fault (ground fault) may void the warranty.
0 = DISABLE – No drive response to ground faults.
1 = ENABLE – Ground faults display fault 16 (EARTH FAULT), and (if running) the drive coasts to stop.
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC
Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost.
0 = NOT SEL – No response.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (28, SERIAL 1 ERR) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP 7 – Displays an alarm (2005, I/O COMM) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7. This “alarm speed”
remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays an alarm (2005, I/O COMM) and sets speed using the last operating level. This value is the
average speed over the last 10 seconds. This “alarm speed” remains active until the fieldbus writes a new
reference value.
WARNING! If you select CONST SP 7, or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when
fieldbus communication is lost.
3019 COMM FAULT TIME
Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
• Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME
value.
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT
Sets a fault level for analog input 1.
• See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT
Sets a fault level for analog input 2.
• See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
Parameters
Code Description
3023 WIRING FAULT
Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running. When
the drive is not running it monitors for:
• Improper connections of input power to the drive output (the drive can display fault 35, OUTPUT WIRING if improper
connections are detected).
• Ground faults (the drive can display fault 16, EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected). Also, see parameter 3017
EARTH FAULT.
Note: Disabling wiring fault (ground fault) may void the warranty.
0 = DISABLE – No drive response to either of the above monitoring results.
1 = ENABLE – The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems.
3024 CB TEMP FAULT
Defines the drive response to control board overheating. Not for drives with an OMIO control board.
0 = DISABLE – No response.
1 = ENABLE – Displays fault 37 (CB OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to stop.
3028 EARTH FAULT LVL
Defines detection level for earth fault. See Correcting faults, fault 16, EARTH FAULT.
Note: Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT has to be enabled.
1 = LOW – Low level leakage current, high sensitivity. The drive trips to low ground (earth) leakage current (default in
the USA software version).
2 = MEDIUM – Medium sensitivity to ground (earth) fault current (default in the European software version).
3 = HIGH – High level leakage current, low sensitivity. The drive trips to higher ground (earth) leakage current.
Parameters
Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET

This group defines conditions for automatic resets. An automatic reset occurs after a
particular fault is detected. The drive holds for a set delay time, then automatically
restarts. You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and set up
automatic resets for a variety of faults.
Code Description
3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS Example: Three faults have occurred in
Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined the trial time. The last is reset only if the
by 3102 TRIAL TIME. value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS is 3 or
• If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit (within the trial more.
time), the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains
stopped. Trial time
• Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control Time
panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL. X X X
3102 TRIAL TIME
x = Automatic reset
Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets.
• See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS.
3103 DELAY TIME
Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart.
• If DELAY TIME = zero, the drive resets immediately.
3104 AR OVERCURRENT
Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off.
0 = DISABLE – Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE – Enables automatic reset.
• Automatically resets the fault (OVERCURRENT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE
Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (DC OVERVOLT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE
Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (DC UNDERVOLT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
3107 AR AI<MIN
Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (AI<MIN) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes normal
operation.
WARNING! When the analog input signal is restored, the drive may restart, even after a long stop. Make
sure that automatic, long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and/or damage equipment.
3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT
Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (EXT FAULT 1 or EXT FAULT 2) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive
resumes normal operation.
Parameters
Group 32: SUPERVISION

This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01: OPERATING
DATA. Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if
the parameter passes a defined limit. Use Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS to define the
relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high.
Code Description
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM
Selects the first supervised parameter.
• Must be a parameter number from Group 01: OPERATING
DATA.
• 100 = NOT SELECTED – No parameter selected. LO  HI
• 101…178 – Selects parameter 0101…0178. Note: Case LO HI represents a normal hysteresis.
• If the supervised parameter passes a limit, a relay output is Value of supervised parameter
energized.
• The supervision limits are defined in this group. HI (3203)
• The relay outputs are defined in Group 14: RELAY LO (3202)
OUTPUTS (definition also specifies which supervision limit
t
is monitored).
LO  HI
Case A
Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when LOHI.
• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY Energized (1)
t
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER. Use 0
for monitoring when/if the supervised signal exceeds a
given limit. The relay remains active until the supervised Case B
value drops below the low limit. Energized (1)
• Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY t
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER. 0
Use for monitoring when/if the supervised signal falls
below a given limit. The relay remains active until the LO > HI
supervised value rises above the high limit. Note: Case LO>HI represents a special hysteresis with
LO HI two separate supervision limits.
Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when LO>HI. Value of supervised parameter Active limit
The lowest limit (HI 3203) is active initially and remains active
until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit LO (3202)
(LO 3202), making that limit the active limit. That limit remains
active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest HI (3203)
limit (HI 3203), making that limit active. t
• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER. Case A
Initially the relay is de-energized. It is energized whenever Energized (1)
the supervised parameter goes above the active limit. t
• Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY 0
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER. Case B
Initially the relay is energized. It is de-energized whenever
Energized (1)
the supervised parameter goes below the active limit. t
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 0
Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter. See
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI
Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter. See
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM
Selects the second supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO
Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.
Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.
Parameters
Code Description
3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM
Selects the third supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO
Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter. See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above.
Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter. See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above.
Parameters
Group 33: INFORMATION

This group provides access to information about the drive’s current programs:
versions and test date.
Code Description
3301 FIRMWARE
Contains the version of the drive’s firmware.
3302 LOADING PACKAGE
Contains the version of the loading package.
3303 TEST DATE
Contains the test date (yy.ww).
3304 DRIVE RATING
Indicates the drive’s current and voltage rating. The format is XXXY, where:
• XXX = The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes. If present, an “A” indicates a decimal point in the rating
for the current. For example XXX = 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8.8 A.
• Y = The voltage rating of the drive, where Y = :
• 2 indicates a 208…240 V rating.
3305 PARAMETER TABLE
Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive.
Parameters
Group 34: PANEL DISPLAY

This group defines the content for control panel display (middle area), when the
control panel is in the Output mode.
Code Description
3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM P 3404 P 3405
Selects the first parameter (by number) displayed on the control
panel. LOC 49.1Hz
• Definitions in this group define display content when the control P 3401 (=137) 49.1 Hz
panel is in the control mode.
• Any parameter number in Group 01: OPERATING DATA can be
P 3408 (=138) 0.5 A
selected. P 3415 (=139) 10.7 %
• Using the following parameters, the display value can be scaled, DIR 00:00 MENU
converted to convenient units and/or displayed as a bar graph.
• The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group. LOC 5.0Hz
HZ 50%
• If just one or two parameters are selected for display, that is just
one or two of the values of parameters 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM, 3408
SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM are other than 100 (NOT
P 3404 0.4 A
SELECTED), the number and name of each displayed parameter are
24.4 %
shown in addition to the value. DIR 00:00 MENU
100 = NOT SELECTED – First parameter not displayed.
101…178 – Displays parameter 0101…0178. If parameter does not
exist, the display shows “n.a.”.
3402 SIGNAL1 MIN
Display
Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter. value
Use parameters 3402, 3403, 3406 and 3407, for example to convert
a Group 01: OPERATING DATA parameter, such as 0102 SPEED (in P 3407
rpm) to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor (in ft/min). For
such a conversion, the source values in the figure are the min. and
max. motor speed, and the display values are the corresponding min.
and max. conveyor speed. Use parameter 3405 to select the proper P 3406
units for the display.
Note: Selecting units does not convert values. Parameter is not
effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT). P3402 P 3403
Source value
3403 SIGNAL1 MAX
Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter.
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP
FORM = 9 (DIRECT).
3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
3404 value Display Range
Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter.
0 +3 -32768…+32767
0…7 – Defines the decimal point location.
1 + 3.1 (Signed)
• Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal
point. 2 + 3.14
• See the table for an example using pi (3.14159). 3 + 3.142
8 = BAR METER – Specifies a bar meter display. 4 3 0…65535
9 = DIRECT – Decimal point location and units of measure are 5 3.1 (Unsigned)
identical to the source signal. See Group 01: OPERATING DATA 6 3.14
parameter listing in section Complete parameter list on page 91
7 3.142
for resolution (which indicates the decimal point location) and the
units of measure. 8 Bar meter displayed.
9 Decimal point location and
units as for the source
signal.
Parameters
Code Description
3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
Selects the units used with the first display parameter.
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM = 9 (DIRECT).
0 = NO UNIT 9 = °C 18 = MWh 27 = ft 36 = l/s 45 = Pa 54 = lb/m 63 = Mrev

1=A 10 = lb ft 19 = m/s 28 = MGD 37 = l/min 46 = GPS 55 = lb/h 64 = d
2=V 11 = mA 20 = m 3/h 29 = inHg 38 = l/h 47 = gal/s 56 = FPS 65 = inWC
3 = Hz 12 = mV 21 = dm 3/s 30 = FPM 39 = m3/s 48 = gal/m 57 = ft/s 66 = m/min
4=% 13 = kW 22 = bar 31 = kb/s 40 = m3/m 49 = gal/h 58 = inH2O 67 = Nm
5=s 14 = W 23 = kPa 32 = kHz 41 = kg/s 50 = ft3/s 59 = in wg 68 = Km 3/h
6=h 15 = kWh 24 = GPM 33 = ohm 42 = kg/m 51 = ft3/m 60 = ft wg
7 = rpm 16 = °F 25 = PSI 34 = ppm 43 = kg/h 52 = ft3/h 61 = lbsi
8 = kh 17 = hp 26 = CFM 35 = pps 44 = mbar 53 = lb/s 62 = ms
The following units are useful for the bar display.

117 = %ref 119 = %dev 121 = % SP 123 = Iout 125 = Fout 127 = Vdc
118 = %act 120 = % LD 122 = %FBK 124 = Vout 126 = Tout
3406 OUTPUT1 MIN

Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter.
3407 OUTPUT1 MAX
Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter.
3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM
Selects the second parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401.
3409 SIGNAL2 MIN
Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3402.
3410 SIGNAL2 MAX
Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3403.
Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter. See parameter 3404.
3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT
Selects the units used with the second display parameter. See parameter 3405.
3413 OUTPUT2 MIN
Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3406.
3414 OUTPUT2 MAX
Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3407.
3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM
Selects the third parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401.
3416 SIGNAL3 MIN
Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter. See parameter 3402.
3417 SIGNAL3 MAX
Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter. See parameter 3403.
Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter. See parameter 3404.
3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT
Selects the units used with the third display parameter. See parameter 3405.
3420 OUTPUT3 MIN
Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter. See parameter 3406.
Parameters
Code Description
3421 OUTPUT3 MAX
Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter. See parameter 3407.
Parameters
Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS

This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault – motor
overheating, as detected by a temperature sensor. Typical connections are shown
below.
One sensor
Three sensors
AI1
AI1
Motor Motor AGND
AGND
T
T T T
AO1
AO1
AGND
AGND
3.3 nF
3.3 nF
WARNING! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts
and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-
conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.
To fulfil this requirement, connect a thermistor (and other similar components) to the
drive’s control terminals using any of these alternatives:
• Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced
insulation.
• Protect all circuits connected to the drive’s digital and analog inputs. Protect
against contact, and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation
(rated for the same voltage level as the drive’s main circuit).
• Use an external thermistor relay. The relay insulation must be rated for the same
voltage level as the drive’s main circuit.
The figure below shows thermistor relay and PTC sensor connections using a digital
input. At the motor end, the cable shield should be earthed through, eg a 3.3 nF
capacitor. If this is not possible, leave the shield unconnected.
Thermistor relay PTC sensor

3501 SENSOR TYPE = 5 (THERM(0)) or 6 (THERM(1)) 3501 SENSOR TYPE = 5 (THERM(0))
Thermistor
relay
Control board
Control board
DI6
+24 V DC DI6
+24 V DC
T 3.3 nF
T Motor
Motor
Parameters
For other faults, or for anticipating motor overheating using a model, see Group 30:
FAULT FUNCTIONS.
Code Description
3501 SENSOR TYPE
Identifies the type of the motor temperature sensor used, PT100 (°C), PTC (ohm) or thermistor.
See parameters 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL and 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL.
0 = NONE
1 = 1 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses one PT100 sensor.
• Analog output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor.
• The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor.
• The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 or AI2 and converts it to
degrees Celsius.
2 = 2 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors.
• Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.
3 = 3 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses three PT100 sensors.
• Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.
4 = PTC – Sensor configuration uses one PTC.
• The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor.
• The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor
temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature (Tref), as
does the voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement Excessive
function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 and converts it
into ohms.
• The table below and the graph show typical PTC sensor resistance
as a function of the motor operating temperature.
Temperature Resistance Normal
Normal < 1.5 kohm
Excessive > 4 kohm
5 = THERM(0) – Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.
• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect
either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital T
input.
• When the digital input is ‘0’, the motor is overheated.
• See the connection figure on page 159.
• The table below and the graph show the resistance requirements for a PTC sensor connected between 24 V and
a digital input as a function of the motor operating temperature.
Temperature Resistance
Normal < 3 kohm
Excessive > 28 kohm
6 = THERM(1) – Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.
• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital
input.
• When the digital input is ‘1’, the motor is overheated.
• See the connection figure on page 159.
3502 INPUT SELECTION
Defines the input used for the temperature sensor.
1 = AI1 – PT100 and PTC.
2 = AI2 – PT100 and PTC.
3…8 = DI1…DI6 – Thermistor and PTC
3503 ALARM LIMIT
Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement.
• At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR TEMP)
For thermistors or PTC connected to a digital input:
0 – de-activated
1 – activated
Parameters
Code Description
3504 FAULT LIMIT
Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement.
• At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays a fault (9, MOT OVERTEMP) and stops the drive.
For thermistors or PTC connected to a digital input:
0 – de-activated
1 – activated
Parameters
Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS

This group defines the timed functions. The timed functions include:
• four daily start and stop times
• four weekly start, stop and boost times
• four timers for collecting selected periods together.
A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in
multiple timers.
Time Period 1
3602 START TIME 1
3603 STOP TIME 1
3604 START DAY 1
3605 STOP DAY 1
Time Period 2
Timer 1
3606 START TIME 2
3607 STOP TIME 2 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC
3608 START DAY 2
3609 STOP DAY 2 Timer 2
3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC
Time Period 3
3610 START TIME 3 Timer 3
3611 STOP TIME 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC
3612 START DAY 3
3613 STOP DAY 3
Timer 4
Time Period 4
3614 START TIME 4
3615 STOP TIME 4
3616 START DAY 4
3617 STOP DAY 4
Booster
3622 BOOSTER SEL
3623 BOOSTER TIME
A parameter can be connected to only one timer.
Timer 1 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS

1002 EXT2 COMMANDS
3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
Timer 2 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1…1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3
3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4…1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6
(Available if OREL-01 is installed.)
4027 PID 1 PARAM SET
4228 ACTIVATE
8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG
You can use the Timed functions assistant for easy configuring. For more information
on the assistants, see section Assistants mode on page 57.
Parameters
Code Description
3601 TIMERS ENABLE
Selects the source for the timer enable signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Timed functions are disabled.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal.
• The digital input must be activated to enable the timed function.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the timed function enable signal.
7 = ACTIVE – Timed functions are enabled.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal.
• This digital input must be de-activated to enable the timed function.
• -2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the timed function enable signal.
3602 START TIME 1
Defines the daily start time. 20:30:00
• The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds. Time period 2
• If parameter value is 07:00:00, the timer is activated 17:00:00
at 7 a.m. Time period 4
15:00:00
• The figure shows multiple timers on different
weekdays. 13:00:00
Time period 3
12:00:00
10:30:00
Time period 1
09:00:00
00:00:00
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
3603 STOP TIME 1
Defines the daily stop time.
• The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds.
• If the parameter value is 09:00:00, the timer is deactivated at 9 a.m.
3604 START DAY 1
Defines the weekly start day.
1 = MONDAY…7 = SUNDAY
• If parameter value is 1, timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight (00:00:00).
3605 STOP DAY 1
Defines weekly stop day.
1 = MONDAY…7 = SUNDAY
• If parameter value is 5, timer 1 weekly is deactivated on Friday midnight (23:59:58).
3606 START TIME 2
Defines timer2 daily start time.
3607 STOP TIME 2
Defines timer 2 daily stop time.
3608 START DAY 2
Defines timer 2 weekly start day.
3609 STOP DAY 2
Defines timer 2 weekly stop day.
3610 START TIME 3
Defines timer 3 daily start time.
3611 STOP TIME 3
Parameters
Code Description
3612 START DAY 3
3613 STOP DAY 3
3614 START TIME 4
Defines timer 4 daily start time.
3615 STOP TIME 4
3616 START DAY 4
3617 STOP DAY 4
3622 BOOSTER SEL
Selects the source for the booster signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Booster signal is disabled.
1 = DI1 – Defines DI1 as the booster signal.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines DI2…DI6 as the booster signal.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the booster signal.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the booster signal.
3623 BOOSTER TIME
Defines the booster ON time. Time is started when booster sel
signal is released. If parameter value is 01:30:00, booster is Booster active
active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation DI is released.
Activation DI
Booster time
Defines the time periods used by the timer.
0 = NOT SEL – No time periods have been selected.
1 = T1 – Time Period 1 selected in the timer.
3 = T1+T2 – Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer.
7 = T1+T2+T3 – Time Periods 1, 2 and 3 selected in the timer.
15 = T1+T2+T3+T4 – Time Periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.
16 = BOOSTER – Booster selected in the timer.
17 = T1+B – Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer.
19 = T1+T2+B – Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer.
Parameters
Code Description
23 = T1+T2+T3+B – Booster and Time Periods 1, 2 and 3 selected in the timer.
31 = T1+2+3+4+B – Booster and Time Periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 selected in the timer.
Parameters
Group 37: USER LOAD CURVE

This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves (motor torque as a
function of frequency). The curve is defined by five points.
Code Description
3701 USER LOAD C MODE Motor torque (%)
Supervision mode for the user adjustable load
curves.
Overload area
This functionality replaces the former underload
supervision in Group 30: FAULT FUNCTIONS. To P3706 P3709
emulate it, see section Correspondence with the P3712
P3715 P3718
obsolete underload supervision on page 167. P3714 P3717
0 = NOT SEL – Supervision is not active.
1 = UNDERLOAD – Supervision for the torque Allowed operating area
dropping below the underload curve.
2 = OVERLOAD – Supervision for the torque P3711
exceeding the overload curve. P3705
3 = BOTH – Supervision for the torque dropping Underload area
below the underload curve or exceeding the
overload curve. P3708
P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P3716
Output frequency (Hz)
3702 USER LOAD C FUNC
Action wanted during load supervision.
1 = FAULT – A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than
the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
2 = ALARM – An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than
half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
3703 USER LOAD C TIME
Defines the time limit for generating a fault.
• Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm.
3704 LOAD FREQ 1
Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition point.
• Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2.
3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1
Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point.
• Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1.
3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1
Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point.
3707 LOAD FREQ 2
Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point.
3710 LOAD FREQ 3
Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point.
Parameters
Code Description
3713 LOAD FREQ 4
Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point.
• Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5
Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point.
3716 LOAD FREQ 5
Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point.
Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision

The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable
curves shown in the figure. The parameter characteristics were as described below.
• If the load drops below the TM
set curve for longer than (%)
Underload curve types
the time set by parameter 80 3
3014 UNDERLOAD TIME 70%
(obsolete), the underload
60 2
protection is activated.
50%
• Curves 1…3 reach
40 1
maximum at the motor 5
rated frequency set by 30%
parameter 9907 MOTOR 20
NOM FREQ. 4
• TM = nominal torque of the f

0
motor. ƒN 2.4 · ƒN
• ƒN = nominal frequency of
the motor.
If you want to emulate the behavior of an old underload curve with parameters as in
the shaded columns, set the new parameters as in the white columns in the two
tables below:
Obsolete parameters New parameters
Underload supervision with 3013 3014 3701 3702 3703
parameters 3013…3015 (obsolete) UNDERLOAD UNDERLOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD
FUNCTION TIME C MODE C FUNC C TIME
No underload functionality 0 - 0 - -
Underload curve, fault generated 1 t 1 1 t
Underload curve, alarm generated 2 t 1 2 2·t
Parameters
Obs.
New parameters
par.
3015 3704 3705 3707 3708 3710 3711 3713 3714 3716 3717
UNDER LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD
LOAD FREQ 1 TORQ FREQ 2 TORQ FREQ 3 TORQ FREQ 4 TORQ FREQ 5 TORQ
CURVE LOW 1 LOW 2 LOW 3 LOW 4 LOW 5
(Hz) (%) (Hz) (%) (Hz) (%) (Hz) (%) (Hz) (%)
EU US EU US EU US EU US EU US
1 5 6 10 32 38 17 41 50 23 50 60 30 500 500 30
2 5 6 20 31 37 30 42 50 40 50 60 50 500 500 50
3 5 6 30 31 37 43 42 50 57 50 60 70 500 500 70
4 5 6 10 73 88 17 98 117 23 120 144 30 500 500 30
5 5 6 20 71 86 30 99 119 40 120 144 50 500 500 50
Parameters

This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID (PID1) controller.
Typically only parameters in this group are needed.
PID controller – Basic set-up
In PID control mode, the drive compares a reference signal (setpoint) to an actual
signal (feedback) and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two
signals. The difference between the two signals is the error value.
Typically PID control mode is used, when the speed of a motor needs to be
controlled based on pressure, flow or temperature. In most cases – when there is
only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS550 – only parameter group 40 is needed.
The following is a schematic of setpoint/feedback signal flow using parameter group
40.
Panel REF1 P1101
Panel REF 2 REF1

P1106
0…17, REF2
500% PID Setpoint 20…21
Panel REF2
-500% 19
AI P4016 G40
Current PID1 PANEL
Torque LOC/REM
Power selection
AI P4017 P4014 P4015 LOC
Current
PID Act Value
Torque REM
Power
Panel REF 1 P1103 P1102

G12 P1104
DI
Const P1105 EXT 1
AI Speed
Comm REF 1 EXT 2
Panel REF 2 P1106
G12
DI
Const
AI Speed
Comm REF 2
P1106
Panel REF2 P4010 PID Setpoint 0…17, P1107
AI1 P4012 20…21
AI2 P1108
P4013 19
Comm
Internal G40
AI P4016 PID1
Current PID1 Out
Torque
Power P4014 P4015
AI P4017 PID Act Value
Current
Torque
Power
Note: In order to activate and use the PID controller, parameter 1106 must be set to
value 19.
Parameters
PID controller – Advanced

The ACS550 has two separate PID controllers:
• Process PID (PID1) and
• External PID (PID2)
Process PID (PID1) has 2 separate sets of parameters:
• Process PID (PID1) SET1, defined in Group 40: PROCESS PID SET 1 and
• Process PID (PID1) SET2, defined in Group 41: PROCESS PID SET 2
You can select between the two different sets by using parameter 4027.
Typically two different PID controller sets are used when the load of the motor
changes considerably from one situation to another.
You can use External PID (PID2), defined in Group 42: EXT / TRIM PID, in two
different ways:
• Instead of using additional PID controller hardware, you can set outputs of the
ACS550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve. In this case, set
parameter 4230 to value 0. (0 is the default value.)
• You can use External PID (PID2) to trim or fine-tune the speed of the ACS550.
Code Description
4001 GAIN
Defines the PID controller’s gain.
• The setting range is 0.1… 100.
• At 0.1, the PID controller output changes one-tenth as much as the error value.
• At 100, the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value.
Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system.
• A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation, but provides sluggish
response.
If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short, the system can become unstable.
Procedure:
• Initially, set:
• 4001 GAIN = 0.1.
• 4002 INTEGRATION TIME = 20 seconds.
• Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while maintaining stable operation. If not, increase GAIN
(4001) until the actual signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to
induce this oscillation.
• Reduce GAIN (4001) until the oscillation stops.
• Set GAIN (4001) to 0.4 to 0.6 times the above value.
• Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the feedback signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be
necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation.
• Increase INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the oscillation stops.
• Set INTEGRATION TIME (4002) to 1.15 to 1.5 times the above value.
• If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise, increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER AI1 or 1306
FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal.
Parameters
Code Description
4002 INTEGRATION TIME A
Defines the PID controller’s integration time.
B
Integration time is, by definition, the time required to increase the
output by the error value: D (P 4001 = 10)
• Error value is constant and 100%.
• Gain = 1. C (P 4001 = 1)
• Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100% change is
achieved in 1 second. t
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables integration (I-part of controller).
0.1…3600.0 – Integration time (seconds). P 4002
• See 4001 for adjustment procedure. A = Error
B = Error value step
C = Controller output with Gain = 1
D = Controller output with Gain = 10
4003 DERIVATION TIME Process error value
Error
Defines the PID controller’s derivation time.
• You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller 100%
output. The derivative is the error value’s rate of change. For
example, if the process error value changes linearly, the
derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output.
• The error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. The time
constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV
FILTER.
0.0…10.0 – Derivation time (seconds). 0%
t
PID output
D-part of controller output
Gain
P 4001
t
P 4003
4004 PID DERIV FILTER

Defines the filter time constant for the error-derivative part of the PID controller output.
• Before being added to the PID controller output, the error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter.
• Increasing the filter time smooths the error-derivative, reducing noise.
0.0…10.0 – Filter time constant (seconds).
4005 ERROR VALUE INV
Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed.
0 = NO – Normal, a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed. Error = Ref - Fbk
1 = YES – Inverted, a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed. Error = Fbk - Ref
4006 UNITS
Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values. (PID1 parameters 0128, 0130 and 0132).
• See parameter 3405 for list of available units.
4007 UNIT SCALE
4007 value Entry Display
Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values.
• Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right end of the 0 00003 3
entry. 1 00031 3.1
• See the table for an example using pi (3.14159). 2 00314 3.14
3 03142 3.142
4 31416 3.1416
Parameters
Code Description
4008 0% VALUE Units (P4006)
Defines (together with the next parameter) the scaling applied to Scale (P4007) +1000.0%
the PID controller’s actual values (PID1 parameters 0128, 0130
and 0132).
• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007. P 4009
4009 100% VALUE
Defines (together with the previous parameter) the scaling applied
to the PID controller’s actual values. P 4008
• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
0% 100%
-1000.0%
Internal scale (%)
4010 SET POINT SEL
Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller.
• Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by-passed (see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL).
0 = KEYPAD – Control panel provides reference.
1 = AI1 – Analog input 1 provides reference.
2 = AI2 – Analog input 2 provides reference.
8 = COMM – Fieldbus provides reference.
9 = COMM+AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog input
10 = COMM*AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog input
11 = DI3U,4D(RNC) – Digital inputs, acting as a motor potentiometer control, provide reference.
• DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”)
• DI4 decreases the reference (the D stands for “down”).
• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate of change.
• R = Stop command resets the reference to zero.
• NC = Reference value is not copied.
12 = DI3U,4D(NC) – Same as DI3U,4D(RNC) above, except:
• Stop command does not reset reference to zero. At restart the motor ramps up, at the selected acceleration rate,
to the stored reference.
13 = DI5U,6D(NC) – Same as DI3U,4D(NC) above, except:
• Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6.
14 = AI1+AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
15 = AI1*AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
16 = AI1-AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
17 = AI1/AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
19 = INTERNAL – A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference.
20 = PID2OUT – Defines PID controller 2 output (parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT) as the reference source.
Parameters
Code Description
Analog input reference correction
Parameter values 9, 10 and 14…17 use the formula in the following table.
Value setting Calculation of the AI reference
C+B C value + (B value - 50% of reference value)
C*B C value · (B value / 50% of reference value)
C-B (C value + 50% of reference value) - B value
C/B (C value · 50% of reference value) / B value
Where:
• C = Main reference value 120
( = COMM for values 9, 10 and 17 (/)
= AI1 for values 14…17) 100
• B = Correcting reference
( = AI1 for values 9, 10 and 80
= AI2 for values 14…17).
Example: 60 9, 14 (+)
The figure shows the reference source curves for
value settings 9, 10 and 14…17, where:
• C = 25%. 40 10, 15 (*)
• P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0.
• P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0. 20
• B varies along the horizontal axis. 16 (-)
0
0 100% B
4011 INTERNAL SETPNT
Sets a constant value used for the process reference.
• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
4012 SETPOINT MIN
Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source.
4013 SETPOINT MAX
Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source.
4014 FBK SEL
Defines the PID controller feedback (actual signal).
• You can define a combination of two actual values (ACT1 and ACT2) as the feedback signal.
• Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 (ACT1).
• Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 (ACT2).
1 = ACT1 – Actual value 1 (ACT1) provides the feedback signal.
2 = ACT1-ACT2 – ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
3 = ACT1+ACT2 – ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
4 = ACT1*ACT2 – ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
5 = ACT1/ACT2 – ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
6 = MIN(ACT1,2) – The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
7 = MAX(ACT1,2) – The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
8 = sqrt(ACT1-2) – Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
9 = sqA1+sqA2 – Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
10 = sqrt(ACT1) – Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal.
11 = COMM FBK 1 – Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal.
12 = COMM FBK 2 – Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal.
13 = AVE(ACT1,2) – The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
4015 FBK MULTIPLIER
Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014.
• Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference.
0.000 = NOT SEL – The parameter has no effect (1.000 used as the multiplier).
-32.768…32.767 – Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL.
Example: FBK = Multiplier  A1 – A2
Parameters
Code Description
4016 ACT1 INPUT
Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT1). See also parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
1 = AI1 – Uses analog input 1 for ACT1.
3 = CURRENT – Uses current for ACT1.
4 = TORQUE – Uses torque for ACT1.
5 = POWER – Uses power for ACT1.
6 = COMM ACT 1 – Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1.
4017 ACT2 INPUT
Defines the source for actual value 2 (ACT2). See also parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM.
3 = CURRENT – Uses current for ACT2.
4 = TORQUE – Uses torque for ACT2.
5 = POWER – Uses power for ACT2.
4018 ACT1 MINIMUM
ACT1 (%) A
Sets the minimum value for ACT1.
• Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 (defined P 4019
by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT). For parameter 4016 values
6 (COMM ACT 1) and 7 (COMM ACT 2) scaling is not done.
Par 4016 Source Source min. Source max. P 4018
1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM AI1 1302 MAXIMUM AI1
2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUM AI2 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Source min. Source max.
3 Current 0 2 · nominal current Source signal
4 Torque -2 · nominal torque 2 · nominal torque
5 Power -2 · nominal power 2 · nominal power ACT1 (%) B
• See the figure: A= Normal; B = Inversion (ACT1 MINIMUM > ACT1 P 4018
MAXIMUM)
4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM
Sets the maximum value for ACT1.
• See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
P 4019
4020 ACT2 MINIMUM
Sets the minimum value for ACT2.
Source min. Source max.
Source signal
4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM
Sets the maximum value for ACT2.
4022 SLEEP SELECTION
Defines the control for the PID sleep function.
0 = NOT SEL– Disables the PID sleep control function.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• Activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
• De-activating the digital input restores PID control.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• See DI1 above.
7 = INTERNAL – Defines the output rpm/frequency, process reference and process actual value as the control for the
PID sleep function. Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE-UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• De-activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
• Activating the digital input restores PID control.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function.
Parameters
Code Description
4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL A
t < P 4024
Sets the motor speed / frequency that enables the PID sleep
function – a motor speed / frequency below this level, for at least t > P 4024
the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep
function (stopping the drive). P 4023
• Requires 4022 = 7 (INTERNAL). t
• See the figure: A = PID output level; B = PID process feedback.
4024 PID SLEEP DELAY B
Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function – a motor speed / P 4026
frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period Setpoint
enables the PID sleep function (stopping the drive). P 4025
• See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above.
t
4025 WAKE-UP DEV Stop
Defines the wake-up deviation – a deviation from the setpoint Start
greater than this value, for at least the time period 4026 WAKE-UP
DELAY, re-starts the PID controller.
C
• Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale.
• Parameter 4005 = 0,
Wake-up level = Setpoint - Wake-up deviation. Setpoint
P 4025 }
4005 = 1
• Parameter 4005 = 1,
Wake-up level = Setpoint + Wake-up deviation.
P 4025 }4005
D
=0
• Wake-up level can be above or below setpoint. t

See the figures:
• C = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 1
• D = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 0 E
• E = Feedback is above wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026
WAKE-UP DELAY – PID function wakes up.
• F = Feedback is below wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026 C
WAKE-UP DELAY – PID function wakes up.
P 4025 P 4026
Setpoint
4026 WAKE-UP DELAY
P 4025
Defines the wake-up delay – a deviation from the setpoint greater D
than 4025 WAKE-UP DEV, for at least this time period, re-starts the t
PID controller.
P 4026
F
Parameters
Code Description
4027 PID 1 PARAM SET
Process PID (PID1) has two separate sets of parameters, PID set 1 and PID set 2.
• PID set 1 uses parameters 4001…4026.
• PID set 2 uses parameters 4101…4126.
PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected.
0 = SET 1 – PID Set 1 (parameters 4001…4026) is active.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection.
• Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.
• De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 1.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for PID Set selection.
• See DI1 above.
7 = SET 2 – PID Set 2 (parameters 4101…4126) is active.
8…11 = TIMED FUNC 1…4 – Defines the Timed function as the control for the PID Set selection (Timed function de-
activated = PID Set 1; Timed function activated = PID Set 2)
• See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
12 = 2-ZONE MIN – The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and
feedback 2. The drive will control the zone (and select the set) that has a larger difference.
• A positive difference (a setpoint higher than the feedback) is always larger than a negative difference. This keeps
feedback values at or above the setpoint.
• Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone's feedback is closer to its
setpoint.
13 = 2-ZONE MAX – The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and
feedback 2. The drive will control the zone (and select the set) that has a smaller difference.
• A negative difference (a setpoint lower than the feedback) is always smaller than a positive difference. This keeps
feedback values at or below the setpoint.
• Controller does not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone's feedback is closer to its
setpoint.
14 = 2-ZONE AVE – The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and
feedback 2. In addition, it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1. Therefore one
feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection.
• Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1.
• De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for PID Set selection.
Parameters

Parameters of this group belong to PID parameter set 2. The operation of
parameters 4101…4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001…4026.
PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET.
Code Description
4101 See 4001 …4026
…
4126
Parameters
Group 42: EXT / TRIM PID

This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller (PID2), which
is used for the External / Trimming PID.
The operation of parameters 4201…4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1
(PID1) parameters 4001…4021.
Code Description
4201 See 4001 …4021
…
4221
4228 ACTIVATE
Defines the source for enabling the external PID function.
• Requires 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 (NOT SEL).
0 = NOT SEL – Disables external PID control.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating the digital input enables external PID control.
• De-activating the digital input disables external PID control.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control.
• See DI1 above.
7 = DRIVE RUN – Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating the start command (drive is running) enables external PID control.
8 = ON – Defines the power-on as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating power to the drive enables external PID control.
9…12 = TIMED FUNC 1…4 – Defines the Timed function as the control for enabling external PID control (Timed
function active enables external PID control).
• See Group 36: TIMED FUNCTIONS.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating the digital input disables external PID control.
• De-activating the digital input enables external PID control.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control.
4229 OFFSET
Defines the offset for the PID output.
• When PID is activated, output starts from this value.
• When PID is deactivated, output resets to this value.
• Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 (trim mode is not active).
4230 TRIM MODE
Selects the type of trim, if any. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the trim function.
1 = PROPORTIONAL – Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rpm/Hz reference.
2 = DIRECT – Adds a trim factor based on the control loop’s maximum limit.
4231 TRIM SCALE
Defines the multiplier (as a percent, plus or minus) used in the trim mode.
Parameters
Code Description
4232 CORRECTION SRC
Defines the trimming reference for the correction source.
1 = PID2REF – Uses appropriate REF MAX (S WITCH A OR B):
• 1105 REF1 MAX when REF1 is active (A).
• 1108 REF2 MAX when REF2 is active (B).
2 = PID2OUTPUT – Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency (Switch C):
• 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 1 (VECTOR:sPEED) or 2 (VECTOR:TORQ).
• 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).
Add
Ramped ref
Trimmed ref
Switch Select
(par. 4230) Trim scale Mul. Mul. +
Ext ref 1 max (A) off X

X
Ext ref 2 max (B) proportional
Abs max speed/ direct Select
freq (C) (par. 4232)
Trimming PID2 ref
PID2 ref PID 2 Trimming PID2 out
Parameters
Group 45: ENERGY SAVING

This group defines the setup of calculation and optimization of energy savings.
Note: The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH,
0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 are derived from
subtracting the drive's energy consumed from the direct-on-line (DOL) consumption
calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER. As such, the accuracy of
the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that
parameter.
Code Description
4502 ENERGY PRICE
Price of energy per kWh.
• Used for reference when energy savings are calculated.
• See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178
SAVED CO2 (reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn).
4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR
Conversion factor for converting energy into CO2 emissions (kg/kWh or tn/MWh). Used for multiplying the saved
energy in MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0178 SAVED CO2 (reduction on carbon dioxide emissions in tn).
4508 PUMP POWER
Pump power (as a percentage of the nominal motor power) when connected directly to supply (DOL).
• Used for reference when energy savings are calculated.
• See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178
SAVED CO2.
• It is possible to use this parameter as the reference power also for other applications than pumps. The reference
power can also be some other constant power than a motor connected directly online.
4509 ENERGY RESET
Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and
0178 SAVED CO2.
Parameters
Group 50: ENCODER

This group defines the setup for encoder use:
• Sets the number of encoder pulses per shaft revolution.
• Enables the encoder operation.
• Defines how mechanical angle and revolution data is reset.
See also User’s Manual for Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC-01
(3AUA0000001938 [English]).
Code Description
5001 PULSE NR
Sets the number of pulses provided by an optional encoder for each full motor shaft revolution (ppr).
5002 ENCODER ENABLE
Enables/disables an optional encoder.
0 = DISABLE – Drive uses speed feedback derived from the internal motor model (applies for any setting of parameter
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE).
1 = ENABLE – Drive uses feedback from an optional encoder. This function requires the Pulse Encoder Interface
Module (OTAC-01) and an encoder. Operation depends on the setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE:
• 9904 = 1 (VECTOR:SPEED): The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque
accuracy.
• 9904 = 2 (VECTOR:TORQ): The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque
accuracy.
• 9904 = 3 (SCALAR:SPEED): The encoder provides speed feedback. (This is not closed loop speed regulation.
However, using parameter 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO and an encoder improves steady state speed accuracy.)
5003 ENCODER FAULT
Defines the drive operation if a failure is detected in communication between the encoder and the encoder interface
module, or between the module and the drive.
1 = FAULT – The drive generates fault ENCODER ERR, and the motor coasts to a stop.
2 = ALARM – The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERR and operates as if parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE =
0 (DISABLE), that is, speed feedback is derived from the internal motor model.
5010 Z PLS ENABLE
Enables/disables the use of an encoder’s Z-pulse to define the motor shaft’s zero position. When enabled, a Z-pulse
input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero to define the shaft’s zero position. This function requires an encoder
that provides Z-pulse signals.
0 = DISABLE – Z-pulse input is not present or ignored if present.
1 = ENABLE – A Z-pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero.
5011 POSITION RESET
Resets the encoder’s position feedback. This parameter is self-clearing.
0 = DISABLE – Inactive.
1 = ENABLE – Resets the encoder position feedback. Parameters reset depends on the state of parameter 5010 Z PLS
ENABLE:
• 5010 = 0 (DISABLE) – Reset applies to parameters 0147 MECH REVS and 0146 MECH ANGLE.
• 5010 = 1 (ENABLE) – Reset applies only to parameter 0147 MECH REVS.
Parameters
Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE

This group defines set-up variables for a fieldbus adapter (FBA) communication
module. For more information on these parameters, refer to the user’s manual
supplied with the FBA module.
Code Description
5101 FBA TYPE
Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.
0 = NOT DEFINED – Module not found, or not properly connected, or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 (EXT FBA).
1 = PROFIBUS-DP
21 = LONWORKS
32 = CANopen
37 = DEVICENET
101 = CONTROLNET
128 = ETHERNET
132 = PROFINET
135 = EtherCAT
136 = EPL – Ethernet POWERLINK
5102 FB PAR 2…FB PAR 26
… Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters.
5126
5127 FBA PAR REFRESH
Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings.
0 = DONE – Refreshing done.
1 = REFRESH – Refreshing.
• After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE.
5128 FILE CPI FW REV
Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter configuration file. Format is xyz where:
• x = major revision number
• y = minor revision number
• z = correction number
Example: 107 = revision 1.07
5129 FILE CONFIG ID
Displays the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module’s configuration file identification.
• File configuration information is drive application program-dependent.
5130 FILE CONFIG REV
Contains the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module configuration file.
Example: 1 = revision 1
5131 FBA STATUS
Contains the status of the adapter module.
0 = IDLE – Adapter not configured.
1 = EXECUT INIT – Adapter is initializing.
2 = TIME OUT – A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive.
3 = CONFIG ERROR – Adapter configuration error.
• The revision code of the adapter’s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in
the drive’s configuration file (parameter 5132 < 5128).
4 = OFF-LINE – Adapter is off-line.
5 = ON-LINE – Adapter is on-line.
6 = RESET – Adapter is performing a hardware reset.
5132 FBA CPI FW REV
Contains the revision of the module’s CPI program. Format is xyz where:
• x = major revision number
• y = minor revision number
• z = correction number
Example: 107 = revision 1.07
5133 FBA APPL FW REV
Contains the revision of the module’s application program. Format is xyz (see parameter 5132).
Parameters

This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.
Normally, when using the supplied control panel, there is no need to change settings
in this group.
In this group, parameter modifications take effect on the next power-up.
Code Description
5201 STATION ID
Defines the address of the drive.
• Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line.
• Range: 1…247
5202 BAUD RATE
Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second (kb/s).
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
38.4 kb/s
57.6 kb/s
115.2 kb/s
5203 PARITY
Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication.
0 = 8 NONE 1 – 8 data bits, no parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8 NONE 2 – 8 data bits, no parity, two stop bits.
2 = 8 EVEN 1 – 8 data bits, even parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8 ODD 1 – 8 data bits, odd parity, one stop bit.
5204 OK MESSAGES
Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive.
• During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.
5205 PARITY ERRORS
Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus. For high counts, check:
• Parity settings of devices connected on the bus – they must not differ.
• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels – high noise levels generate errors.
5206 FRAME ERRORS
Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives. For high counts, check:
• Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus – they must not differ.
5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS
Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer.
• Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes.
• Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer. The excess characters are counted.
5208 CRC ERRORS
Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives. For high counts, check:
• CRC calculations for possible errors.
Parameters
Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL

This group defines set-up variables used for an embedded fieldbus (EFB)
communication protocol. The standard EFB protocol in the ACS550 is Modbus. See
chapter Embedded fieldbus page 203.
Code Description
5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID
Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol.
• Format: XXYY, where xx = protocol ID, and YY = program revision.
5302 EFB STATION ID
Defines the node address of the RS485 link.
• The node address on each unit must be unique.
5303 EFB BAUD RATE
Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second (kb/s).
1.2 kb/s
2.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s
9.6 kb/s
19.2 kb/s
38.4 kb/s
57.6 kb/s
76.8 kb/s
5304 EFB PARITY
Defines the data length, parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication.
• The same settings must be used in all on-line stations.
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE
Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol.
0 = ABB DRV LIM – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used in ACS400.
1 = DCU PROFILE – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to 32-bit DCU Profile.
2 = ABB DRV FULL – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used in ACS600/800.
5306 EFB OK MESSAGES
Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive.
• During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.
5307 EFB CRC ERRORS
Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive. For high counts, check:
• CRC calculations for possible errors.
5308 EFB UART ERRORS
Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive.
5309 EFB STATUS
Contains the status of the EFB protocol.
0 = IDLE – EFB protocol is configured, but not receiving any messages.
1 = EXECUT INIT – EFB protocol is initializing.
2 = TIME OUT – A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol.
3 = CONFIG ERROR – EFB protocol has a configuration error.
4 = OFF-LINE – EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive.
5 = ON-LINE – EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive.
6 = RESET – EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset.
7 = LISTEN ONLY – EFB protocol is in listen-only mode.
5310 EFB PAR 10
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005.
Parameters
Code Description
5311 EFB PAR 11
5312 EFB PAR 12
5313 EFB PAR 13
5314 EFB PAR 14
5315 EFB PAR 15
5316 EFB PAR 16
5317 EFB PAR 17
5318 EFB PAR 18
For Modbus: Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master
request.
5319 EFB PAR 19
ABB Drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) Control Word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word.
5320 EFB PAR 20
ABB Drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) Status Word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word.
Parameters
Group 64: LOAD ANALYZER

This group defines the load analyzer, which can be used for analyzing the
customer’s process and sizing the drive and the motor.
The peak value is logged at 2 ms level, and the distribution loggers are updated on
0.2 s (200 ms) time level. Three different values can be logged.
1. Amplitude logger 1: The measured current is logged continuously. The
distribution as a percentage of the nominal current I2N is shown in ten classes.
2. Peak value logger: One signal in group 1 can be logged for the peak (maximum)
value. The peak value of the signal, peak time (time when the peak value was
detected) as well the frequency, current and DC voltage at the peak time are shown.
3. Amplitude logger 2: One signal in group 1 can be logged for amplitude
distribution. The base value (100% value) can be set by the user.
The first logger cannot be reset. The other two loggers can be reset by a user-
defined method. They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter
time is changed.
Code Description
6401 PVL SIGNAL
Defines (by number) the signal logged for the peak value.
• Any parameter number in Group 01: OPERATING DATA can be selected. Eg 102 = parameter 0102 SPEED.
100 = NOT SELECTED – No signal (parameter) logged for the peak value.
101…178 – Logs parameter 0101…0178.
6402 PVL FILTER TIME
Defines the filter time for peak value logging.
• 0.0…120.0 – Filter time (seconds).
6403 LOGGERS RESET
Defines the source for the reset of peak value logger and amplitude logger 2.
0 = NOT SEL – No reset selected.
1 = DI1 – Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input DI1.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Reset loggers on the rising edge of digital input DI2…DI6.
7 = RESET – Reset loggers. Parameter is set to NOT SEL.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input DI1.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV) …DI6(INV) – Reset loggers on the falling edge of digital input DI2…DI6.
6404 AL2 SIGNAL
Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2.
• Any parameter number in Group 01: OPERATING DATA can be selected. Eg 102 = parameter 0102 SPEED.
100 = NOT SELECTED – No signal (parameter) logged for amplitude distribution (amplitude logger 2).
101…178 – Logs parameter 0101…0178.
6405 AL2 SIGNAL BASE
Defines the base value from which the percentage distribution is calculated.
• Representation and default value depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2 SIGNAL.
6406 PEAK VALUE
Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter 6401 PVL SIGNAL.
6407 PEAK TIME 1
Date of the peak value detection.
• Format: Date if the real time clock is operating (dd.mm.yy). / The number of days elapsed after the power-on if the
real time clock is not used, or was not set (xx d).
6408 PEAK TIME 2
Time of the peak value detection.
• Format: hours:minutes:seconds.
Parameters
Code Description
6409 CURRENT AT PEAK
Current at the moment of the peak value (amperes).
6410 UDC AT PEAK
DC voltage at the moment of the peak value (volts).
6411 FREQ AT PEAK
Output frequency at the moment of the peak value (herzes).
6412 TIME OF RESET 1
Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2.
• Format: Date if the real time clock is operating (dd.mm.yy). / The number of days elapsed after the power-on if the
real time clock is not used, or was not set (xx d).
6413 TIME OF RESET 2
Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2.
• Format: hours:minutes:seconds.
6414 AL1RANGE0TO10
Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I2N) 0…10% distribution.
6415 AL1RANGE10TO20
6416 AL1RANGE20TO30
6417 AL1RANGE30TO40
6418 AL1RANGE40TO50
6419 AL1RANGE50TO60
6420 AL1RANGE60TO70
6421 AL1RANGE70TO80
6422 AL1RANGE80TO90
6423 AL1RANGE90TO
Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current I2N) over 90% distribution.
6424 AL2RANGE0TO10
Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) 0…10% distribution.
6425 AL2RANGE10TO20
6426 AL2RANGE20TO30
6427 AL2RANGE30TO40
6428 AL2RANGE40TO50
6429 AL2RANGE50TO60
6430 AL2RANGE60TO70
6431 AL2RANGE70TO80
Parameters
Code Description
6432 AL2RANGE80TO90
6433 AL2RANGE90TO
Amplitude logger 2 (signal selection with parameter 6404) over 90% distribution.
Parameters
Group 81: PFC CONTROL

This group defines a Pump-Fan Control (PFC) mode of operation. The major
features of PFC control are:
• The ACS550 controls the motor of pump no. 1, varying the motor speed to control
the pump capacity. This motor is the speed regulated motor.
• Direct line connections power the motor of pump no. 2 and pump no.3, etc. The
ACS550 switches pump no. 2 (and then pump no. 3, etc.) on and off as needed.
These motors are auxiliary motors.
• The ACS550 PID control uses two signals: a process reference and an actual
value feedback. The PID controller adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first
pump such that the actual value follows the process reference.
• When demand (defined by the process reference) exceeds the first motor’s
capacity (user defined as a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically starts
an auxiliary pump. The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account
for the auxiliary pump’s addition to total output. Then, as before, the PID controller
adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first pump such that the actual value follows
the process reference. If demand continues to increase, PFC adds additional
auxiliary pumps, using the same process.
• When demand drops, such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit
(user defined by a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically stops an
auxiliary pump. The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for
the auxiliary pump’s missing output.
• An Interlock function (when enabled) identifies off-line (out of service) motors, and
the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence.
• An Autochange function (when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear)
equalizes duty time between the pump motors. Autochange periodically
increments the position of each motor in the rotation – the speed regulated motor
becomes the last auxiliary motor, the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed
regulated motor, etc.
Code Description
8103 REFERENCE STEP 1
Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.
• Applies only when at least one auxiliary (constant speed) motor is running.
• Default value is 0%.
Example: An ACS550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe.
• 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe.
• The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels.
• As water consumption increases, first one constant speed pump operates, then, the second.
• As flow increases, the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input
end. As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow, the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely
match the output pressure.
• When the first auxiliary pump operates, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
• When two auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2.
• When three auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 + parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3.
Parameters
Code Description
• Applies only when at least two auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.
• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
• Applies only when at least three auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.
• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
8109 START FREQ 1
Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor starts if:
• No auxiliary motors are running. f (Hz)
• ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit:
8109 + 1 Hz. P 8115
• Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit fMAX
(8109 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.
(P 8109)+1
After the first auxiliary motor starts:
P 8109
• Output frequency decreases by the value = A
(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).
P 8112
• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor drops to B A
compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor. fMIN
t
See the figure, where:
• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
• B = Output frequency increase during the start delay. C
• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as frequency 1
increases (1 = On). t
0
Note: 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between:
• 8112 LOW FREQ 1
• (2008 MAXIMUM FREQ) -1.
8110 START FREQ 2
Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor.
• See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor starts if:
• One auxiliary motor is running.
• ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit: 8110 + 1.
• Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8110 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.
8111 START FREQ 3
Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor.
The third auxiliary motor starts if:
• Two auxiliary motors are running.
• ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit: 8111 + 1 Hz.
• Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8111 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.
Parameters
Code Description
8112 LOW FREQ 1
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor stops if:
• Only one (the first) auxiliary motor is running. f (Hz)
• ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit:
8112 - 1.
• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit
P 8109
(8112 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D. fMAX
After the first auxiliary motor stops:
• Output frequency increases by the value = A
P 8112 A
(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).
• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor increases to (P 8112)-1
compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor. fMIN
B t
See the figure, where:
• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1) P 8116
• B = Output frequency decrease during the stop delay.
• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as frequency C
decreases (1 = On).
• Grey path = Shows hysteresis – if time is reversed, the path 1 t
backwards is not the same. For details on the path for starting, 0
see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1.
Note: 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between:
• (2007 MINIMUM FREQ) +1.
• 8109 START FREQ 1
8113 LOW FREQ 2
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor.
• See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor stops if:
• Two auxiliary motors are running.
• ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit: 8113 - 1.
• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8113 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
8114 LOW FREQ 3
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor.
The third auxiliary motor stops if:
• Three auxiliary motors are running.
• ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit: 8114 - 1.
• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8114 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
8115 AUX MOT START D
Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors.
• The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit (parameter 8109, 8110, or 8111) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor starts.
8116 AUX MOT STOP D
Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors.
• The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit (parameter 8112, 8113, or 8114) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor stops.
Parameters
Code Description
8117 NR OF AUX MOT
Sets the number of auxiliary motors.
• Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals.
• The Autochange function, if used, requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor.
• The following describes the set-up of the required relay outputs.
Relay outputs
As noted above, each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals. The
following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays.
• The ACS550 provides relay outputs RO1…RO3.
• An external digital output module (OREL-01) can be added to provide relay outputs RO4…RO6.
• Parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 define, respectively, how relays RO1…RO6 are used – the parameter
value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC.
• The ACS550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order. If the Autochange function is disabled, the first
auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, and so on. If the
Autochange function is used, the assignments rotate. Initially, the speed regulated motor is the one connected to
the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay
with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, and so on.
Relay logic
ACS550
ACS550
Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode

• The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step, low frequency and start frequency values as the third
auxiliary motor.
Parameters
Code Description
• The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output
parameters (1401…1403 and 1410…1412), where the settings are either =31 (PFC), or =X (anything but 31), and
where the Autochange function is disabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0).
Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment

1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange disabled
4 4 4 4 4 4 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 0 1 2 7
31 X X X X X 1 Aux. X X X X X
31 31 X X X X 2 Aux. Aux. X X X X
31 31 31 X X X 3 Aux. Aux. Aux. X X X
X 31 31 X X X 2 X Aux. Aux. X X X
X X X 31 X 31 2 X X X Aux. X Aux.
31 31 X X X X 1* Aux. Aux. X X X X
* = One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use. One motor is in “sleep”
when the other is rotating.
• The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output
parameters (1401…1403 and 1410…1412), where the settings are either =31 (PFC), or =X (anything but 31), and
where the Autochange function is enabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = value > 0.0).
Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment

1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange enabled
4 4 4 4 4 4 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 0 1 2 7
31 31 X X X X 1 PFC PFC X X X X
31 31 31 X X X 2 PFC PFC PFC X X X
X 31 31 X X X 1 X PFC PFC X X X
X X X 31 X 31 1 X X X PFC X PFC
31 31 X X X X 0** PFC PFC X X X X
** = No auxiliary motors, but the autochange function is in use. Working as a
standard PID-control.
8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV

Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the Relay logic
interval between changes.
ACS550
• The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when
the speed regulated motor is running.
• See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the
Autochange function.
• The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is
performed.
• Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS =
value > 0.
-0.1 = TEST MODE – Forces the interval to value 36…48 s.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Autochange function.
0.1…336 – The operating time interval (the time when the start
signal is on) between automatic motor changes.
WARNING! When enabled, the Autochange function
requires the interlocks (8120 INTERLOCKS = value > 0)
enabled. During autochange the power output is
interrupted and the drive coasts to stop, preventing
damage to the contacts. PFC with Autochange mode
Parameters
Code Description
8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL
Sets an upper limit, as a percent of output capacity, for the autochange logic. When the output from the PID/PFC
control block exceeds this limit, autochange is prevented. For example, use this parameter to deny autochange when
the Pump-Fan system is operating near maximum capacity.
Autochange overview
The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system. At each
autochange operation:
• A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS550 output – the speed regulated motor.
• The starting order of the other motors rotates.
The Autochange function requires:
• External switchgear for changing the drive’s output power connections.
• Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS = value > 0.
Autochange is performed when:
• The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV.
• The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter, 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
Note: The ACS550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed.
In an autochange, the Autochange function does all of the PID output
following (see the figure): A
4PFC
• Initiates a change when the running time, since the last 100%
autochange, reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV, and PFC 2PFC
input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
• Stops the speed regulated motor. P 8119
3PFC
• Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor. 3PFC
• Increments the starting order counter, to change the 4PFC
starting order for the motors. 2PFC
• Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated
1PFC t
motor.
• Switches off the above motor’s contactor, if the motor was P 8122
running. Any other running motors are not interrupted.
• Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated P 8118 P 8118
motor. The autochange switchgear connects this motor to B
the ACS550 power output. A = Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL –
• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY. autochange not allowed.
• Starts the speed regulated motor. B = Autochange occurs.
• Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation. 1PFC, etc. = PID output associated with each motor.
• Switches the above motor on, but only if the new speed
regulated motor had been running (as a constant speed
motor) – This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange.
• Continues with normal PFC operation.
Starting order counter Output
The operation of the starting-order counter: frequency 2 aux
No aux 1 aux
• The relay output parameter definitions (1401…1403 and motors motor motors
1410…1412) establish the initial motor sequence. (The lowest fMAX
parameter number with a value 31 (PFC) identifies the relay
connected to 1PFC, the first motor, and so on.)
• Initially, 1PFC = speed regulated motor, 2PFC = 1st auxiliary
motor, etc.
• The first autochange shifts the sequence to: 2PFC = speed
regulated motor, 3PFC = 1st auxiliary motor, …, 1PFC = last
auxiliary motor. Area
• The next autochange shifts the sequence again, and so on. Autochange
• If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is allowed PID output
inactive motors are interlocked, the drive displays an alarm
P 8119 100%
(2015, PFC I LOCK).
• When ACS550 power supply is switched off, the counter
preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory. When power is restored, the
Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory.
• If the PFC relay configuration is changed (or if the PFC enable value is changed), the rotation is reset. (See the first
bullet above.)
Parameters
Code Description
8120 INTERLOCKS
Defines operation of the Interlock function. When the Interlock function is enabled:
• An interlock is active when its command signal is absent.
• An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present.
• The ACS550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor’s interlock is active – the
control panel displays an alarm (2015, PFC I LOCK).
Wire each Interlock circuit as follows:
• Wire a contact of the motor’s On/Off switch to the Interlock circuit – the drive’s PFC logic can then recognize that
the motor is switched off and start the next available motor.
• Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay (or other protective device in the motor circuit) to the Interlock input – the
drive’s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Interlock function. All digital inputs are available for other purposes.
• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0 (The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is
disabled.)
1 = DI1 – Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input (starting with DI1) to the interlock signal for each
PFC relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:
• the number of PFC relays [number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 with value = 31 (PFC)]
• the Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0, and otherwise enabled).
No. PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled

relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1: Speed Reg Motor Not allowed
DI2…DI6: Free
1 DI1: Speed Reg Motor DI1: First PFC Relay
DI2: First PFC Relay DI2…DI6: Free
DI3…DI6: Free
DI2: First PFC Relay DI2: Second PFC Relay
DI3: Second PFC Relay DI3…DI6: Free
DI4…DI6: Free
DI3: Second PFC Relay DI3: Third PFC Relay
DI4: Third PFC Relay DI4…DI6: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
DI4: Third PFC Relay DI4: Fourth PFC Relay
DI5: Fourth PFC Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI5: Fourth PFC Relay DI5: Fifth PFC Relay
DI6: Fifth PFC Relay DI6: Free
6 Not allowed DI1: First PFC Relay
DI2: Second PFC Relay
DI3: Third PFC Relay
DI4: Fourth PFC Relay
DI5: Fifth PFC Relay
DI6: Sixth PFC Relay
Parameters
Code Description

relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1: Free Not allowed
DI2: Speed Reg Motor
DI3… DI6: Free
1 DI1: Free DI1: Free
DI2: Speed Reg Motor DI2: First PFC Relay
DI3: First PFC Relay DI3… DI6: Free
DI4… DI6: Free
DI4: Second PFC Relay DI4… DI6: Free
DI5… DI6: Free
DI5: Third PFC Relay DI5… DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI6: Fourth PFC Relay DI6: Free
5 Not allowed DI1: Free
DI2: First PFC Relay
DI6: Fifth PFC Relay
6 Not allowed Not allowed
Parameters
Code Description
3 = DI3 – Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input (starting with DI3) to the interlock signal for each

relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1…DI2: Free Not allowed
DI4…DI6: Free
1 DI1…DI2: Free DI1…DI2: Free
DI4: First PFC Relay DI4…DI6: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
DI5: Second PFC Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI6: Third PFC Relay DI6: Free
4 Not allowed DI1…DI2: Free
5…6 Not allowed Not allowed

relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1… DI3: Free Not allowed
DI5… DI6: Free
1 DI1… DI3: Free DI1… DI3: Free
DI5: First PFC Relay DI5… DI6: Free
DI6: Free
2 DI1… DI3: Free DI1… DI3: Free
DI6: Second PFC Relay DI6: Free
3 Not allowed DI1… DI3: Free
Parameters
Code Description

relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1…DI4: Free Not allowed
DI6: Free
1 DI1…DI4: Free DI1… DI4: Free
DI6: First PFC Relay DI6: Free
2 Not allowed DI1… DI4: Free
6 = DI6 – Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated
motor.
• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0.

relays
0 DI1… DI5: Free Not allowed
1 Not allowed DI1…DI5: Free
Parameters
Code Description
8121 REG BYPASS CTRL
Selects Regulator by-pass control. When enabled, Regulator by-pass control provides a simple control mechanism
without a PID regulator.
• Use Regulator by-pass control only in special fOUT
applications.
0 = NO – Disables Regulator by-pass control. The drive fMAX
uses the normal PFC reference: 1106 REF2 SELECT.
1 = YES – Enables Regulator by-pass control.
• The process PID regulator is bypassed.
Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference P 8110
(input). Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFC
reference. P 8109
• The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014
FBK SEL (or 4114) for the PFC frequency reference.
• The figure shows the relation between the control P 8113
signal 4014 FBK SEL (OR 4114) and the speed
regulated motor’s frequency in a three-motor P 8112
system. fMIN
Example: In the diagram below, the pumping station’s P 4014
outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow (A). A B C (%)
A = No auxiliary motors running
B = One auxiliary motor running
Mains 3~ 3 Contactors C = Two auxiliary motors running
3
3 ACS550 P1
P2 3
M
P3 3 3~
3 P1 Outlet pipe1
A Sewage
tank M
3~
P2 Outlet pipe2
Inlet pipe
M
3~
P3 Outlet pipe3
8122 PFC START DELAY

Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system. Using the delay, the drive works as follows:
• Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor – connecting the motor to the ACS550 power output.
• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY.
• Starts the speed regulated motor.
• Starts auxiliary motors. See parameter 8115 for delay.
WARNING! Motors equipped with star-delta starters require a PFC Start Delay.
• After the ACS550 relay output switches a motor on, the star-delta starter must switch to the star-connection and
then back to the delta-connection before the drive applies power.
• So, the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star-delta starter.
8123 PFC ENABLE
Selects PFC control. When enabled, PFC control:
• Switches in, or out, auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases. Parameters 8109
START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency.
• Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down, as auxiliary motors are added, and adjusts the speed regulated
motor output up, as auxiliary motors are taken off line.
• Provides Interlock functions, if enabled.
• Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:FREQ).
0 = NOT SEL – Disables PFC control.
1 = ACTIVE – Enables PFC control.
Parameters
Code Description
8124 ACC IN AUX STOP
Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero-to-maximum fOUT
frequency ramp. This PFC acceleration ramp:
• Applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary A
motor is switched off. B
• Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22:
ACCEL/DECEL.
• Applies only until the output of the regulated motor
increases by an amount equal to the output of the P 8125 P 8124 t
switched off auxiliary motor. Then the acceleration ramp
defined in Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL applies.
0 = NOT SEL. Aux.
0.1…1800 – Activates this function using the value motor
entered as the acceleration time. 1
t
8125 DEC IN AUX START 0
Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum-to-zero • A = speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22:
frequency ramp. This PFC deceleration ramp: ACCEL/DECEL parameters (2202 or 2205).
• Applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary • B = speed regulated motor decelerating using Group
motor is switched on. 22: ACCEL/DECEL parameters (2203 or 2206).
• Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22: • At aux. motor start, speed regulated motor decelerates
ACCEL/DECEL. using 8125 DEC IN AUX START.
• Applies only until the output of the regulated motor • At aux. motor stop, speed regulated motor accelerates
decreases by an amount equal to the output of the using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP.
auxiliary motor. Then the deceleration ramp defined in
Group 22: ACCEL/DECEL applies.
0 = NOT SEL.
0.1…1800 – Activates this function using the value
entered as the deceleration time.
8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG
Sets the autochange using a Timed function. See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
0 = NOT SEL.
1 = TIMED FUNC 1 – Enables autochange when Timed function 1 is active.
2…4 = TIMED FUNC 2…4 – Enables autochange when Timed function 2…4 is active.
8127 MOTORS
Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors (maximum 7 motors, 1 speed regulated, 3 connected direct-on-line
and 3 spare motors).
• This value includes also the speed regulated motor.
• This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used.
• If Autochange function is not used, the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to
PFC but it needs to be included in this value.
8128 AUX START ORDER
Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors.
1 = EVEN RUNTIME – Time sharing is active. Evens out the cumulative run time of the auxiliary motors. The start order
depends on the run time: The auxiliary motor whose cumulative run time is shortest is started first, then the motor
whose cumulative run time is the second shortest etc. When the demand drops, the first motor to be stopped is the
one whose cumulative run time is longest.
2 = RELAY ORDER – The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays.
Parameters
Group 98: OPTIONS

This group configures for options, in particular, enabling serial communication with
the drive.
Code Description
9802 COMM PROT SEL
Selects the communication protocol.
0 = NOT SEL – No communication protocol selected.
1 = STD MODBUS – The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel (X1-communications, terminal).
• See also Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL.
4 = EXT FBA – The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive.
• See also Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE.
Parameters
Parameters
Embedded fieldbus
Overview
The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard
serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACS550 can
either:
• receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or
• be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available
control locations, such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel.
Fieldbus controller
Fieldbus
Other devices
Connect using either:

• standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at
terminals X1:28…32
• fieldbus adapter (FBA) module mounted
in slot 2 (option Rxxx).
Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

• embedded fieldbus (EFB) – Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1:28…32 on
the control board, a control system can communicate with the drive using the
Modbus® protocol. (For protocol and profile descriptions, see sections Modbus
protocol technical data and ABB control profiles technical data later in this
chapter.)
• fieldbus adapter (FBA) – See chapter Fieldbus adapter on page 237.
Control interface
In general, the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of:
• Output words
– Control Word
– Reference1
– Reference2
• Input words
– Status Word
– Actual value 1
– Actual value 2
Embedded fieldbus
– Actual value 3
– Actual value 4
– Actual value 5
– Actual value 6
– Actual value 7
– Actual value 8
The content of these words is defined by profiles. For details on the profiles used,
sees section ABB control profiles technical data on page 224.
Note: The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.
Planning
Network planning should address the following questions:
• What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?
• What control information must be sent down to the drives?
• What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling
system?
Mechanical and electrical installation – EFB
WARNING! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from
the power source.
Drive terminals 28…32 are for RS485 communications.

• Use Belden 9842 or equivalent. Belden 9842 is a dual twisted, shielded pair cable
with a wave impedance of 120 ohm.
• Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link. Use this pair to
connect all A (-) terminals together and all B (+) terminals together.
• Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground (terminal 31), leaving
one wire unused.
• Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point. Ground all devices on the
network using their corresponding earthing terminals.
• As always, the grounding wires should not form any closed loops, and all the
devices should be earthed to a common ground.
• Connect the RS485 link in a daisy-chained bus, without dropout lines.
Embedded fieldbus
• To reduce noise on the network, terminate the RS485 network using 120 
resistors at both ends of the network. Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect
the termination resistors. See the following diagram.
Terminated Terminated
station Station Station station
Drive RS485:
ACH 550 RS485:
Terminal block X1
Terminal Block -X1
SCR Screen
SCR Screen
Negative
Screen
Screen
Positive
A - Negative
B ++ Positive
See
Note
See Note1
2
AGND
AGND
SCR
SCR
B
28 29 30 31 32
PREFERRED WIRING:
3 Conductor with Shield
See Note 2: Shield

Notes: See Note 3: Shield
NOTES:
1. Set switch
1. Use 3 J2 to OFF. ON position
to AGND: would make the
network
Conductor
active
Cable - Tie 3rd Wire X1-31.
See Note 3: -
switch J2(pull
to OFF. upBUS & pull down [BIAS]
network: resistors
See Note 4: Ground G R +
2. Set termination is an active
are on board theDown
Pull Up & Pull drive).
(BIAS) resistors are on board the ACH550 Drive! Ground
See Note 5: Reference/Common
3. Tie shield wires together at Drive -
2. Tie shield wires
Do Not together
terminate at SCR! at the drive – Do NOT See Note 4: Reference/
terminate at SCR.
4. Terminate shield ONLY at "Ground" terminal Common
in the Building Automation Controller! Building Automation
3. Terminate theAGN
5. Terminate shield ONLY at
wire at "Reference" the “Ground” terminal
terminal
Controller
in the Building Automation Controller!
in the controller. Controller
4. Terminate the AGND wire at the “Reference”
terminal in the controller.
• For configuration information see the following sections:

– Communication set-up – EFB on page 205
– Activate drive control functions – EFB on page 207
– The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data. For example, Modbus
protocol technical data on page 215.
Communication set-up – EFB
Serial communication selection

To activate the serial communication, set parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL =
1 (STD MODBUS).
Note: If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel, your drive does not have
that protocol software in the application memory.
Embedded fieldbus
Serial communication configuration

Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that
define the communication process. These parameters and descriptions are defined
below. In particular, note that the station Id may require adjustment.
Protocol reference
Code Description
Modbus
5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit. Any non-zero value entered
Contains the identification and program revision of for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL,
the protocol. sets this parameter automatically. The
format is: XXYY, where XX = protocol ID,
and YY = program revision.
5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network with a
Defines the node address of the RS485 link. unique value for this parameter.
When this protocol is selected, the
default value for this parameter is: 1
Note: For a new address to take affect, the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be
set to 0 before selecting a new address. Leaving 5302 = 0 places the RS485 channel in reset,
disabling communication.
5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected, the
Defines the communication speed of the RS485 default value for this parameter is: 9.6
link in kbits per second (kbits/s).
1.2 kb/s 19.2 kb/s
2.4 kb/s 38.4 kb/s
4.8 kb/s 57.6 kb/s
9.6 kb/s 76.8 kb/s
5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected, the
Defines the data length, parity and stop bits to be default value for this parameter is: 1
used with the RS485 communication.
• The same settings must be used in all on-line
stations.
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this protocol is selected, the
Selects the communication profile used by the default value for this parameter is: 0
EFB protocol.
0 = ABB DRV LIM – Operation of Control/Status
Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used
in ACS400.
1 = DCU PROFILE – Operation of Control/Status
Words conforms to 32-bit DCU Profile.
2 = ABB DRV FULL – Operation of Control/Status
Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used
in ACS600/800.
Note: After any changes to the communication settings, the protocol must be
reactivated by either cycling the drive power, or by clearing and then restoring the
station Id (5302).
Embedded fieldbus
Activate drive control functions – EFB
Controlling the drive

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
• tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function
• define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control
• define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. For the protocol-specific details, see the document supplied
with the FBA module.
Start/Stop Direction control

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:
• drive parameter values set as defined below
• fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location
is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Modbus1 protocol reference
Drive parameter Value Description
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 (COMM) Start/Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0…3 40031 bits 0, 1
with Ext1 selected.
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 (COMM) Start/Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0…3 40031 bits 0, 1
with Ext2 selected.
1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Direction by fieldbus. 4002/40032 40031 bit 3
1
For Modbus, the protocol reference can depend on the profile used, hence two columns in these
tables. One column refers to the ABB Drives profile, selected when parameter 5305 = 0 (ABB DRV
LIM) or 5305 = 2 (ABB DRV FULL). The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when
parameter 5305 = 1 (DCU PROFILE). See section ABB control profiles technical data on page 224.
2 The reference provides direction control – a negative reference provides reverse rotation.
Embedded fieldbus
Input reference select

Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires:
• fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Modbus protocol
Drive parameter Value Description reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 8 (COMM) Reference set selection by fieldbus. 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5
1103 REF1 SELECT 8 (COMM) Input reference 1 by fieldbus. 40002
1106 REF2 SELECT 8 (COMM) Input reference 2 by fieldbus. 40003
Reference Scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the following, as appropriate:
• Modbus Register 40002 in section Modbus protocol technical data on page 215
• Reference scaling in section ABB control profiles technical data on page 224.
Miscellaneous drive control

Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:
Modbus protocol
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1601 RUN ENABLE 7 (COMM) Run enable by fieldbus. 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6
(inverted)
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 (COMM) Fault reset by fieldbus. 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4
1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 (COMM) Source for local lock selection is Does not 40031 bit 14
the fieldbus. apply
1607 PARAM SAVE 1 (SAVE) Saves altered parameters to 41607
memory (then value returns to 0).
1608 START ENABLE 1 7 (COMM) Source for start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2
fieldbus Command word. apply.
1609 START ENABLE 2 7 (COMM) Source for start enable 2 is the 40032 bit 3
fieldbus Command word.
2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 7 (COMM) Source for minimum torque 40031 bit 15
selection is the fieldbus.
2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 7 (COMM) Source for maximum torque
selection is the fieldbus.
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 7 (COMM) Source for ramp pair selection is 40031 bit 10
the fieldbus.
Embedded fieldbus
Relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate
location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol
dependent.)
Modbus protocol reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 (COMM) Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit 0 or 00033
by fieldbus.
by fieldbus.
by fieldbus.
by fieldbus.
by fieldbus.
by fieldbus.
1
More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.
Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.
Modbus protocol
Drive parameter Description reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
0122 RO 1-3 STATUS Relay 1…3 status. 40122

0123 RO 4-6 STATUS Relay 4…6 status. 40123
Analog output control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:
• fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The
Modbus protocol
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 (COMM VALUE 1) Analog Output 1 –

controlled by writing to
0135 COMM VALUE 1 – parameter 0135. 40135
1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 (COMM VALUE 2) Analog Output 2 –

controlled by writing to
0136 COMM VALUE 2 – parameter 0136. 40136
Embedded fieldbus
PID control setpoint source

Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID
loops:
Modbus protocol
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
4010 SET POINT SEL 8 (COMM VALUE 1) Setpoint is input reference 2 40003
(Set 1) 9 (COMM+AI1) (+/-/* AI1)
4110 SET POINT SEL 10 (COMM*AI1)
(Set 2)
4210 SET POINT SEL
(Ext/Trim)
Communication fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the drive’s action if serial communication is lost.
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 (NOT SEL) Set for appropriate drive response.
1 (FAULT)
2 (CONST SP7)
3 (LAST SPEED)
3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss.
Embedded fieldbus
Feedback from the drive – EFB
Pre-defined feedback
Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see input word/point/object
listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 215.
Drive parameter
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
0102 SPEED 40102

0103 OUTPUT FREQ 40103
0104 CURRENT 40104
0105 TORQUE 40105
0106 POWER 40106
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 40107
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109
0301 FB CMD WORD1 – bit 0 (STOP) 40301 bit 0
0301 FB CMD WORD1 1 – bit 2 (REV) 40301 bit 2
0118 DI 1-3 STATUS – bit 0 (DI3) 40118
Note: With Modbus, any parameter can be accessed using the format: “4” followed
by the parameter number.
Actual value scaling

The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent. In general, for Actual
Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter’s resolution. (See section
Complete parameter list on page 91 for parameter resolutions.) For example:
Feedback Parameter
(Feedback integer) · (Parameter resolution) = Scaled value
integer resolution
1 0.1 mA 1 · 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA
10 0.1% 10 · 0.1% = 1%
Where parameters are in percent, the Complete parameter descriptions section

specifies what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert from
percent to engineering units, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines
100% and divide by 100%.
Embedded fieldbus
For example:
Value of the
Feedback Parameter (Feedback integer) · (Parameter resolution) ·
parameter that
integer resolution (Value of 100% ref.) / 100% = Scaled value
defines 100%
10 0.1% 1500 rpm1 10 · 0.1% · 1500 RPM / 100% = 15 rpm
100 0.1% 500 Hz2 100 · 0.1% · 500 Hz / 100% = 50 Hz
1
Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED
as the 100% reference and that 9908 = 1500 rpm.
2
Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ
as the 100% reference and that 9907 = 500 Hz.
Diagnostics – EFB
Fault queue for drive diagnostics

For general ACS550 diagnostics information, see chapter Diagnostics on page 259.
The three most recent ACS550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below.
Drive parameter
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
0401 LAST FAULT 40401

0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 40412
0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 40413
Serial communication diagnostics

Network problems can be caused by multiple sources. Some of these sources are:
• loose connections
• incorrect wiring (including swapped wires)
• bad grounding
• duplicate station numbers
• incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network.
The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53:
EFB PROTOCOL parameters 5306…5309. Section Complete parameter
descriptions on page 106 describes these parameters in detail.
Embedded fieldbus
Diagnostic situations
The sub-sections below describe various diagnostic situations – the problem
symptoms and corrective actions.
Normal operation
During normal network operation, 5306…5309 parameter values act as follows at
each drive:
• 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances (advances for each message properly received
and addressed to this drive).
• 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when an invalid
message CRC is received).
• 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when character format
errors are detected, such as parity or framing errors).
• 5309 EFB STATUS value varies depending on network traffic.
Loss of communication
The ACS550 behavior, if communication is lost, was configured earlier in section
Communication fault on page 210. The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and
3019 COMM FAULT TIME. Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 106
describes these parameters in detail.
No master station on line
If no master station is on line: Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors (5307 EFB
CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS) increase on any of the stations.
To correct:
• Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the
network.
• Verify that the cable is connected and that it is not cut or short circuited.
Duplicate stations
If two or more stations have duplicate numbers:
• Two or more drives cannot be addressed.
• Every time there is a read or write to one particular station, the value for 5307 EFB
CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances.
To correct: Verify the station numbers of all stations. Change conflicting station
numbers.
Swapped wires
If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one drive is connected to
terminal B on another):
• The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance.
• The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing.
To correct: Check that the RS-485 lines are not swapped.
Embedded fieldbus
Fault 28 – Serial 1 Err

If the drive’s control panel shows fault code 28, SERIAL 1 ERR, check for either of the
following:
• The master system is down. To correct, resolve problem with master system.
• The communication connection is bad. To correct, check communication
connection at the drive.
• The time-out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation. The
master is not polling the drive within the specified time-out delay. To correct,
increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME.
Faults 31…33 – EFB1…EFB3
The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in chapter Diagnostics on page 259
(fault codes 31…33) are not used.
Intermittent off-line occurrences
The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with
ACS550 serial communication. Intermittent problems might also be caused by:
• marginally loose connections
• wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations
• insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the
communication cables.
Embedded fieldbus
Modbus protocol technical data
Overview
The Modbus® protocol was introduced by Modicon, Inc. for use in control
environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers. Due to its ease of use
and implementation, this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de-facto
standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices.
Modbus is a serial, asynchronous protocol. Transactions are half-duplex, featuring a
single Master controlling one or more Slaves. While RS232 can be used for point-to-
point communication between a single Master and a single Slave, a more common
implementation features a multi-drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling
multiple Slaves. The ACS550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface.
RTU
The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes: ASCII and RTU.
The ACS550 supports RTU only.
Feature summary
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS550.
Function Code (Hex) Description
Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status. For the ACS550, the individual bits
of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).
Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status. For the ACS550, the individual bits
Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1…16 or 1…32,
depending on the active profile. Terminal inputs are mapped
sequentially beginning with Input 33 (e.g. DI1=Input 33).
Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers. For the ACS550, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers. For the ACS550, the 2 analog input
Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 & 2.
Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output. For the ACS550, the individual bits
of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).
Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register. For the ACS550, the entire
Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics. Subcodes for Query (0x00),
Restart (0x01) & Listen Only (0x04) are supported.
Force Multiple Coils 0x0F Write multiple discrete outputs. For the ACS550, the individual
bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs
are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil
33).
Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers. For the ACS550, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
Read/Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single
Holding Registers command.
Embedded fieldbus
Mapping summary
The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS550 (parameters and
I/0) and Modbus reference space. For details, see Modbus addressing below.
ACS550 Modbus reference Supported function codes
• Control Bits Coils(0xxxx) • 01 – Read Coil Status
• Relay Outputs • 05 – Force Single Coil
• 15 – Force Multiple Coils
• Status Bits Discrete Inputs(1xxxx) • 02 – Read Input Status
• Discrete Inputs
• Analog Inputs Input Registers(3xxxxx) • 04 – Read Input Registers
• Parameters Holding Registers(4xxxx) • 03 – Read 4X Registers
• Control/Status Words • 06 – Preset Single 4X Register
• References • 16 – Preset Multiple 4X Registers
• 23 – Read/Write 4X Registers
Communication profiles
When communicating by Modbus, the ACS550 supports multiple profiles for control
and status information. Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used.
• ABB DRV LIM – The primary (and default) profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile. This
implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with
ACS400 drives. The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface. It is
discussed in detail in the following sections.
• DCU PROFILE – The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to
32 bits. It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the
embedded fieldbus environment.
• ABB DRV FULL – ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that
standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives. This
implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM
implementation.
Modbus addressing
With Modbus, each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set.
Thus, the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message.
Note: The ACS550 supports the zero-based addressing of the Modbus

specification. Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message.
Similarly, coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message.
Refer again to the Mapping summary above. The following sections describe, in
detail, the mapping to each Modbus reference set.
0xxxx Mapping – Modbus coils. The drive maps the following information to the
0xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils:
• bit-wise map of the CONTROL WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE). The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose.
Embedded fieldbus
• relay output states, numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033.

The following table summarizes the 0xxxx reference set:
Modbus Internal location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL
ref. (all profiles) (5305 = 0) (5305 = 1) (5305 = 2)
00001 1 1
CONTROL WORD – Bit 0 OFF1 STOP OFF1
1
00002 CONTROL WORD – Bit 1 OFF2 START OFF21
00003 CONTROL WORD – Bit 2 OFF31 REVERSE OFF31
00004 CONTROL WORD – Bit 3 START LOCAL START
00005 CONTROL WORD – Bit 4 N/A RESET RAMP_OUT_ZERO1
00006 CONTROL WORD – Bit 5 RAMP_HOLD1 EXT2 RAMP_HOLD1
00007 CONTROL WORD – Bit 6 RAMP_IN_ZERO1 RUN_DISABLE RAMP_IN_ZERO1
00008 CONTROL WORD – Bit 7 RESET STPMODE_R RESET
00009 CONTROL WORD – Bit 8 N/A STPMODE_EM N/A
00010 CONTROL WORD – Bit 9 N/A STPMODE_C N/A
00011 CONTROL WORD – Bit 10 N/A RAMP_2 REMOTE_CMD1
00012 CONTROL WORD – Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP_OUT_0 EXT2
00013 CONTROL WORD – Bit 12 N/A RAMP_HOLD N/A
00014 CONTROL WORD – Bit 13 N/A RAMP_IN_0 N/A
00015 CONTROL WORD – Bit 14 N/A REQ_LOCALLOCK N/A
00016 CONTROL WORD – Bit 15 N/A TORQLIM2 N/A
00017 CONTROL WORD – Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL_CTL Does not apply
00018 CONTROL WORD – Bit 17 FBLOCAL_REF
00019 CONTROL WORD – Bit 18 START_DISABLE1
00020 CONTROL WORD – Bit 19 START_DISABLE2
00021… Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
00032
00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1
1
= Active low
For the 0xxxx registers:

• Status is always readable.
• Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control.
• Additional relay outputs are added sequentially.
Embedded fieldbus
The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils:
Function code Description
01 Read coil status
05 Force single coil
15 (0x0F Hex) Force multiple coils
1xxxx Mapping – Modbus discrete inputs. The drive maps the following
information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs:
• bit-wise map of the STATUS WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE). The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose.
• discrete hardware inputs, numbered sequentially beginning with input 33.

The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set:
Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
ref. (all profiles) (5305 = 0 OR 2) (5305 = 1)
10001 STATUS WORD – Bit 0 RDY_ON READY
10002 STATUS WORD – Bit 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED
10003 STATUS WORD – Bit 2 RDY_REF STARTED
10004 STATUS WORD – Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING
10005 STATUS WORD – Bit 4 OFF_2_STA1 ZERO_SPEED
10006 STATUS WORD – Bit 5 OFF_3_STA1 ACCELERATE
10007 STATUS WORD – Bit 6 SWC_ON_INHIB DECELERATE
10008 STATUS WORD – Bit 7 ALARM AT_SETPOINT
10009 STATUS WORD – Bit 8 AT_SETPOINT LIMIT
10010 STATUS WORD – Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION
10011 STATUS WORD – Bit 10 ABOVE_LIMIT REV_REF
10012 STATUS WORD – Bit 11 EXT2 REV_ACT
10013 STATUS WORD – Bit 12 RUN_ENABLE PANEL_LOCAL
10014 STATUS WORD – Bit 13 N/A FIELDBUS_LOCAL
10015 STATUS WORD – Bit 14 N/A EXT2_ACT
10016 STATUS WORD – Bit 15 N/A FAULT
10017 STATUS WORD – Bit 16 Reserved ALARM
10018 STATUS WORD – Bit 17 Reserved REQ_MAINT
10019 STATUS WORD – Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK
10020 STATUS WORD – Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK
10021 STATUS WORD – Bit 20 Reserved CTL_MODE
10022 STATUS WORD – Bit 21 Reserved Reserved
10027 STATUS WORD – Bit 26 Reserved REQ_CTL
Embedded fieldbus
Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

ref. (all profiles) (5305 = 0 OR 2) (5305 = 1)
10028 STATUS WORD – Bit 27 Reserved REQ_REF1
10029 STATUS WORD – Bit 28 Reserved REQ_REF2
10030 STATUS WORD – Bit 29 Reserved REQ_REF2EXT
10031 STATUS WORD – Bit 30 Reserved ACK_STARTINH
10032 STATUS WORD – Bit 31 Reserved ACK_OFF_ILCK
10033 DI1 DI1 DI1
10034 DI2 DI2 DI2
10035 DI3 DI3 DI3
10036 DI4 DI4 DI4
10037 DI5 DI5 DI5
10038 DI6 DI6 DI6
1 = Active low
For the 1xxxx registers:

• Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially.
The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs:
02 Read input status
3xxxx Mapping – Modbus inputs. The drive maps the following information to the
3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers:
• any user defined analog inputs.
The following table summarizes the input registers:
Modbus ACS550
Remarks
reference all profiles
30001 AI1 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 (0…100%).
30002 AI2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 (0…100%).
The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers:
04 Read 3xxxx input status
4xxxx Register mapping. The drive maps its parameters and other data to the
4xxxx holding registers as follows:
• 40001…40099 map to drive control and actual values. These registers are
described in the table below.
• 40101…49999 map to drive parameters 0101…9999. Register addresses that do
not correspond to drive parameters are invalid. If there is an attempt to read or
write outside the parameter addresses, the Modbus interface returns an
exception code to the controller.
Embedded fieldbus
The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001…40099 (for
4xxxx registers above 40099, see the drive parameter list, e.g. 40102 is parameter
0102):
Modbus register Access Remarks
40001 CONTROL WORD R/W Maps directly to the profile‘S CONTROL WORD. Supported only
if 5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Drives profile). Parameter 5319 holds
a copy in hex format.
If 5305 = 1 (DCU profile selected), the register remains
empty.
40002 Reference 1 R/W Range = 0…+20000 (scaled to 0…1105 REF1 MAX), or
-20000…0 (scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX…0).
40003 Reference 2 R/W Range = 0…+10000 (scaled to 0…1108 REF2 MAX), or
-10000…0 (scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX…0).
40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile‘S STATUS WORD. Supported only if
5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Drives profile). Parameter 5320 holds a
copy in hex format.
If 5305 = 1 (DCU profile selected), the register remains
empty.
40005 Actual 1 R By default, stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ. Use
(select using 5310) parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this
register.
40006 Actual 2 R By default, stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT. Use parameter
(select using 5311) 5311 to select a different actual value for this register.
40007 Actual 3 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5312 to select an
(select using 5312) actual value for this register.
40031 ACS550 CONTROL R/W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0301.
40032 ACS550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0302.
40033 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile‘s STATUS WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0303.
40034 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile‘s STATUS WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0304.
40045 REFERENCE 1 LSW R/W The least significant word of reference 1. Supported only by
the DCU profile i.e. when 5305 ECB CTRL PROFILE setting is
DCU profile.
Embedded fieldbus
Modbus register Access Remarks

40046 REFERENCE 1 MSW R/W The most significant word of reference 1. Supported only by
DCU profile.
40047 REFERENCE 2 LSW R/W The least significant word of reference 2. Supported only by
DCU profile.
40048 REFERENCE 2 MSW R/W The most significant word of reference 2. Supported only by
DCU profile i.e. when 5305 ECB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU
profile.
Embedded fieldbus
For the Modbus protocol, drive parameters in Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL report the
parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers.
Code Description
5310 EFB PAR 10
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005.
5311 EFB PAR 11
5312 EFB PAR 12
5313 EFB PAR 13
5314 EFB PAR 14
5315 EFB PAR 15
5316 EFB PAR 16
5317 EFB PAR 17
5318 EFB PAR 18
Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins
transmitting response to the master request.
5319 EFB PAR 19
Holds a copy (in hex) of the CONTROL WORD, Modbus register 40001.
5320 EFB PAR 20
Holds a copy (in hex) of the STATUS WORD, Modbus register 40004.
Except where restricted by the drive, all parameters are available for both reading
and writing. The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid
register addresses.
Note: Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i.e. modified
values are not automatically stored to permanent memory. Use parameter 1607
PARAM SAVE to save all altered values.
The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers:
03 Read holding 4xxxx registers
06 Preset single 4xxxx register
16 (0x10 Hex) Preset multiple 4xxxx registers
23 (0x17 Hex) Read/write 4xxxx registers
Embedded fieldbus
Actual values
The contents of the register addresses 40005…40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are:
• specified using parameters 5310…5317
• Read-only values containing information on the operation of the drive
• 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer
• when negative values, written as the two’s complement of the corresponding
positive value
• scaled as described earlier in section Actual value scaling on page 211.
Exception codes
Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The ACS550
supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below.
Exception
Name Meaning
code
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable. It is not
a defined parameter/group.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable
value for the ACS550, because it is one of the following:
• Outside min. or max. limits.
• Parameter is read-only.
• Message is too long.
• Parameter write not allowed when start is active.
• Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected.
Embedded fieldbus
ABB control profiles technical data
Overview
ABB Drives profile
The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple
protocols, including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module. Two
implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available:
• – This implementation standardizes the control interface with
ABB DRV FULL
ACS600 and ACS800 drives.
• ABB DRV LIM – This implementation standardizes the control interface with
ACS400 drives. This implementation does not support two control word bits
supported by ABB DRV FULL.
Except as noted, the following “ABB Drives Profile” descriptions apply to both
implementations.
DCU profile
The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits. It is the internal
interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus
environment.
Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL
WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:
• The drive is in remote (REM) control.

• The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling
commands (set using parameters such as 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS, 1002 EXT2
COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL).
• The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control

profile. For example, to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both
parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 1 (STD MODBUS) and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE = 2 (ABB DRV FULL).
Embedded fieldbus
ABB Drives profile

The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the
CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD (See parameter 5319)

Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
state
0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently
active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF1 ACTIVE
• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON, unless
other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop.
• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within time specified by parameter
2208.
• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED
WARNING! Be sure motor and driven
equipment can be stopped using this
mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the Run
OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active. See 1601. If
1601 is set to COMM, this bit also actives the
Run Enable signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED
INHIBITED
4 Unused (ABB DRV LIM)

RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED
(ABB DRV FULL)
0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage
limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ACCELERATOR ENABLED
0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

output held)
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation. Enter OPERATING
ZERO
0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
Embedded fieldbus
ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD (See parameter 5319)

Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
state
7 RESET 0=>1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if 1604 =
COMM.
0 OPERATING Continue normal operation

8…9 Unused
10 Unused (ABB DRV LIM)
REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
(ABB DRV FULL)
0 • CW =/ 0 or Ref =/ 0: Retain last CW and Ref.
• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp are
locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 (EXT2).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 (EXT1).
12… Unused
15
DCU Profile
The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile.
DCU profile CONTROL WORD (See parameter 0301)
Bit Name Value Command/Req. Comments
0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode
parameter or the stop mode requests (bits 7
0 (no op) and 8).
1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands
result in a stop command.
0 (no op)
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR’d with the sign of the reference
defines direction.
0 Forward direction
3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit, it steals
control and the drive moves to fieldbus local
0 External mode control mode.
4 RESET -> 1 Reset Edge sensitive.
other (no op)
5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2
0 Switch to EXT1
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable.
0 Run enable on
7 STPMODE_R 1 Normal ramp stop
mode
0 (no op)
Embedded fieldbus

Bit Name Value Command/Req. Comments
8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency ramp
stop mode
0 (no op)
9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast stop mode
0 (no op)
10 RAMP_2 1 Ramp pair 2
0 Ramp pair 1
11 RAMP_OUT_0 1 Ramp output to 0
0 (no op)
12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Ramp freeze
0 (no op)
13 RAMP_IN_0 1 Ramp input to 0
0 (no op)
14 RREQ_LOCALL 1 Local mode lock In lock, drive will not switch to local mode.
OC
0 (no op)
15 TORQLIM2 1 Torque limit pair 2
0 Torque limit pair 1

Bit Name Value Function Comments
16…26 Reserved
27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed ref. These bits are only for supervision
purposes.
0 (no op)
28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed ref.
0 (no op)
29 LINK_ON 1 Master is detected
in link
0 Link is down
30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request
is pending
0 Start inhibit request
is OFF
31 OFF_INTERLOCK 1 Panel OFF button For the control panel (or PC tool) this is
pressed the OFF button interlock.
0 (no op)
Status Word
The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the
master station.
Embedded fieldbus
ABB Drives profile

STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives profile (EFB) STATUS WORD (See parameter 5320)

Description
Bit Name Value
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 OPERATION INHIBITED
3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT
0 No fault
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 INACTIVE
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 INACTIVE
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE
7 ALARM 1 Alarm (See section Alarm listing on page 267 for details on
alarms.)
0 No alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits) the
reference value.
0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to reference
value).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.
Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value < supervision
low limit.
See Group 32: SUPERVISION.
0 Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.
Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value > supervision
high limit.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 (EXT2) selected
0 External control location 1 (EXT1) selected
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received
0 No External Run Enable signal received
13… Unused
15
Embedded fieldbus
DCU profile
The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile.
DCU profile STATUS WORD (See parameter 0303)
Bit Name Value Status
0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command.
0 Drive is not ready.
1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received.
0 No external run enable signal received.
2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command.
0 Drive has not received start command.
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating.
0 Drive is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed.
0 Drive has not reached zero speed.
5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating.
0 Drive is not accelerating.
6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating.
0 Drive is not decelerating.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint.
0 Drive has not reached setpoint.
8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20: LIMITS settings.
0 Operation is within Group 20: LIMITS settings.
9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter (Group 32: SUPERVISION) is outside
its limits.
0 All supervised parameters are within limits.
10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction.
0 Drive reference is in forward direction.
11 REV_ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction.
0 Drive is running in forward direction.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel (or PC tool) local mode.
0 Control is not in control panel local mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode (steals control panel local).
0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode.
0 Control is in EXT1 mode.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state.
0 Drive is not in a fault state.
Embedded fieldbus
DCU profile STATUS WORD (See parameter 0304)

Bit Name Value Status
16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on.
0 No alarms are on.
17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending.
0 No maintenance request is pending.
18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked out.)
0 Direction lock is OFF.
19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked out.)
0 Local mode lock is OFF.
20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode.
0 Drive is in scalar control mode.
21…25 Reserved
26 REQ_CTL 1 Copy the control word
0 (no op)
27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel.
0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel.
28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel.
0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel.
29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel.
0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel.
30 ACK_STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted.
0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted.
31 ACK_OFF_ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button
0 Normal operation
Embedded fieldbus
State diagram
ABB Drives profile
To illustrate the operation of the state diagram, the following example (ABB DRV LIM
implementation of the ABB Drives profile) uses the control word to start the drive:
• First, the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met. See above.
• When the power is first connected, the state of the drive is not ready to switch on.
See dotted lined path ( ) in the state diagram below.
• Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the
OPERATING state is reached, meaning that the drive is running and follows the
given reference. See the table below.
Step CONTROL WORD Value Description
1 CW = 0000 0000 0000 0110 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH
ON.
bit 15 bit 0
2 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding.
3 CW = 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE.
4 CW = 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED.
The drive starts, but will not accelerate.
5 CW = 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)
output and changes the drive state to RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED.
6 CW = 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)
output and changes the drive state to OPERATING. The drive
accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference.
Embedded fieldbus
The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CW)
and STATUS WORD (SW) bits for the ABB Drives profile.
From any state From any state From any state
Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault

OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF3 OFF2 FAULT (SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit4=0)
ACTIVE ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)**
n(f)=0 / I=0
From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
SWITCH-ON
OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit1=0)
ACTIVE
n(f)=0 / I=0 Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
A B* C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON
(CW Bit3=0) (CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
OPERATION READY TO (SW Bit0=1)

(SW Bit2=0)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON
OPERATION INHIBITED (CW= xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
B* C* D* READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE
(CW Bit4=0)* (CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
OPERATION
C D (SW Bit2=1)
ENABLED
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1* 1111
i.e. Bit 4=1)*
KEY RFG OUTPUT

State ENABLED*
D
State change B*
(CW Bit6=0)
Path described in example (CW=xxxx x1xx xx11* 1111
i.e. Bit 5=1)
CW = CONTROL WORD
SW = STATUS WORD RFG: ACCELERATOR
RFG = Ramp Function Generator ENABLED
I = Param. 0104 CURRENT C
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ (CW=xxxx x1xx x111* 1111
i.e. Bit 6=1)
n = Speed
* Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
** This state transition also occurs if the fault is
reset from any other source (e.g. digital input). D
Embedded fieldbus
Reference scaling
Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the following tables.
Fieldbus scaling for ABB Drives profile
Reference
Reference Range Scaling Remarks
type
REF1 -32767 Speed or -20000 = -(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
… frequency 0=0 1104/1105. Actual motor
+32767 +20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by 2001/2002
(20000 corresponds to 100%) (speed) or 2007/2008
(frequency).
REF2 -32767 Speed or -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
… frequency 0=0 1107/1108. Actual motor
+32767 +10000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by 2001/2002
(frequency).
Torque -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
0=0 2015/2017 (torque1) or 2016/
+10000 = (par. 1108) 2018 (torque2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
PID -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
Reference 0=0 4012/4013 (PID set1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 4112/4113 (PID set2).
Note: The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on
the scaling of references.
Fieldbus scaling for DCU profile

Reference
type
REF1 -214783648 Speed or 1000 = 1 rpm / 1 Hz Final reference limited by
… frequency 1104/1105. Actual motor
+214783647 speed limited by 2001/2002
(speed) or 2007/2008
(frequency).
REF2 -214783648 Speed or 1000 = 1% Final reference limited by
… frequency 1107/1108. Actual motor
+214783647 speed limited by 2001/2002
(speed) or 2007/2008
(frequency).
Torque 1000 = 1% Final reference limited by
2015/2017 (torque1) or 2016/
2018 (torque2).
PID 1000 = 1% Final reference limited by
Reference 4012/4013 (PID set1) or
4112/4113 (PID set2).
Embedded fieldbus
Scaling examples
When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM+AI1 or
COMM*AI1, the reference is scaled as follows:
ABB Drives and DCU profiles

Value
Reference AI reference scaling
setting
REF1 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) +(AI (%) - 0.5 · REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus reference
correction coefficient
(100 + 0.5 · (Par. 1105)%
100%
AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%
REF1 COMM*AI1 COMM (%) · (AI (%) / 0.5 · REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus reference
200%
100%
AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%
REF2 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) + (AI (%) - 0.5 · REF2 MAX (%))
Fieldbus reference
(100 + 0.5 · (Par. 1108)%
100%
AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1108)%
0% 50% 100%
Embedded fieldbus
ABB Drives and DCU profiles

Value
Reference AI reference scaling
setting
Fieldbus reference
200%
100%
AI1input signal
0%
0% 50% 100%
Embedded fieldbus
Reference handling
Use Group 10: START/STOP/DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation
direction for each control location (EXT1 and EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate
how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce
REFERENCE values (REF1 and REF2). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is
they can be positive or negative.
ABB Drives profile
Parameter Value setting AI reference scaling
1003 DIRECTION 1 (FORWARD)
Resultant ref.
Max. ref
Fieldbus
reference -163% -100% 100% 163%
-(Max. ref.)
1003 DIRECTION 2 (REVERSE) Max. ref

Resultant ref.
Fieldbus -163% -100% 100% 163%

reference
-(Max. ref.)
1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST)

Resultant ref.
Max. ref
Fieldbus -163% -100%

reference 100% 163%
-(Max. ref.)
Embedded fieldbus
Fieldbus adapter
Overview
The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard
serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACS550 can
either:
• receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or
• be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available
control locations, such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel.
Fieldbus controller
Fieldbus
Other devices
Connect using either:

• standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at
terminals X1:28…32
• fieldbus adapter (FBA) module mounted
in slot 2 (option Rxxx)
Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

• embedded fieldbus (EFB) – See chapter Embedded fieldbus on page 203.
• fieldbus adapter (FBA) – With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive’s
expansion slot 2, the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the
following protocols:
– PROFIBUS DP
– Ethernet (Modbus/TCP, EtherNet/IP, EtherCAT, PROFINET IO, POWERLINK)
– CANopen
– DeviceNet
– ControlNet.
The ACS550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the
plug-in fieldbus adapter. The default settings for each protocol assume that the
profile used is the protocol’s industry-standard drive profile (e.g. PROFIdrive for
PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet). All of the FBA protocols can also be
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used.These details are
provided in a user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.
Details for the ABB Drives profile (which apply for all protocols) are provided in
section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 248.
Fieldbus adapter
Control interface
In general, the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive
consists of:
• Output Words:
– CONTROL WORD
– REFERENCE (speed or frequency)
– Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words. Protocols limits
may further restrict the total.
• Input Words:
– STATUS WORD
– Actual Value (speed or frequency)
– Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words. Protocols limits may
further restrict the total.
Note: The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.
The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACS550.
However, the profile used may set particular meanings.
Fieldbus controller
Fieldbus
Control Word (CW)

References
Process I/O
(cyclic) Status Word (SW)
Actual Values
Service
Messages Parameter R/W Requests/Responses
(Acyclic)
Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL
WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:
• The drive is in remote (REM) control.

• The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling
commands from EXT1 (set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102
EXT1/EXT2 SEL).
• The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is activated:
Fieldbus adapter
– Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 4 (EXT FBA).

– The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile
mode or drive profile objects.
The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol/profile used. See the
user’s manual provided with the FBA module and/or section ABB Drives profile
technical data on page 248.
Status Word
The STATUS WORD is a 16-bit word containing status information, sent by the drive to
the fieldbus controller. The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol/
profile used. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA module and/or section
ABB Drives profile technical data on page 248.
Reference
The contents of each REFERENCE word:
• can be used, as speed or frequency reference
• is a 16-bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15-bit integer
• Negative references (indicating reversed rotation direction) are indicated by the
two’s complement of the corresponding positive reference value.
The use of a second reference (REF2) is supported only when a protocol is
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific. See the user’s manual provided with the
FBA module and/or the following sections as appropriate:
• Reference scaling on page 252 (ABB Drives profile technical data)
• Reference scaling on page 256 (Generic profile technical data).
Actual Values
Actual Values are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the
drive. Drive Actual Values (for example, Group 10: START/STOP/DIR parameters)
can be mapped to Input Words using Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE parameters
(protocol-dependent, but typically parameters 5104…5126).
Planning
Network planning should address the following questions:
• What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?
• What control information must be sent down to the drives?
• What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling
system?
Fieldbus adapter
Mechanical and electrical installation – FBA
WARNING! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from
the power source.
Overview
The FBA (fieldbus adapter) is a plug-in module that fits in the drive’s expansion slot
2. The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws. The
screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND
signals to the drive control board.
On installation of the module, electrical connection to the drive is automatically
established through the 34-pin connector.
Mounting procedure
1
Note: Install the input power and motor cables first.
2
1. Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2
until the retaining clips lock the module into position.
2. Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.
Note: Correct installation of the screws is essential for

fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of
the module.
7 X00301
3. Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and
install the cable clamp for the network cable.
4. Route the network cable through the cable clamp.
5. Connect the network cable to the module’s network 5
connector.
6
6. Tighten the cable clamp.
3
7. Install the conduit box cover (1 screw).
4
8. For configuration information see the following: X00302
• section Communication set-up – FBA on page 241

• section Activate drive control functions – FBA on page 241
• The protocol specific documentation provided with the module.
Fieldbus adapter
Communication set-up – FBA
Serial communication selection

To activate the serial communication, use parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL. Set 9802
= 4 (EXT FBA).
Serial communication configuration

Setting 9802, together with mounting a particular FBA module, automatically sets the
appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process.
These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user’s manual supplied with
the FBA module.
• Parameter 5101 is automatically configured.
• Parameters 5102…5126 are protocol-dependent and define, for example, the
profile used and additional I/O words. These parameters are referred to as the
fieldbus configuration parameters. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA
module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters.
• Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102…5126. If
parameter 5127 is not used, changes to parameters 5102…5126 take affect only
after the drive power is cycled.
• Parameters 5128…5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed
(e.g. component versions and status).
See Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE for parameter descriptions.
Activate drive control functions – FBA

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
• tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function
• define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control
• define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. The last column in each table below is deliberately blank. See
the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry.
Start/Stop Direction control

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:
Protocol
reference
1001 EXT1 10 (COMM) Start/Stop controlled by fieldbus with
COMMANDS Ext1 selected.
Fieldbus adapter
Protocol
reference
1002 EXT2 10 (COMM) Start/Stop by controlled fieldbus with
COMMANDS Ext2 selected.
1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Direction controlled by fieldbus.
Input reference select

Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires:
• drive parameter value set as defined below
• fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
Protocol
reference
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 8 (COMM) Ref. selected by fieldbus.
(Required only if 2 references used.)
1103 REF1 SELECT 8 (COMM) Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus.
9 (COMM+AI1)
10 (COMM*AI1)
1106 REF2 SELECT 8 (COMM) Input reference 2 supplied by fieldbus.
9 (COMM+AI) (Required only if 2 references used.)
10 (COMM*AI)
Note: Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile.
Scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the following sections, as
appropriate:
• Reference scaling on page 252 (ABB Drives profile technical data)
• Reference scaling on page 256 (Generic profile technical data).
System control
Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:
• fieldbus controller command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location is
defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol
reference
1601 RUN ENABLE 7 (COMM) Run enable by fieldbus.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 (COMM) Fault reset by fieldbus.
1607 PARAM SAVE 1 (SAVE) Saves altered parameters to memory (then
value returns to 0).
Fieldbus adapter
Relay output control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate
location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol
dependent.)
Protocol
reference
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 (COMM) Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus.
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 (COMM(-1)) Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus.
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus.

1
1
1
More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.
Note: Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.
Drive parameter Value Protocol reference

0122 RO 1-3 STATUS Relay 1…3 status.
0123 RO 4-6 STATUS Relay 4…6 status.
Analog output control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:
• fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The
Protocol
reference
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 (COMM VALUE 1) Analog Output 1 controlled by –
writing to parameter 0135.
0135 COMM VALUE 1 –
1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling –
… … values.
1505 MAXIMUM AO1
1506 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for AO1. –

1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 (COMM VALUE 2) Analog Output 2 controlled by –
writing to parameter 0136.
0136 COMM VALUE 2 –
1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling –
… … values.
1511 MAXIMUM AO2
1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for AO2. –
Fieldbus adapter
PID Control setpoint source

Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID
loops:
Protocol
Drive parameter Value Setting
reference
4010 SET POINT SEL (Set 1) 8 (COMM VALUE 1) Setpoint is input reference 2
9 (COMM+AI1) (+/-/* AI1)
4110 SET POINT SEL (Set 2)
10 (COMM*AI1)
4210 SET POINT SEL (Ext/Trim)
Communication fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the drive’s action if serial communication is lost.
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 (NOT SEL) Set for appropriate drive
1 (FAULT) response.
2 (CONST SP7)
3 (LAST SPEED)
3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss.
Feedback from the drive – FBA

Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see all parameters listed in
section Complete parameter descriptions on page 106.
Drive parameter Protocol reference
0102 SPEED
0103 OUTPUT FREQ
0104 CURRENT
0105 TORQUE
0106 POWER
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE
0301 FB CMD WORD 1 – bit 0 (STOP)

0301 FB CMD WORD 1 – bit 2 (REV)
0118 DI 1-3 STATUS – bit 0 (DI3)
Scaling
To scale the drive parameter values see the following sections, as appropriate:
• Actual Value scaling on page 255 (ABB Drives profile technical data)
• Actual Value scaling on page 257 (Generic profile technical data).
Fieldbus adapter
Diagnostics – FBA
Fault handling
The ACS550 provides fault information as follows:
• The control panel display shows a fault code and text. See chapter Diagnostics
on page 259 for a complete description.
• Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT2
store the most recent faults.
• For fieldbus access, the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value, assigned
and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification. See the table below. Not all
profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification. For profiles that
support this specification, the profile documentation defines the proper fault
request process.
Fieldbus fault code
Drive fault code (DRIVECOM
specification)
1 OVERCURRENT 2310h
2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h
3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h
4 sHORT CIRC 2340h
5 Reserved FF6Bh
6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h
7 AI1 LOSS 8110h
8 AI2 LOSS 8110h
9 MOT OVERTEMP 4310h
10 PANEL LOSS 5300h
11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h
12 MOTOR STALL 7121h
14 EXT FAULT 1 9000h
15 EXT FAULT 2 9001h
16 EARTH FAULT 2330h
17 Obsolete FF6Ah
18 THERM FAIL 5210h
19 OPEX LINK 7500h
20 OPEX PWR 5414h
21 CURR MEAS 2211h
22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h
23 ENCODER ERR 7301h
24 OVERSPEED 7310h
25 Reserved FF80h
26 DRIVE ID 5400h
Fieldbus adapter
Fieldbus fault code

Drive fault code (DRIVECOM
specification)
27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh
28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h
29 EFB CON FILE 6306h
30 FORCE TRIP FF90h
31 EFB 1 FF92h
32 EFB 2 FF93h
33 EFB 3 FF94h
34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h
35 OUTP WIRING FF95h
36 INCOMPATIBLE SW 630Fh
37 CB OVERTEMP 4110h
38 USER LOAD CURVE FF6Bh
101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h
102 Reserved FF55h
103 SERF MACRO FF55h
104 Reserved FF55h
105 Reserved FF55h
201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h
204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h
205 Reserved (obsolete) 5000h
206 CB ID ERROR 5000h
207 EFB LOAD ERROR 6100h
1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h
1001 PAR PFC REF NEG 6320h
1002 Reserved (obsolete) 6320h
1003 PAR AI SCALE 6320h
1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h
1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h
1006 PAR EXT RO 6320h
1007 PAR FIELDBUS MISSING 6320h
1008 PAR PFC MODE 6320h
1009 PAR PCU 1 6320h
1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h
1013 PAR PFC IO 2 6320h
1014 PAR PFC IO 3 6320h
1016 PAR USER LOAD C 6320h
Fieldbus adapter
Serial communication diagnostics

Besides the drive fault codes, the FBA module has diagnostic tools. Refer to the
user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.
Fieldbus adapter
ABB Drives profile technical data
Overview
The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple
protocols, including protocols available on the FBA module. This section describes
the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules.
Control Word
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the CONTROL WORD is
the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system.
CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD
Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments
0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently
active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)
• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON,
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are
active.
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop.
• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by
parameter 2208.
• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED
WARNING! Be sure motor and
driven equipment can be stopped
using this mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the Run
OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active. See 1601. If
1601 is set to COMM, this bit also actives
the Run Enable signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION
INHIBITED INHIBITED
4 RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:

ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED
0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to

Zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC
voltage limits in force).
Fieldbus adapter
ABB Drives profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ACCELERATOR ENABLED
0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

output held)
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation. Enter OPERATING
ZERO
0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to
zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if 1604 =
COMM.
0 OPERATING Continue normal operation

8…9 Unused
10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled
0 • CW =/ 0 or Ref =/ 0: Retain last CW and
Ref.
• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp
are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 (EXT2).
0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 (EXT1).
12…15 Unused
Status Word
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the contents of the
STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the master station. The
following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the status
word content.
ABB Drives profile (FBA) STATUS WORD
Description
Bit Name Value
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 OPERATION INHIBITED
3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT
0 No fault
Fieldbus adapter
ABB Drives profile (FBA) STATUS WORD

Description
Bit Name Value
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive

0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE
7 ALARM 1 Alarm (See section Alarm listing on page 267 for details
on alarms.)
0 No alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits)
the reference value.
0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to
reference value).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.
Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value <
supervision low limit.
0 Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.
Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value >
supervision high limit.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 (EXT2) selected
0 External control location 1 (EXT1) selected
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received
0 No External Run Enable signal received
13… 15 Unused
Fieldbus adapter
The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CW)
and STATUS WORD (SW) bits.
From any state From any state From any state
Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault

OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF3 OFF2 FAULT (SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit4=0)
ACTIVE ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)
n(f)=0 / I=0
From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
SWITCH-ON
OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit1=0)
ACTIVE
n(f)=0 / I=0 Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
A B C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON
(CW Bit3=0) (CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
OPERATION READY TO (SW Bit0=1)

(SW Bit2=0)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON
OPERATION INHIBITED (CW= xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
B C D READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE
(CW Bit4=0) (CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
C D OPERATION
(SW Bit2=1)
ENABLED
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
RFG OUTPUT
ENABLED
D
B
(CW Bit6=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
KEY
State
State change RFG: ACCELERATOR
CW = CONTROL WORD ENABLED
SW = STATUS WORD C
(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
I = Param. 0104 CURRENT
OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
n = Speed D
Fieldbus adapter
Reference
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the REFERENCE word is
a speed or frequency reference.
Reference scaling
The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA)
Reference
type
REF1 -32767… Speed or -20000 = -(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
+32767 frequency 0=0 1104/1105. Actual motor
+20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by 2001/2002
(frequency).
REF2 -32767… Speed or -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
+32767 frequency 0=0 1107/1108. Actual motor
+10000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by 2001/2002
(frequency).
Torque -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
0=0 2015/2017 (torque1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 2016/2018 (torque2).
PID -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
Reference 0=0 4012/4013 (PID set1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 4112/4113 (PID set2).
When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM+AI1 or
COMM*AI1, the reference is scaled as follows:
ABB Drives profile (FBA)

Reference Value setting AI reference scaling
Fieldbus reference
(100 + 0.5 · (Par. 1105)%
100%
AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%
Fieldbus adapter
ABB Drives profile (FBA)

Reference Value setting AI reference scaling
Fieldbus reference
200%
100%
AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%
Fieldbus reference
(100 + 0.5 · (Par. 1108)%
100%
AI1 input signal

(100 - 0.5 · (par. 1108)%
0% 50% 100%
Fieldbus reference
200%
100%
AI1 input signal

0%
0% 50% 100%
Fieldbus adapter
Reference handling
Use Group 10: START/STOP/DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation
direction for each control location (EXT1 and EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate
how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce
REFERENCE values (REF1 and REF2). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is
they can be positive or negative.
ABB Drives profile
Parameter Value setting AI reference scaling
1003 DIRECTION 1 (FORWARD) Resultant ref.
Max. ref
Fieldbus
reference -163% -100% 100% 163%
-(Max. ref.)
1003 DIRECTION 2 (REVERSE) Max. ref
Resultant ref.
Fieldbus -163% -100% 100% 163%

reference
-(Max. ref.)
1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Resultant ref.

Max. ref
Fieldbus -163% -100%

reference 100% 163%
-(Max. ref.)
Fieldbus adapter
Actual Value
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, Actual Values are
words containing drive values.
Actual Value scaling

The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the
resolution of the selected drive parameter. Except as noted for ACT1 and ACT2 below,
scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in section
Complete parameter list on page 91. For example:
Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value
1 0.1 mA 1 · 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA
10 0.1% 10 · 0.1% = 1%
Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows:

ABB Drives profile
Contents Scaling
ACT1 ACTUAL SPEED -20000 … +20000 = -(par. 1105) … +(par. 1105)
ACT2 TORQUE -10000 … +10000 = -100% … +100%
Virtual addresses of the drive control

The virtual address area of the drive control is allocated as follows:
1 Control Word
2 Reference 1 (REF1)
3 Reference 2 (REF2)
4 Status Word
5 Actual Value 1 (ACT1)
6 Actual Value 2 (ACT2)
Fieldbus adapter
Generic profile technical data
Overview
The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry-standard drive profile for each protocol
(e.g. PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet).
Control Word
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the CONTROL WORD is
the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. For specific
CONTROL WORD content, see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.
Status Word
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the contents of the
STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the master station. For
specific STATUS WORD content, see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.
Reference
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, the REFERENCE word is
a speed or frequency reference.
Note: REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles.
Reference scaling
REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific. However, at the drive, the meaning of a
100% REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below. For a detailed
description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE, see the user’s manual
supplied with the FBA module.
Generic profile
Reference
type
REF Fieldbus Speed -100% = -(par. 9908) Final reference limited by
specific 0=0 1104/1105.
+100 = (par. 9908) Actual motor speed limited by 2001/
2002 (speed).
Frequency -100% = -(par. 9907) Final reference limited by
0=0 1104/1105.
+100 = (par. 9907) Actual motor speed limited by 2007/
2008 (frequency).
Actual Values
As described earlier in section Control interface on page 238, Actual Values are
words containing drive values.
Fieldbus adapter
Actual Value scaling

For Actual Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter’s resolution. (See
section Complete parameter list on page 91 for parameter resolutions.) For example:
Feedback (Feedback integer) · (Parameter resolution) =
Parameter resolution
integer Scaled Value
1 0.1 mA 1 · 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA
10 0.1% 10 · 0.1% = 1%
Where parameters are in percent, the Complete parameter list section specifies
what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert from percent to
engineering units, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100% and
divide by 100%. For example:
Value of the (Feedback integer) · (Parameter resolution) ·
Feedback Parameter
parameter that (Value of 100% ref.) / 100% =
integer resolution
defines 100% Scaled Value
10 0.1% 1500 rpm1 10 · 0.1% · 1500 RPM / 100% = 15 rpm
100 0.1% 500 Hz2 100 · 0.1% · 500 Hz / 100% = 50 Hz
1
Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED
as the 100% reference and that 9908 = 1500 rpm.
2 Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ
as the 100% reference and that 9907 = 500 Hz.
Actual Value mapping

See the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.
Fieldbus adapter
Fieldbus adapter
Diagnostics
WARNING! Do not attempt any measurement, parts replacement or other service

procedure not described in this manual. Such action will void the warranty, may
endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense.
WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter
should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel. The safety instructions in
chapter Safety instructions on page 5 must be followed.
Diagnostic displays
The drive detects error situations and reports them using:
• the green and red LED on the body of the drive
• the status LED on the control panel (if an Assistant Control Panel is attached to
the drive)
• the control panel display (if a control panel is attached to the drive)
• the Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits (parameters 0305 to 0309). See
Group 03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 112 for the bit definitions.
The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. You can specify the
severity for many errors by directing the drive to:
• ignore the error situation
• report the situation as an alarm
• report the situation as a fault.
Red – Faults
The drive signals that it has detected a severe error, or fault, by:
• enabling the red LED on the drive (LED is either steady on or blinking)
• showing the steady red status LED on the control panel (if attached to the drive)
• setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter (0305 to 0307)
• overriding the control panel display with the display LOC FAULT
of a fault code in the Fault mode (figures on the
right)
FAULT 7
AI1 LOSS
• stopping the motor (if it was on).
00:00
The fault code on the control panel display is
temporary. Pressing any of the following keys removes
the fault message: MENU, ENTER, UP, or DOWN key.
LOC
F0007 FWD
Diagnostics
The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and
the fault is still active.
Flashing green – Alarms

For less severe errors, called alarms, the diagnostic display is advisory. For these
situations, the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something “unusual.” In
these situations, the drive:
• flashes the green LED on the drive (does not apply to alarms that arise from
control panel operation errors)
• flashes the green LED on the control panel (if attached to the drive)
• sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter (0308 or 0309). See Group
03: FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 112 for the bit definitions
• overrides the control panel display with the display LOC ALARM
of an alarm code and/or name in the Fault mode
(figures on the right).
ALARM 2008
PANEL LOSS
Alarm messages disappear from the control panel
00:00
display after a few seconds. The message returns
periodically as long as the alarm condition exists. LOC
A2008 FWD
Correcting faults
The recommended corrective action for faults is:
• Use the table in section Fault listing below to find and address the root cause of
the problem.
• Reset the drive. See section Fault resetting on page 265.
Fault listing
The following table lists the faults by code number and describes each. The fault
name is the long form shown in the Fault mode of the Assistant Control Panel when
the fault occurs. The fault names shown (for Assistant Control Panel only) in the
Fault Logger mode (see page 61) and the fault names for parameter 0401 LAST
FAULT may be shorter.
Fault Fault name in
Description and recommended corrective action
code panel
1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive. Check for and correct:
• Excessive motor load.
• Insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and
2205 ACCELER TIME 2).
• Faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
Diagnostics
Fault Fault name in

code panel
2 DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. Check for and correct:
• Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply.
• Insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and
2206 DECELER TIME 2).
• Undersized brake chopper (if present).
• Verify that overvoltage controller is ON (using parameter 2005).
3 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated. Temperature is at or above limit.
R1…R4: 115 °C (239 °F)
R5, R6: 125 °C (257 °F)
Check for and correct:
• Fan failure.
• Obstructions in the air flow.
• Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink.
• Excessive ambient temperature.
4 SHORT CIRC Fault current. Check for and correct:
• A short-circuit in the motor cable(s) or motor.
• Supply disturbances.
5 RESERVED Not used.
6 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient. Check for and correct:
• Missing phase in the input power supply.
• Blown fuse.
• Undervoltage on mains.
7 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss. Analog input value is less than AI1 FAULT LIMIT (3021).
• Source and connection for analog input.
• Parameter settings for AI1 FAULT LIMIT (3021) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
8 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss. Analog input value is less than AI2 FAULT LIMIT (3022).
• Source and connection for analog input.
• Parameter settings for AI2 FAULT LIMIT (3022) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
9 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot, based on either the drive’s estimate or on temperature
feedback.
• Check for overloaded motor.
• Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005…3009).
• Check the temperature sensors and Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS
parameters.
10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
• Drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or
• Drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to accept
start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel.
To correct check:
• Communication lines and connections.
• Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR.
• Parameters in Group 10: START/STOP/DIR and Group 11:
REFERENCE SELECT (if drive operation is REM).
Diagnostics
Fault Fault name in

code panel
11 ID RUN FAIL The Motor ID Run was not completed successfully. Check for and correct:
• Motor connections.
• Motor parameters 9905…9909.
12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall. Motor is operating in the stall region. Check for and
correct:
• Excessive load.
• Insufficient motor power.
• Parameters 3010…3012.
14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active. See parameter
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1.
15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active. See parameter
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2.
16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables. The drive
monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is
not running. Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and
can produce false positives.
Possible corrections:
• Check for/correct faults in the input wiring.
• Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length.
• Decrease the detection level for earth fault with parameter 3028 EARTH
FAULT LVL.
• A delta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high
capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non-running
tests. To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not
running, use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT. To disable response to all
ground fault monitoring, use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT.
17 OBSOLETE Not used.
18 THERM FAIL Internal fault. The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the
drive is open or shorted. Contact your local ABB representative.
19 OPEX LINK Internal fault. A communication-related problem has been detected on the
fiber optic link between the control and OINT boards. Contact your local
ABB representative.
20 OPEX PWR Internal fault. Exceptionally low voltage detected on the OINT power supply.
Contact your local ABB representative.
21 CURR MEAS Internal fault. Current measurement is out of range. Contact your local ABB
representative.
22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high. Check for and correct:
• Missing mains phase.
• Blown fuse.
Diagnostics
Fault Fault name in

code panel
23 ENCODER ERR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal. Check for and correct:
• Encoder presence and proper connection (reverse wired = channel A
connected to terminal of channel B or vice versa, loose connection or
short circuit).
• Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range.
• A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module,
OTAC-01.
• Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR. A wrong value will
only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater
than 4 times the rated slip of the motor.
• Encoder is not being used, but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE =
1 (ENABLE).
24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120% of the larger (in magnitude) of 2001
MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED. Check for and correct:
• Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002.
• Adequacy of motor braking torque.
• Applicability of torque control.
• Brake chopper and resistor.
26 DRIVE ID Internal fault. Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid. Contact your local
ABB representative.
27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error. Contact your local ABB
representative.
28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out. Check for and correct:
• Fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME).
• Communication settings (Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53:
EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate).
• Poor connections and/or noise on line.
29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus.
30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus. See the fieldbus User’s Manual.
31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus (EFB) protocol application.
The meaning is protocol dependent.
32 EFB 2
33 EFB 3
34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor phases is lost. Check for and
correct:
• Motor fault.
• Motor cable fault.
• Thermal relay fault (if used).
• Internal fault.
35 OUTP WIRING Incorrect input power and motor cable connection (i.e., input power cable is
connected to drive motor connection). The fault can be erroneously
declared if the drive is faulty or the input power is a delta grounded system
and the motor cable capacitance is large.
This fault can be disabled by using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT.
• Check input power connections. Check grounding.
Diagnostics
Fault Fault name in

code panel
36 INCOMPATIBLE The drive cannot use the software.
SW • Internal fault.
• The loaded software is not compatible with the drive.
• Call support representative.
37 CB OVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated. The fault trip limit is 88 °C. Check for and
correct:
• Fan failure.
Not for drives with an OMIO control board.
38 USER LOAD Condition defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid
CURVE longer than the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
101… SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive. Contact your local ABB representative and report
199 the error number.
201… SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system. Contact your local ABB representative and report the
299 error number.
- UNKNOWN Wrong type of panel, i.e. panel that supports drive X but not the ACS550,
DRIVE TYPE: has been connected to the ACS550.
ACS550
SUPPORTED
DRIVES: X
Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below.
Fault Fault name in
code panel
1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
• 2001 MINIMUM SPEED > 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED.
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.
• 2001 MINIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range
(> 50).
• 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range
(> 50).
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range
(> 50).
• 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range
(> 50).
1001 PAR PFC REF Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for the following:
NEG • 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative, when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active.
1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
• 1301 MINIMUM AI1 > 1302 MAXIMUM AI1.
• 1304 MINIMUM AI2 > 1305 MAXIMUM AI2.
1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
• 1504 MINIMUM AO1 > 1505 MAXIMUM AO1.
• 1510 MINIMUM AO2 > 1511 MAXIMUM AO2.
Diagnostics
Fault Fault name in

code panel
1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper motor
nominal kVA or motor nominal power. Check for the following:
• 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR NOM CURR · 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT · 1.73 / PN) < 3.0
where: PN = 1000 · 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are kW)
or PN = 746 · 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are hp, e.g. in US)
1006 PAR EXT RO Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for the following:
• Extension relay module not connected and
• 1410…1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4…6 have non-zero values.
1007 PAR FIELDBUS Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for and correct:
MISSING • A parameter is set for fieldbus control (e.g. 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS = 10
(COMM)), but 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 0.
1008 PAR PFC MODE Parameter values are inconsistent – 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be = 3
(SCALAR:FREQ), when 8123 PFC ENABLE is activated.
1009 PAR PCU 1 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper motor
nominal frequency or speed. Check for both of the following:
• 1 < (60 · 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED < 16
• 0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED /
(120 · 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / Motor Poles) < 0.992
1010/ RESERVED Not used.
1011
1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete – not enough relays are parameterized to
PFC. Or, a conflict exists between Group 14: RELAY OUTPUTS, parameter
8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1013 PAR PFC IO 2 IO configuration is not complete – the actual number of PFC motors
(parameter 8127, MOTORS) does not match the PFC motors in Group 14:
RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1014 PAR PFC IO 3 IO configuration is not complete – the drive is unable to allocate a digital
input (interlock) for each PFC motor (parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and
8127 MOTORS).
1016 PAR USER LOAD C Parameter values for the user load curve are inconsistent. Check that the
following conditions are met:
• 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 < 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 < 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 <
3713 LOAD FREQ 4 < 3716 LOAD FREQ 5.
• 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 < 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1.
Fault resetting
The ACS550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults. Refer to
parameter Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET.
WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is active, the
ACS550 may start immediately after fault reset.
Diagnostics
Flashing red LED

To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED:
• Turn the power off for 5 minutes.
Red LED
To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED (on, not flashing), correct the
problem and do one of the following:
• Press RESET from the control panel.
• Turn the power off for 5 minutes.
Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SEL, the following could also be used to
reset the drive:
• digital input
• serial communication.
When the fault has been corrected, the motor can be started.
History
For reference, the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401, 0412,
0413. For the most recent fault (identified by parameter 0401), the drive stores
additional data (in parameters 0402…0411) to aid in troubleshooting a problem. For
example, parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault.
The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history.
See section Fault Logger mode on page 61 for more information.
To clear the fault history (all of the Group 04: FAULT HISTORY parameters):
1. Using the control panel in the Parameters mode, select parameter 0401.
2. Press EDIT (or ENTER on the Basic Control Panel).
3. Press UP and DOWN at the same time.
4. Press SAVE.
Correcting alarms
The recommended corrective action for alarms is:
• Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action (action is not always
required).
• Use the table in section Alarm listing below to find and address the root cause of
the problem.
Diagnostics
Alarm listing
The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each.
Alarm
Display Description
code
2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active. Check for and correct:
• Insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and
2205 ACCELER TIME 2).
• Faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
2002 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage controller is active. Check for and correct:
• Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply.
• Insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and
2206 DECELER TIME 2).
2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage controller is active. Check for and correct:
• Undervoltage on mains.
2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed. Either:
• Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation, or
• Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change (if
reverse operation is safe).
2005 IO COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out. Check for and correct:
• Fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME).
• Communication settings (Group 51: EXT COMM MODULE or
Group 53: EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate).
• Poor connections and/or noise on line.
2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting.
Check:
• Input source and connections.
• Parameter that sets the minimum (3021).
• Parameter that sets the alarm/fault operation (3001),
2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting.
Check:
• Input source and connections.
• Parameter that sets the minimum (3022).
• Parameter that sets the alarm/fault operation (3001).
2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
• Drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or
• Drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to
accept start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel.
To correct check:
• Communication lines and connections.
• Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR.
• Parameters in Group 10: START/STOP/DIR and Group 11:
REFERENCE SELECT (if drive operation is REM).
Diagnostics
Alarm
Display Description
code
2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot. This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault
OVERTEMP may be near.
R1…R4: 100 °C (212 °F)
R5, R6: 110 °C (230 °F)
• Fan failure.
• Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink.
2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor is hot, based on either the drive’s estimate or on temperature
feedback. This alarm warns that a MOT OVERTEMP fault trip may be
near. Check:
• Check for overloaded motor.
• Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005…3009).
• Check the temperature sensors and Group 35: MOTOR TEMP
MEAS.
2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region. This alarm warns that a MOTOR
STALL fault trip may be near.
2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault
(Note 1) reset, which may start the motor.
• To control automatic reset, use Group 31: AUTOMATIC RESET.
2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFC autochange function is active.
(Note 1) • To control PFC, use Group 81: PFC CONTROL and the PFC macro
on page 84.
2015 PFC I LOCK This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks are active, which means that
the drive cannot start the following:
• Any motor (when Autochange is used).
• The speed regulated motor (when Autochange is not used).
2016/ RESERVED Not used.
2017
2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active, which means
(Note 1) that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends.
• To control PID sleep, use parameters 4022…4026 or 4122…4126.
2019 ID RUN Performing ID Run.
2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing.
MISSING • To control Start Enable 1 function, use parameter 1608.
To correct, check:
• Digital input configuration.
• Communication settings.
2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing.
MISSING • To control Start Enable 2 function, use parameter 1609.
To correct, check:
• Digital input configuration.
• Communication settings.
Diagnostics
Alarm
Display Description
code
2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated.
STOP
2024 ENCODER ERROR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal. Check for and
correct:
• Encoder presence and proper connection (reverse wired, loose
connection or short circuit).
• Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range.
• A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module,
OTAC-01.
• Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR. A wrong value
will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is
greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor.
• Encoder is not being used, but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE =
1 (ENABLE).
2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor
characteristics. This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor
parameters are entered or changed. See parameter 9910 ID RUN for a
description of motor models.
2027 USER LOAD This alarm warns that the condition defined by parameter 3701 USER
CURVE LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by
3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
2028 START DELAY Shown during the Start delay. See parameter 2113 START DELAY.
Note 1. Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions (e.g. parameter
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 = 5 (ALARM) or 16 (FLT/ALARM)), this alarm is not indicated by a relay
output.
Alarm codes (Basic Control Panel)

The Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code, A5xxx. The
following table lists the alarm codes and descriptions.
Code Description
5001 Drive is not responding.
5002 The communication profile is incompatible with the drive.
5010 The panel’s parameter backup file is corrupted.
5011 Drive is controlled from another source.
5012 Rotation direction is locked.
5013 Button is disabled, because start is inhibited.
5014 Button is disabled, because drive is faulted.
5015 Button is disabled, because local mode lock is on.
5018 Parameter default value can’t be found.
5019 Writing a non-zero value is prohibited (can only write a zero value).
5020 Group or parameter does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent.
5021 Group or parameter is hidden.
5022 Group or parameter is write protected.
5023 Modification is not allowed while the drive is running.
Diagnostics
Code Description
5024 Drive is busy, try again.
5025 Write is not allowed while upload or download is in progress.
5026 Value is at or below low limit.
5027 Value is at or above high limit.
5028 Value is invalid – doesn't match any values in the discrete values list.
5029 Memory is not ready, try again.
5030 Request is invalid.
5031 Drive is not ready, e.g due to low DC voltage.
5032 Parameter error was detected.
5040 Selected parameter set can’t be found in the current parameter backup.
5041 Parameter backup doesn't fit into memory.
5042 Selected parameter set can’t be found in the current parameter backup.
5043 No start inhibit was granted.
5044 Parameter backup versions do not match.
5050 Parameter upload was aborted.
5051 File error was detected.
5052 Parameter upload attempt has failed.
5060 Parameter download was aborted.
5062 Parameter download attempt has failed.
5070 Panel backup memory write error was detected.
5071 Panel backup memory read error was detected.
5080 Operation is not allowed, because the drive is not in local mode.
5081 Operation is not allowed, because a fault is active.
5083 Operation is not allowed, because parameter lock is not open.
5084 Operation is not allowed, because drive is busy, try again.
5085 Download is not allowed, because drive types are incompatible.
5086 Download is not allowed, because drive models are incompatible.
5087 Download is not allowed, because parameter sets do not match.
5088 Operation failed, because a drive memory error was detected.
5089 Download failed, because a CRC error was detected.
5090 Download failed, because a data processing error was detected.
5091 Operation failed, because a parameter error was detected.
5092 Download failed, because parameter sets do not match.
Diagnostics
Maintenance
WARNING! Read chapter Safety instructions on page 5 before performing any

maintenance on the equipment. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or
death.
Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Maintenance Interval Instruction
Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness of the See Heatsink on page 271.
and cleaning environment (every 6…12
months)
Main cooling fan replacement Every six years See Main fan replacement on
page 272.
Internal enclosure cooling fan Every three years. See Internal enclosure fan
replacement replacement on 274.
(IP54 / UL type 12 drives)
Capacitor reforming Every year when stored See Reforming on page 275.
Capacitor replacement Every nine years See Replacement on page 275.
(frame sizes R5 and R6)
Replace battery in the Assistant Every ten years See Battery on page 275.
Control Panel
Consult your local ABB representative for more details on the maintenance. On the
Internet, go to www.abb.com/drives and select Service – Maintenance.
Heatsink
The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air. Since a dusty heatsink is less
efficient at cooling the drive, overtemperature faults become more likely. In a
“normal” environment (not dusty, not clean) check the heatsink annually, in a dusty
environment check more often.
Clean the heatsink as follows (when necessary):
1. Remove power from the drive.
2. Remove the cooling fan (see section Main fan replacement on page 272).
3. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top and simultaneously use a
vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust.
Note: If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning
in another room.
Maintenance
4. Reinstall the cooling fan.

5. Restore power.
Main fan replacement

Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the
gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning. If the drive is
operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these
symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not use
other than ABB specified spare parts.
Frame sizes R1…R4

To replace the fan: 3
4
2. Remove drive cover.
3. For frame size: 2
• R1, R2: Press together the retaining clips on the fan
cover sides, and lift.
• R3, R4: Press in on the lever located on the left side
of the fan mount, and rotate the fan up and out.
4. Disconnect the fan cable.
5. Reinstall the fan in reverse order. X0021
6. Restore power.
Frame size R5
To replace the fan: Bottom view
1. Remove power from drive.
3
2. Remove the screws attaching the fan. 2
3. Remove the fan: Swing the fan out on its hinges.

X5023
5. Reinstall the fan in reverse order.
6. Restore power.
Arrows in the fan show the directions of the rotation and air flow.
Maintenance
Frame size R6
To replace the fan:
2
2. Remove the screw attaching the fan casing
and let the casing lean down against the
limiters.
3. Slide out the cable connector and disconnect 3

it.
4. Take off the casing and replace the fan onto
the casing’s pins.
5. Reinstall the casing in reverse order.
6. Restore power.
Maintenance
Internal enclosure fan replacement

IP54 / UL type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the
enclosure.
Frame sizes R1…R4

4
To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to 3
R3 (located at the top of the drive) and R4 (located in front
5
of the drive):
R1…R3
2. Remove the front cover.
3. The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed
retaining clips at each corner. Press all four clips toward
the center to release the barbs.
FM
4. When the clips/barbs are free, pull the housing up to
remove from the drive. 5

R4
6. Install the fan in reverse order, noting that:
• The fan air flow is up (refer to the arrow on fan).
4
• The fan wire harness is toward the front.
• The notched housing barb is located in the right-rear
corner. 3
• The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the
top of the drive. 3AUA000000404
Frame sizes R5 and R6

To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6:
2. Remove the front cover.
3. Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable.
4. Install the fan in reverse order.
5. Restore power.
Maintenance
Capacitors
Reforming
The drive DC link capacitors need to be reformed (re-aged) if the drive has been
non-operational for more than one year. Without reforming, capacitors may be
damaged when the drive starts to operate. It is therefore recommended to reform the
capacitors once a year. See section Serial number on page 17 for how to check the
date of manufacture from the serial number shown on the drive labels.
For information on reforming the capacitors, refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming
in ACS50, ACS55, ACS150, ACS310, ACS350, ACS355, ACS550, ACH550 and
R1-R4 OINT-/SINTboards (3AFE68735190 [English]), available on the Internet (go
to www.abb.com and enter the code in the Search field).
Replacement
The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors. Capacitor life
can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature.
It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure. Capacitor failure is usually followed by
a input power fuse failure or a fault trip. Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected.
Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB. Do not use other
than ABB specified spare parts.
Control panel
Cleaning
Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could
scratch the display window.
Battery
A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function
available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during
power interruptions.
To remove the battery, use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the
control panel. Replace the battery with type CR2032.
Note: The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive function, except the
clock.
Maintenance
Maintenance
Technical data
Ratings
By type designation, the table below provides ratings for the ACS550 adjustable
speed AC drive, including:
• IEC ratings
• NEMA ratings (shaded columns)
• frame size.
Ratings, 208…240 V drives

Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 279.
Type Normal use Heavy-duty use
Frame
ACS550-x1- I2N PN PN I2hd Phd Phd
size
see below A kW hp A kW hp
Three-phase supply voltage, 208…240 V
-04A6-2 4.6 0.75 1 3.5 0.55 0.75 R1
-06A6-2 6.6 1.1 1.5 4.6 0.75 1 R1
-07A5-2 7.5 1.5 2 6.6 1.1 1.5 R1
-012A-2 11.8 2.2 3 7.5 1.5 2 R1
-017A-2 16.7 4 5 11.8 2.2 3 R1
-024A-2 24.2 5.5 7.5 16.7 4 5 R2
-031A-2 30.8 7.5 10 24.2 5.5 7.5 R2
-046A-2 46.2 11 15 30.8 7.5 10 R3
-059A-2 59.4 15 20 46.2 11 15 R3
-075A-2 74.8 18.5 25 59.4 15 20 R4
-088A-2 88.0 22 30 74.8 18.5 25 R4
-114A-2 114 30 40 88.0 22 30 R4
-143A-2 143 37 50 114 30 40 R6
-178A-2 178 45 60 150 37 50 R6
-221A-2 221 55 75 178 45 60 R6
-248A-2 248 75 100 192 55 75 R6
00467918.xls C
Technical data

Frame
ACS550-x1- I2N PN PN I2hd Phd Phd
size
-03A3-4 3.3 1.1 1.5 2.4 0.75 1 R1
-04A1-4 4.1 1.5 2 3.3 1.1 1.5 R1
-05A4-4 5.4 2.2 Note 1 4.1 1.5 Note 1 R1
-06A9-4 6.9 3 3 5.4 2.2 3 R1
-08A8-4 8.8 4 5 6.9 3 3 R1
-012A-4 11.9 5.5 7.5 8.8 4 5 R1
-015A-4 15.4 7.5 10 11.9 5.5 7.5 R2
-023A-4 23 11 15 15.4 7.5 10 R2
-031A-4 31 15 20 23 11 15 R3
-038A-4 38 18.5 25 31 15 20 R3
-045A-4 45 22 30 38 18.5 25 R3
-059A-4 59 30 40 44 22 30 R4
-072A-4 72 37 50 59 30 40 R4
-078A-4 77 Note 2 60 72 Note 2 50 R4
-087A-4 87 45 Note 1 72 37 Note 1 R4
-097A-4 97 Note 2 75 77 Note 2 60 R4
-125A-4 125 55 Note 1 87 45 Note 1 R5
-125A-4 125 Note 2 100 96 Note 2 75 R5
-157A-4 157 75 125 124 55 100 R6
-180A-4 180 90 150 156 75 125 R6
-195A-4 205 110 Note 1 162 90 Note 1 R6
-246A-4 246 132 200 192 110 150 R6
-290A-4 290 160 Note 1 246 132 200 R6
00467918.xls C
1. Not available in ACS550-U1 series.
Technical data

Frame
ACS550-U1- I2N PN PN I2hd Phd Phd
size
Three-phase supply voltage, 500…600 V (Note 1)
-02A7-6 2.7 1.5 2 2.4 1.1 1.5 R2
-03A9-6 3.9 2.2 3 2.7 1.5 2 R2
-06A1-6 6.1 4 5 3.9 2.2 3 R2
-09A0-6 9.0 5.5 7.5 6.1 4 5 R2
-011A-6 11 7.5 10 9.0 5.5 7.5 R2
-017A-6 17 11 15 11 7.5 10 R2
-022A-6 22 15 20 17 11 15 R3
-027A-6 27 18.5 25 22 15 20 R3
-032A-6 32 22 30 27 18.5 25 R4
-041A-6 41 30 40 32 22 30 R4
-052A-6 52 37 50 41 30 40 R4
-062A-6 62 45 60 52 37 50 R4
-077A-6 77 55 75 62 45 60 R6
-099A-6 99 75 100 77 55 75 R6
-125A-6 125 90 125 99 75 100 R6
-144A-6 144 110 150 125 90 125 R6
00467918.xls C
Symbols
Typical ratings:
Normal use (10% overload capability)
I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes.
PN typical motor power in normal use. The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC, 4-pole
motors. The horsepower ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA motors.
Heavy-duty use (50% overload capability)
I2hd continuous rms current. 50% overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes.
Phd typical motor power in heavy duty use. The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC, 4-pole
motors. The horsepower ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA motors.
Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage
range. To achieve the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the
drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current. Also note that:
• the ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F)
• the maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 · Phd. If the limit is
exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function
protects the input bridge of the drive against overload.
In multimotor systems, the output current of the drive must be equal to or greater
than the calculated sum of the input currents of all motors.
Technical data
Derating
The load capacity (current and power) decreases for certain situations, as defined
below. In such situations, where full motor power is required, oversize the drive so
that the derated value provides sufficient capacity.
For example, if your application requires 15.4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz
switching frequency, calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows:
The minimum size required = 15.4 A / 0.80 = 19.25 A
Where: 0.80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency (see section Switching frequency derating
on page 280).
Referring to I2N in the ratings tables (starting from page 277), the following drives
exceed the I2N requirement of 19.25 A: ACS550-x1-023A-4, or ACS550-x1-024A-2.
Temperature derating
In the temperature range +40 °C …50 °C (+104 °F…122 °F), the rated output current
is decreased 1% for every 1 °C (1.8 °F) above +40 °C (+104 °F). Calculate the
output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating
factor.
Example If the ambient temperature is 50 °C (+122 °F), the derating factor is
100% - 1%/°C · 10 °C = 90% or 0.90.
The output current is then 0.90 · I2N or 0.90 · I2hd.
Altitude derating
In altitudes 1000…4000 m (3300…13,200 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1% for
every 100 m (330 ft). If the installation site is higher than 2000 m (6600 ft) above sea
level, contact your local ABB representative for further information.
Single phase supply derating

For 208…240 V series drives, a single phase supply can be used. In that case, the
derating is 50%.
Switching frequency derating

When using the 8 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606),
• derate all rated currents and powers (including drive's overload currents) to 80%.
When using the 12 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606),
• derate all rated currents and powers (including drive's overload currents) to 65%
(to 50% for 600 V, R4 frame sizes, that is for ACS550-U1-032A-6 … ACS550-U1-
062A-6),
• derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 °C (86 °F).
• Note: The continuous maximum current is limited to I2hd.
Note: Setting parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL = 1 (ON) allows the drive to reduce
the switching frequency if/when the drive’s internal temperature exceeds 80 °C (with
12 kHz switching frequency) or 90 °C (with 8 kHz switching frequency). See the
parameter description for 2607 for details.
Technical data
Input power connections
WARNING! Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range.
Overvoltage can result in permanent damage to the drive.
Input power specifications

Input power (mains) connection specifications
208/220/230/240 V AC 3-phase (or 1-phase) -15%…+10% for
ACS550-x1-xxxx-2.
Voltage (U1) 380/400/415/440/460/480 V AC 3-phase -15%…+10% for ACS550-x1-
xxxx-4.
500/525/575/600 V AC 3-phase -15%…+10% for ACS550-U1-xxxx-6.
Prospective short- Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current in the supply is 100 kA
circuit current providing that the input power cable of the drive is protected with
(IEC 629) appropriate fuses. US: 100 000 AIC.
Frequency 48…63 Hz
Imbalance Max. ± 3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage
Fundamental power 0.98 (at nominal load)
factor (cos phi1)
Cable temperature 90 °C (194 °F) rating minimum
rating
Disconnecting device for isolation

Install a hand-operated input disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between
the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that
can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.
• Europe: To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard
EN 60204-1, Safety of Machinery, the disconnecting device must be one of the
following types:
– a switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3)
– a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching
devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the
disconnector (EN 60947-3)
– a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.
• Other regions: The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety
regulations.
Fuses
Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user and sized per national
and local electric codes. The following tables provide fuse recommendations for
short circuit protection on the drive’s input power.
The rated fuse currents given in the tables are the maximums for the
mentioned fuse types. If smaller fuse ratings are used, check that the fuse rms
current rating is larger than the input current.
Technical data
Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.5 seconds. The operating
time depends on the fuse type, the supply network impedance as well as the cross-
sectional area, material and length of the supply cable. In case the 0.5 seconds
operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses, ultra rapid (aR) fuses will in most
cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level.
Fuses, 208…240 V drives
ACS550-x1- Input current Input power (mains) fuses

see below A IEC 60269 gG (A) UL Class T (A) Bussmann type
-04A6-2 4.6 10 10 JJS-10
-06A6-2 6.6
-07A5-2 7.5
-012A-2 11.8 16 15 JJS-15
-017A-2 16.7 25 25 JJS-25
-024A-2 24.2 30 JJS-30
-031A-2 30.8 40 40 JJS-40
-046A-2 46.2 63 60 JJS-60
-059A-2 59.4 80 JJS-80
-075A-2 74.8 80 100 JJS-100
-088A-2 88.0 100 110 JJS-110
-114A-2 114 125 150 JJS-150
-143A-2 143 200 200 JJS-200
-178A-2 178 250 250 JJS-250
-221A-2 221 315 300 JJS-300
-248A-2 248 350 JJS-350
00467918.xls C

-03A3-4 3.3 10 10 JJS-10
-04A1-4 4.1
-05A4-4 5.4
-06A9-4 6.9
-08A8-4 8.8 15 JJS-15
-012A-4 11.9 16
-015A-4 15.4 20 JJS-20
-023A-4 23 25 30 JJS-30
-031A-4 31 35 40 JJS-40
-038A-4 38 50 50 JJS-50
-045A-4 45 60 JJS-60
-059A-4 59 63 80 JJS-80
-072A-4 72 80 90 JJS-90
-078A-4 77 100 JJS-100
Technical data

-087A-4 87 125 125 JJS-125
-097A-4 97
-125A-4 125 160 175 JJS-175
-157A-4 157 200 200 JJS-200
-180A-4 180 250 250 JJS-250
-195A-4 205
-246A-4 246 315 350 JJS-350
-290A-4 290
00467918.xls C
ACS550-U1- Input current Input power (mains) fuses

-02A7-6 2.7 10 10 JJS-10
-03A9-6 3.9
-06A1-6 6.1
-09A0-6 9.0 16 15 JJS-15
-011A-6 11
-017A-6 17 25 25 JJS-25
-022A-6 22
-027A-6 27 35 40 JJS-40
-032A-6 32
-041A-6 41 50 50 JJS-50
-052A-6 52 60 60 JJS-60
-062A-6 62 80 80 JJS-80
-077A-6 77 100 JJS-100
-099A-6 99 125 150 JJS-150
-125A-6 125 160 175 JJS-175
-144A-6 144 200 200 JJS-200
00467918.xls C
Emergency stop devices

The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any
other safety equipment that may be needed. Pressing STOP on the drive’s control
panel does NOT:
• generate an emergency stop of the motor
• separate the drive from dangerous potential.
Technical data
Input power cables/wiring

Input wiring can be any of:
• a four conductor cable (three phases and ground/protective earth). Shielding is
not required.
• four insulated conductors routed through conduit.
Size wiring according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the
drive’s load current.
Note: The conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal
size. Check the maximum wire size according to the table in section Drive’s power
connection terminals on page 286.
The table below lists copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents.
These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table.
IEC NEC
Based on: Based on:
• EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-2 • NEC Table 310-16 for copper wires
• PVC insulation • 90 °C (194 °F) wire insulation
• 30 °C (86 °F) ambient temperature • 40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature
• 70 °C (158 °F) surface temperature • not more than three current-carrying
• cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable, or earth
(directly buried)
• not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder
side by side. • copper cables with concentric copper shield.
Max. load Cu cable Max. load Al cable Max. load Cu wire size
current current current
A mm2 A mm2 A AWG/kcmil
14 3×1.5 22.8 14
20 3×2.5 27.3 12
27 3×4 36.4 10
34 3×6 50.1 8
47 3×10 68.3 6
62 3×16 61 3x25 86.5 4
79 3×25 75 3x35 100 3
98 3×35 91 3×50 118 2
119 3×50 117 3×70 137 1
153 3×70 143 3×95 155 1/0
186 3×95 165 3×120 178 2/0
215 3×120 191 3×150 205 3/0
249 3×150 218 3×185 237 4/0
284 3×185 257 3×240 264 250 MCM or 2 × 1
330 3×240 274 3× (3×50) 291 300 MCM or 2 × 1/0
285 2× (3×95) 319 350 MCM or 2 × 2/0
Technical data
Ground connections
For personnel safety, proper operation and reduction of electromagnetic emission/
pick-up, the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site.
• Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations.
• Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet
safety regulations.
• Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only
when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety
regulations.
• In multiple drive installations, do not connect drive terminals in series.
Corner-grounded TN systems
WARNING! Do not attempt to install or remove the EMC filter screws EM1, EM3, F1
or F2 while power is applied to the drive’s input terminals.
Corner-grounded TN systems are defined in the following table. In such systems,

disconnect the internal ground connection through the EMC filter capacitors (do this
also if the grounding configuration of the system is unknown), see section
Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27.
Corner-grounded TN systems – EMC filter must be disconnected

Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the L1
corner of the mid point of a
delta delta leg
L2 L2
L3 L3
Single phase, L1 Three phase L1
grounded at an “Variac” without L1
end point solidly grounded
neutral
L2
N L2
L3
L3
The EMC filter capacitors make an internal ground connection L1

that reduces electro-magnetic emission. Where EMC (electro-
magnetic compatibility) is a concern, and the system is
symmetrically grounded, the EMC filter may be connected.
For reference, the diagram on the right illustrates a
symmetrically grounded TN system (TN-S system). L2
L3
Technical data
IT systems
WARNING! Do not attempt to install or remove the EMC filter screws EM1, EM3, F1
or F2 while power is applied to the drive’s input terminals.
For IT systems (an ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded [over

30 ohm] power system):
• Disconnect the ground connection to the internal EMC filter, see section
Disconnecting the internal EMC filter on page 27.
• Where EMC requirements exist, check for excessive emission propagated to
neighboring low voltage networks. In some cases, the natural suppression in
transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, use a supply transformer with
static screening between the primary and secondary windings.
• Do NOT install an external RFI/EMC filter. Using an EMC filter grounds the input
power through the filter capacitors, which could be dangerous and could damage
the drive.
Drive’s power connection terminals

The following table provides specifications for the drive’s power connection
terminals.
Note: See the recommended cable sizes for different load currents in section Input
power cables/wiring on page 284.
U1, V1, W1
U2, V2, W2 Earthing PE terminal
Frame BRK+, UDC+ terminals
size
Minimum Maximum Tightening Maximum Tightening
wire size wire size torque wire size torque
mm 2 AWG mm2 AWG N·m lb·ft mm2 AWG N·m lb·ft
R1 0.75 18 10 8 1.4 1 10 8 1.4 1
R2 0.75 18 10 8 1.4 1 10 8 1.4 1
R3 2.5 14 25 3 2.5 1.8 16 6 1.8 1.3
R4 6 10 50 1/0 5.6 4 25 3 2 1.5
R5 6 10 70 2/0 15 11 70 2/0 15 11
R6 951 3/01 240 350 MCM 40 30 95 3/0 8 6
00467918.xls C
1 See section Power terminal considerations – R6 frame size on page 287.
Technical data
Power terminal considerations – R6 frame size
WARNING! For R6 power terminals, if screw-on terminal lugs are supplied, they can
only be used for wire sizes that are 95 mm2 (3/0 AWG) or larger. Smaller wires will
loosen and may damage the drive. They require crimp-on ring lugs as described
below.
Crimp-on ring lugs

On the R6 frame size, if screw-on terminal lugs are
supplied but the cable size used is less than 95 5
2
mm (3/0 AWG), or if no screw-on terminal lugs 3
are supplied at all, use crimp-on ring lugs 4
according to the following procedure.
1. Select appropriate ring lugs from the following
table.
2. Remove the screw-on terminal lugs, if supplied.
3. Attach the ring lugs to the drive end of the cables.
X60002
4. Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating
tape or shrink tubing.
5. Attach the ring lugs to the drive.
Wire size
Crimping No. of
kcmil/ Manufacturer Ring lug
mm 2 tool crimps
AWG
Burndy YAV6C-L2 MY29-3 1
16 6
Ilsco CCL-6-38 ILC-10 2
Burndy YA4C-L4BOX MY29-3 1
25 4
Ilsco CCL-4-38 MT-25 1
35 2 Ilsco CRC-2 IDT-12 1
Ilsco CRA-1-38 IDT-12 1
50 1
Thomas & Betts 54148 TBM-8 3
Burndy YA25-L4BOX MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRB-0 IDT-12 1
55 1/0
Ilsco CCL-1/0-38 MT-25 1
Technical data
Wire size
Crimping No. of
kcmil/ Manufacturer Ring lug
mm2 tool crimps
AWG
Burndy YAL26T38 MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRA-2/0 IDT-12 1
70 2/0
Burndy YAL27T38 MY29-3 2
95 3/0
Burndy YA28R4 MY29-3 2
95 3/0
Screw-on terminal lugs 2

1
Use the following procedure to attach cables
if screw-on terminal lugs are supplied and
the cable size is 95 mm2 (3/0 AWG) or
larger.
X60003
1. Attach the supplied screw-on lugs to the
drive end of the cables.
2. Attach screw-on lugs to the drive. X60001
Technical data
Motor connections
WARNING! Never connect line power to the drive output terminals: U2, V2 or W2.
Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive. If
frequent bypassing is required, use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors.
WARNING! Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of
the drive’s nominal input voltage.
WARNING! Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance (Hi-Pot)
test or insulation resistance (Megger) test on the motor or motor cables. Do not
conduct these tests on the drive.
Motor connection specifications

Motor connection specifications
Voltage (U 2) 0…U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Frequency 0…500 Hz
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See section Ratings on page 277.
Field weakening point 10…500 Hz
Selectable. See the availability in the table below.
1, 2, 4 and 8 kHz 12 kHz
208…240 V All types Frame sizes R1…R4 in scalar
control mode
Switching frequency 380…480 V All types Frame sizes R1…R4 (except
ACS550-01-097A-4) in scalar
control mode
500…600 V All types Frame sizes R2…R4 in scalar
control mode
Cable temperature rating 90 °C (194 °F) rating minimum.

Maximum motor cable See section Motor cable lengths on page 289.
length
Motor cable lengths

Maximum motor cable lengths for 400 V and 600 V drives are given in the sections
below.
In multimotor systems, the calculated sum of all motor cable lengths must not
exceed the maximum motor cable length given in the appropriate table below.
Technical data
Motor cable length for 400 V drives

The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 400 V drives with
different switching frequencies. Examples for using the table are also given.
Maximum cable length for 400 V drives
EMC limits Operational limits
Second environment First environment
(category C31) (category C21) Basic unit With
du/dt
1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 1/4 kHz 8/12 kHz filters
Frame
size m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft
R1 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 100 330 150 490
R2 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 30 98 200 660 100 330 250 820
R3 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 250 820
R4 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 300 980
R5 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 300 980 1502 4902 300 980
R6 100 330 100 330 3 3 100 330 100 330 3 3 300 980 1502 4902 300 980
1
See the new terms in section IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 Definitions on page 311.
2 12 kHz switching frequency is not available.
3 Not tested.
Sine filters further extend the cable lengths.
Under heading “Operational limits”, the “Basic unit” columns define the cable lengths
with which the basic drive unit works without problems within the drive specification,
without installing any further options. Column “With du/dt filters” defines the cable
lengths when an external du/dt filter is used.
The columns under heading “EMC limits” show the maximum cable lengths with
which the units have been tested for EMC emissions. The factory guarantees that
these cable lengths meet the EMC standard requirements.
If external sine filters are installed, longer cable lengths can be used. With sine filters
the limiting factors are the voltage drop of the cable, which has to be taken into
account in engineering, as well as the EMC limits (where applicable).
The default switching frequency is 4 kHz.
WARNING! Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause
permanent damage to the drive.
Examples for using the table:

Requirements Checking and conclusions
R1 frame size, Check operational limits for R1 and 8 kHz -> for a 150 m (490 ft)
8 kHz fsw, cable a du/dt filter is needed.
Category C2,
150 m (490 ft) cable Check EMC limits -> EMC requirements for Category C2 are met
with a 150 m (490 ft) cable.
Technical data
Requirements Checking and conclusions

R3 frame size, Check operational limits for R3 and 4 kHz -> a 300 m (980 ft) cable
4 kHz fsw, cannot be used even with a du/dt filter. A sine filter must be used and
Category C3, the voltage drop of the cable must be taken into account in the
300 m (980 ft) cable installation.
Check EMC limits -> EMC requirements for Category C3 are met
with a 300 m (980 ft) cable.
8 kHz fsw, cable the basic unit is sufficient.
Category C3,
150 m (490 ft) cable Check EMC limits -> EMC requirements for Category C3 cannot be
met with a 300 m (980 ft) cable. The installation configuration is not
possible. An EMC plan is recommended to overcome the situation.
4 kHz fsw, cable the basic unit is sufficient.
EMC limits not
applicable, EMC limits do not need to be checked as there are no EMC
150 m (490 ft) cable requirements.
Motor cable length for 600 V drives

The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 600 V drives with
different switching frequencies. As the 600 V drives are not CE approved, cable
lengths for EMC limits are not given.
Maximum cable length for 600 V drives
Operational limits
1/4 kHz 8/12 kHz
Frame
size m ft m ft
R2 100 330 100 330
R3…R4 200 660 100 330
R6 300 980 1502 4902

2
12 kHz switching frequency is not available.
WARNING! Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause
permanent damage to the drive.
Motor thermal protection

According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and
the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a
motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current
when necessary. Depending on a drive parameter value (see parameter 3501
SENSOR TYPE), the function either monitors a calculated temperature value (based on
a motor thermal model, see parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT … 3009 BREAK POINT
FREQ) or an actual temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors (see
Group 35: MOTOR TEMP MEAS). The user can tune the thermal model further by
feeding in additional motor and load data.
Technical data
The most common temperature sensors are:

• motor sizes IEC180…225: thermal switch (e.g. Klixon)
• motor sizes IEC200…250 and larger: PTC or PT100.
Ground fault protection

ACS550 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive, motor, or motor cable.
This fault logic:
• is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature
• can be disabled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT
• could be tripped by leakage currents (input power to ground) associated with long
high capacitance motor cables.
Grounding and routing
Motor cable shielding

Motor cables require shielding using conduit, armored cable or shielded cable.
• Conduit – When using conduit:
– Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of
the joint.
– Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure.
– Use a separate conduit run for motor cables (also separate input power and
control cables).
– Use a separate conduit run for each drive.
• Armored cable – When using armored cable:
– Use six-conductor (3 phases and 3 grounds), type MC continuous corrugated
aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds.
– Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables, but not
with control cables.
• Shielded cable – For shielded cable details, see section Motor cable
requirements for CE & C-Tick compliance on page 293.
Grounding
See section Ground connections on page 285.
For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be
minimized, see section Effective motor cable shields on page 294.
Drive’s motor connection terminals

The drive’s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications. See
section Drive’s power connection terminals on page 286.
Technical data
Motor cable requirements for CE & C-Tick compliance

The requirements in this section apply for CE or C-Tick compliance.
Minimum requirement (CE & C-Tick)

The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE
conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield, however, a symmetrical
constructed PE conductor is always recommended. The following figure shows the
minimum requirement for the motor cable shield (for example, MCMK, Draka NK
Cables).
Insulation jacket Copper wire shield Inner insulation
Cable core
Recommendation for conductor layout

The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables.
Recommended (CE & C-Tick) Allowed (CE & C-Tick)
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the
conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is < 50% of the
symmetrically constructed PE conductor, and a conductivity of the phase conductor.
shield
Shield
PE Shield
conductor
and shield PE
Shield
Not allowed for motor cables (CE & C-Tick)
A four-conductor system: three phase
conductors and a protective conductor, without a
shield.
Allowed for motor cables with phase
PE conductor cross section up to 10 mm2.
Technical data
Effective motor cable shields

The general rule for cable shield effectiveness is: the better and tighter the cable’s
shield, the lower the radiated emission level. The following figure shows an example
of an effective construction (for example Ölflex-Servo-FD 780 CP, Lappkabel or
MCCMK, NK Cables).
Insulation jacket Inner insulator L2
L1
Braided metallic shield L3
EN 61800-3 compliant motor cables

The most efficient EMC filtering can be achieved by following these rules:
• Motor cables must have an effective shield as described in section Effective
motor cable shields on page 294.
• Motor cable shield wires must be twisted together into a bundle (pig-tail) – the
bundle length must be less than five times its width – and connected to the
terminal marked (at the bottom right-hand corner of the drive).
• At the motor end, the motor cable shield must be earthed 360 degrees with an
EMC cable gland, or the shield wires must be twisted together into a bundle (pig-
tail) not longer than five times its width and connected to the PE terminal of the
motor.
• See section Motor cable length for 400 V drives, columns “EMC limits” on page
290 to check the maximum motor cable lengths and the need for filters for 400 V
drives for IEC/EN 61800-3 compliance.
WARNING! Do not use RFI/EMC filters on IT systems.
Technical data
Brake components
Availability
Braking availability for ACS550 drives, by frame size is:
• R1 and R2 – a built-in brake chopper is standard equipment. Add appropriate
resistor, as determined using the following section. Resistors are available from
ABB.
• R3…R6 – does not include an internal brake chopper. Connect a chopper and a
resistor, or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive. Contact your ABB
representative for appropriate parts.
Selecting the braking resistors (frame sizes R1 and R2)

Braking resistor must meet three requirements:
• Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value RMIN defined for the
drive type in the following tables. Never use resistance below this value.
• Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque.
To achieve the maximum braking torque (the larger of 150% of heavy duty or
110% of nominal duty), the resistance must not exceed RMAX. If maximum
braking torque is not necessary, resistor values can exceed RMAX.
• The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power.
This requirement involves many factors:
– the maximum continuous power rating for the resistor(s)
– the rate at which the resistor changes temperature (resistor thermal time
constant)
– maximum braking time ON – If the regeneration (braking) power is larger than
the resistor rated power, there is a limit to the ON time, or the resistor
overheats before the OFF period begins.
– minimum braking time OFF – If the regeneration (braking) power is larger than
the resistor rated power, the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to
cool between ON periods.
Braking ON
Time
Braking OFF
ON time OFF time
ON time
Cycle time Duty cycle =
Cycle time
– the peak braking power requirement

– type of braking (deceleration to zero vs. overhauling load) – During
deceleration to zero, the generated power steadily decreases, averaging half
of the peak power. For an overhauling load, the braking is countering an
external force (gravity for example) and the braking power is constant. The
total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated
from deceleration to zero speed (for the same peak torque and ON time).
Technical data
Power
Deceleration curve Overhauling load
Avg. braking power – curve
overhauling load
Avg. braking power
during deceleration Time
to zero
Temperature
2x
x
Time
The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using
the following tables.
• First, determine your maximum braking time ON (ONMAX), minimum braking time
OFF (OFFMIN) and load type (deceleration or overhauling load).
• Calculate duty cycle:
ON MAX
Duty cycle = · 100%
(ONMAX + OFFMIN)
• In the appropriate table, find the column that best matches your data:
– ONMAX < column specification and
– Duty cycle < column specification
• Find the row that matches your drive.
• The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected
row/column.
• For overhauling loads, double the rating in the selected row/column, or use the
“Continuous ON” column.
208…240 V drives
Resistance Resistor1 minimum continuous power rating
Deceleration-to-zero rating
Prcont
Type
Pr3 Pr10 Pr30 Pr60 Continuous ON
ACS550-
> 60 s ON
01/U1- RMAX RMIN < 3 s ON < 10 s ON < 30 s ON < 60 s ON
see below > 27 s OFF > 50 s OFF > 180 s OFF > 180 s OFF
< 10% Duty < 17% Duty < 14% Duty < 25% Duty > 25% Duty
ohm ohm W W W W W
-04A6-2 234 80 45 80 120 200 1100
-06A6-2 160 80 65 120 175 280 1500
-07A5-2 117 44 85 160 235 390 2200
-012A-2 80 44 125 235 345 570 3000
-017A-2 48 44 210 390 575 950 4000
-024A-2 32 30 315 590 860 1425 5500
-031A-2 23 22 430 800 1175 1940 7500
1 Resistor time constant specification must be > 85 seconds.
Technical data
380…480 V drives
Deceleration-to-zero rating Prcont
Type
ACS550-
< 3 s ON < 10 s ON < 30 s ON < 60 s ON > 60 s ON
01/U1- RMAX RMIN
ohm ohm W W W W W
-03A3-4 641 120 65 120 175 285 1100
-04A1-4 470 120 90 160 235 390 1500
-05A4-4 320 120 125 235 345 570 2200
-06A9-4 235 80 170 320 470 775 3000
-08A8-4 192 80 210 400 575 950 4000
-012A-4 128 80 315 590 860 1425 5500
-015A-4 94 63 425 800 1175 1950 7500
-023A-4 64 63 625 1175 1725 2850 11000
1
Resistor time constant specification must be > 85 seconds.
500…600 V drives
Deceleration-to-zero rating Prcont
Type
ACS550-
> 60 s ON
U1- RMAX RMIN < 3 s ON < 10 s ON < 30 s ON < 60 s ON
ohm ohm W W W W W
-02A7-6 548 80 93 175 257 425 1462
-03A9-6 373 80 137 257 377 624 2144
-06A1-6 224 80 228 429 629 1040 3573
-09A0-6 149 80 342 643 943 1560 5359
-011A-6 110 60 467 877 1286 2127 7308
-017A-6 75 60 685 1286 1886 3119 10718
1 Resistor time constant specification must be > 85 seconds.
WARNING! Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value
specified for the particular drive. The drive and the internal chopper are not able to
handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance.
Symbols
RMIN – Minimum allowed resistance of the braking resistor.
RMAX – Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary.
Technical data
Prx – Duty-cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking, where “x” is
ONMAX time.
Installing and wiring resistors

All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can
dissipate heat.
WARNING! The surface temperature of the resistor is very high, and air flowing from
the resistor is very hot. Materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable.
Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor.
To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable, use resistor cables with the
same rating as used for the power input to the drive.
The maximum length of the resistor cable(s) is 10 m (33 ft). See section Power
connection diagrams on page 25 for the resistor cable connection points.
Mandatory circuit protection

The following setup is essential for safety – it interrupts the main supply in fault
situations involving chopper shorts:
• Equip the drive with a main contactor.
• Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens (an
overheated resistor opens the contactor).
Below is a simple wiring diagram example.
L1 L2 L3 1
Off
Fuses 2
1 3 5 13 3
On
2 4 6 14 4
ACS550
U1 V1 W1
Thermal switch (standard in
Q
ABB resistors)
K1
Parameter set-up
To enable dynamic braking, switch off the drive’s overvoltage control [Set parameter
2005 = 0 (DISABLE)].
Technical data
Control connections
Control connection specifications

Control connection specifications
Analog inputs and See section Control terminals table on page 28.
outputs
Digital input impedance 1.5 kohm. Maximum voltage for digital inputs is
Digital inputs
30 V.
• Max. contact voltage: 30 V DC, 250 V AC
• Max. contact current / power: 6 A, 30 V DC; 1500 VA, 250 V AC
Relays • Max. continuous current: 2 A rms (cos  = 1), 1 A rms (cos  = 0.4)
(digital outputs) • Minimum load: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
• Contact material: Silver-nickel (AgN)
• Isolation between relay digital outputs, test voltage: 2.5 kV rms, 1 minute
Cable specifications See section Control terminals table on page 28.
Control cables
General recommendations
Use multi-core cables with a braided copper wire shield, temperature rated at 60 °C
(140 °F) or above:
Double shielded Single shielded

Example: JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example: NOMAK by Draka NK Cables
For digital and analog I/O cables, twist the shield together into a bundle (pig-tail) not
longer than five times its width and connect it to terminal X1-1 at the drive end.
Leave the other end of the cable shield unconnected.
For connecting the shield wires of the RS485 cable, see the instructions (and notes)
in section Mechanical and electrical installation – EFB on page 204.
Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable:
• Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables (at least
20 cm [8 in]).
• Where control cables must cross power cables, make sure they are at an angle
as near 90° as possible.
• Stay at least 20 cm (8 in) from the sides of the drive.
Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable:
• Do not mix relay-controlled signals using more than 30 V and other control
signals in the same cable.
• Run relay-controlled signals as twisted pairs (especially if voltage > 48 V). Relay-
controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital
input signals.
Technical data
Note: Never mix 24 V DC and 115/230 V AC signals in the same cable.
Analog cables
Recommendations for analog signal runs:
• Use double shielded, twisted pair cable.
• Use one individually shielded pair for each signal.
• Do not use a common return for different analog signals.
Digital cables
Recommendation for digital signal runs: A double shielded cable is the best
alternative, but single-shielded, twisted, multi-pair cable is also usable.
Control panel cable

If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable, use only Category 5 Patch
ethernet cable. The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m
(9.8 ft). Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and must be user-
tested to verify that EMC requirements are met. Where long runs are required
(especially for runs longer than about 12 m [40 ft]), use a RS232/RS485 converter at
each end and run RS485 cable.
Drive’s control connection terminals

The following table provides specifications for the drive’s control terminals
Control
Frame size 1
Maximum wire size Tightening torque
mm2 AWG N·m lb·ft
All 1.5 16 0.4 0.3
1 Values given for solid wires.
For stranded wires, the maximum size is 1 mm2.
Efficiency
Approximately 98% at nominal power level.
Technical data
Losses, cooling data and noise

Cooling specifications
Method Internal fan, flow direction from bottom to top.
Free space above and below the ACS550 drive: 200 mm (8 in).
Requirement Free space is not required on the drive’s sides – ACS550 drives can be mounted
side-by-side.
Air flow, 208…240 V drives

The following table lists the requirements for the cooling air flow data for 208…240 V
drives at full load in all ambient conditions listed in Ambient conditions on page 307.
Drive Heat dissipation Air flow Noise
ACS550-x1- Frame size W BTU/hr m3/h ft3/min dB
-04A6-2 R1 55 189 44 26 52
-06A6-2 R1 73 249 44 26 52
-07A5-2 R1 81 276 44 26 52
-012A-2 R1 118 404 44 26 52
-017A-2 R1 161 551 44 26 52
-024A-2 R2 227 776 88 52 66
-031A-2 R2 285 973 88 52 66
-046A-2 R3 420 1434 134 79 67
-059A-2 R3 536 1829 134 79 67
-075A-2 R4 671 2290 280 165 75
-088A-2 R4 786 2685 280 165 75
-114A-2 R4 1014 3463 280 165 75
-143A-2 R6 1268 4431 405 238 77
-178A-2 R6 1575 5379 405 238 77
-221A-2 R6 1952 6666 405 238 77
-248A-2 R6 2189 7474 405 238 77
00467918.xls C

-03A3-4 R1 40 137 44 26 52
-04A1-4 R1 52 178 44 26 52
-05A4-4 R1 73 249 44 26 52
-06A9-4 R1 97 331 44 26 52
-08A8-4 R1 127 434 44 26 52
-012A-4 R1 172 587 44 26 52
Technical data

-015A-4 R2 232 792 88 52 66
-023A-4 R2 337 1151 88 52 66
-031A-4 R3 457 1561 134 79 67
-038A-4 R3 562 1919 134 79 67
-045A-4 R3 667 2278 134 79 67
-059A-4 R4 907 3098 280 165 75
-072A-4 R4 1120 3825 280 165 75
-078A-4 R4 1295 4423 250 147 75
-087A-4 R4 1440 4918 280 165 75
-097A-4 R4 1440 4918 280 165 75
-125A-4 R5 1940 6625 350 205 75
-157A-4 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77
-180A-4 R6 2810 9597 405 238 77
-195A-4 R6 3050 10416 405 238 77
-246A-4 R6 3260 11134 405 238 77
-290A-4 R6 3850 13125 405 238 77
00467918.xls C

ACS550-U1- Frame size W BTU/hr m3/h ft3/min dB
-02A7-6 R2 52 178 88 52 66
-03A9-6 R2 73 249 88 52 66
-06A1-6 R2 127 434 88 52 66
-09A0-6 R2 172 587 88 52 66
-011A-6 R2 232 792 88 52 66
-017A-6 R2 337 1151 88 52 66
-022A-6 R3 457 1561 134 79 67
-027A-6 R3 562 1919 134 79 67
-032A-6 R4 667 2278 280 165 75
-041A-6 R4 907 3098 280 165 75
-052A-6 R4 1117 3815 280 165 75
-062A-6 R4 1357 4634 280 165 75
-077A-6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77
-099A-6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77
-125A-6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77
Technical data

ACS550-U1- Frame size W BTU/hr m3/h ft3/min dB
-144A-6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 77
00467918.xls C
Dimensions and weights

The dimensions and mass for the ACS550 depend on the frame size and enclosure
type. If unsure of the frame size, first, find the “Type” designation on the drive labels
(see sections The labels contain information on the Type designation (page 17),
Ratings and frame size (page 17), Serial number (page 17), degree of protection
(see also Degrees of protection on page 306) and valid markings (see also Markings
on page 309). on page 17 and Drive labels on page 16). Then look up that type
designation in the rating tables (see chapter Technical data, page 277), to determine
the frame size.
Mounting dimensions
W1
W2
See detail A
H1
a
c
See detail B b d
Detail A Detail B X0032
IP21 / UL type 1 and IP54 / UL type 12 – Dimensions for each frame size
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Ref.
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in
1
W1 98.0 3.9 98.0 3.9 160 6.3 160 6.3 238 9.4 263 10.4
W21 -- -- -- -- 98.0 3.9 98.0 3.9 -- -- -- --
H11 318 12.5 418 16.4 473 18.6 578 22.8 588 23.2 675 26.6
a 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 9.0 0.35
b 10.0 0.4 10.0 0.4 13.0 0.5 13.0 0.5 14.0 0.55 18.0 0.71
c 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 8.0 0.3 8.0 0.3 8.5 0.3 8.5 0.3
d 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 9.0 0.35
1
Center to center dimension.
Technical data
Outside dimensions
Drives with IP21 / UL type 1 enclosures

Types ACS550-x1-221A-2,
ACS550-x1-246A-4, ACS550-x1-248A-2,
and ACS550-01-290A-4, frame size R6
D W
W D W
H
H2
H H2
H
H3
H3
H3
X0031
IP21 / UL type 1 – dimensions for each frame size

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Ref.
W 125 4.9 125 4.9 203 8.0 203 8.0 265 10.4 302 11.9
H 330 13.0 430 16.9 490 19.3 596 23.5 602 23.7 700 27.6
H2 315 12.4 415 16.3 478 18.8 583 23.0 578 22.8 698 27.5
H3 369 14.5 469 18.5 583 23.0 689 27.1 736 29.0 8881 35.01
D 212 8.3 222 8.7 231 9.1 262 10.3 286 11.3 400 15.8
00467918.xls C
1. ACS550-x1-221A-2, ACS550-x1-246A-4, ACS550-x1-248A-2 and ACS550-x1-290A-4: 981 mm /
38.6 in.
Technical data
Drives with IP54 / UL type 12 enclosures

Type ACS550-01-290A-4, IP54
(UL type 12 not available), frame size R6
W2 W2
H3
H3
W D
W D
IP54 / UL type 12 – Dimensions for each frame size

Ref. R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R62
W 213 8.4 213 8.4 257 10.1 257 10.1 369 14.5 410 16.1
W2 222 8.8 222 8.8 267 10.5 267 10.5 369 14.5 410 16.1
H3 461 18.2 561 22.1 629 24.8 760 29.9 775 30.5 9241 36.41
D 234 9.2 245 9.7 254 10.0 284 11.2 309 12.2 423 16.7
00467918.xls C
1. ACS550-01-290A-4: 1119 mm / 44.1 in.
2. UL type 12 not available for ACS550-01-290A-4.
Technical data
Weight
The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size. Variations
within each frame size (due to components associated with voltage/current ratings
and options) are minor.
Weight
Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb kg lb
1
IP21 / UL type 1 6.5 14.3 9.0 19.8 16 35 24 53 34 75 69 1521
IP54 / UL type 12 8.0 17.6 11.0 24.3 17.0 37.5 26.0 57.3 42.0 93.0 86.02 1902
00467918.xls C
1. ACS550-x1-221A-2, IP21 / UL type 1:70 kg / 154 lb
ACS550-x1-246A-4, IP21 / UL type 1: 70 kg / 154 lb,
ACS550-x1-248A-2, IP21 / UL type 1,80 kg / 176 lb.
ACS550-01-290A-4, IP21 / UL type 1: 80 kg / 176 lb.
2. ACS550-x1-246A-4, IP54 / UL type 12: 80 kg / 176 lb
ACS550-01-290A-4, IP54: 90 kg / 198 lb (UL type 12 not available).
Degrees of protection
Available enclosures:
• IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure. The site must be free of airborne dust, corrosive
gases or liquids, and conductive contaminants such as condensation, carbon
dust and metallic particles.
• IP54 / UL type 12 enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from airborne
dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions.
Note: UL type 12 enclosure is not available for type ACS550-01-290A-4.
Compared to the IP21 / UL type 1 enclosure, the IP54 / UL type 12 enclosure has:
• the same internal plastic shell as the IP21 enclosure
• a different outer plastic cover
• an additional internal fan to improve cooling
• larger dimensions
• the same rating (does not require a derating).
Technical data
Ambient conditions
The following table lists the ACS550 environmental requirements.
Ambient environment requirements
Storage and transportation in the
Installation site
protective package
• 0…1000 m (0…3 300 ft)
Altitude • 1000…2000 m (3 300…6 600 ft) if
PN and I2N derated 1% every 100 m
above 1000 m (300 ft above 3 300 ft)
• Min. -15 °C (5 °F) – no frost allowed -40…70 °C (-40…158 °F)
• Max. (fsw = 1 or 4) 40 °C (104 °F);
50 °C (122 °F) if
PN and I2N derated to 90%
Ambient • Max. (fsw = 8) 40 °C (104 °F) if
temperature PN and I2N derated to 80%
• Max. (fsw = 12) 30 °C (86 °F) if
PN and I2N derated to 65% (to 50%
for 600 V, R4 frame sizes, that is for
ACS550-U1-032A-6 … ACS550-U1-
062A-6)
Relative 5…95%, no condensation allowed
humidity
• No conductive dust allowed. Storage
• The ACS550 should be installed in • No conductive dust allowed.
clean air according to enclosure • Chemical gases: Class 1C2
Contamination classification.
• Solid particles: Class 1S2
levels • Cooling air must be clean, free from
(IEC 60721-3-3) corrosive materials and free from Transportation
electrically conductive dust. • No conductive dust allowed.
• Chemical gases: Class 3C2 • Chemical gases: Class 2C2
• Solid particles: Class 3S2 • Solid particles: Class 2S2
The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACS550 passes.
Stress tests
Without shipping package Inside shipping package
Mechanical conditions: In accordance In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B
Sinusoidal with IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3M4 specifications.
vibration • 2…9 Hz 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
• 9…200 Hz 10 m/s2 (33 ft/s2)
Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68-2-29:
Shock
max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft/s2), 11ms
Not allowed • 76 cm (30 in), frame size R1
• 61cm (24 in), frame size R2
• 46 cm (18 in), frame size R3
Free fall
Technical data
Materials
Material specifications
• PC/ABS 2.5 mm, color NCS 1502-Y or NCS 7000-N
• Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5…2 mm, thickness of coating 20
micrometers. If the surface is painted, the total thickness of the coating (zinc
Drive enclosure and paint) is 80…100 micrometers.
• Cast aluminium AlSi
• Extruded aluminium AlSi
Corrugated board, expanded polystyrene, plywood, raw wood (heat dried).
Package Package wrap consists of one or more of the following: PE-LD plastic wrap, PP
or steel bands.
The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy
and natural resources. The package materials are environmentally compatible
and recyclable. All metal parts can be recycled. The plastic parts can either be
recycled or burned under controlled circumstances, according to local
regulations. Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks.
If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed
Disposal
circuit boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and, if the
drive is not provided with the RoHS marking, the printed circuit boards contain
lead, both of which are classified as hazardous waste within the EU. They must
be removed and handled according to local regulations.
For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling
instructions, contact your local ABB representative.
Technical data
Applicable standards
Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standard “marks”
on the type designation label. The following standards are applicable to the drive:
Mark Applicable standards
EN 50178:1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
IEC/EN 60204-1:2005 Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines.
Part 1: General requirements. Provisions for compliance: The
final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing:
• an emergency-stop device
• a supply disconnecting device.
IEC/EN 60529:1989 + Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
A1:1999 + A2:2013
IEC 60664-1:2002 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage
systems. Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests
IEC/EN 61800-5-1:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
Part 5-1: Safety requirements. Electrical, thermal and energy
IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
+A1:2012 Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods
IEC/EN 61000-3-12:2011 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
Part 3-12: Limits - Limits for harmonic currents produced by
equipment connected to public low-voltage systems with input
current > 16 A and = 75 A per phase
IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
+A1:2012 Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods
UL 508C UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, third

edition
C22.2 No. 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment (for ACS550-U1
drives only)
Markings
CE marking
A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the
European Low Voltage, EMC and RoHS Directives
Note: The 600 V ACS550-U1 drives are not CE approved.
Compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive

The compliance with the European Low Voltage Directive has been verified
according to standards IEC/EN 60204-1:2005 and EN 50178:1997.
Compliance with the European EMC Directive

The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard IEC/EN
61800-3:2004 +A1:2012 covers requirements stated for drives.
Technical data
Compliance with IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 +A1:2012

See page 311.
C-Tick marking
The drive carries C-Tick marking.
C-Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. A C-Tick mark is attached
to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard (IEC 61800-3:2004) –
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific test methods), mandated by the Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic
Compatibility Scheme.
The Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme (EMCS) was introduced
by the Australian Communication Authority (ACA) and the Radio Spectrum
Management Group (RSM) of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development
(NZMED) in November 2001. The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio
frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical/
electronic products.
Compliance with IEC/EN 61800-3:004

See page 311.
UL/CSA markings
An UL mark is attached to ACS550 drives to verify that the drive follows the
provisions of UL 508C.
A CSA mark is attached to ACS550-U1 type drives to verify that the drive follows the
provisions of C22.2 NO. 14.
The ACS550 is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than
100 kA RMS symmetrical amperes, 600 V maximum. The ampere rating is based on
tests done according to UL 508.
Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with local codes.
The ACS550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the
requirements of UL 508C and, for ACS550-U1, C22.2 No. 14. When this feature is
selected and properly adjusted, additional overload protection is not required unless
more than one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is
required by applicable safety regulations. See parameters 3005 (MOT THERM PROT)
and 3006 (MOT THERM RATE).
The drives are to be used in a controlled environment. See section Ambient
conditions on page 307 for specific limits.
Note: For open type enclosures, i.e. drives without the conduit box and/or cover for
IP21 / UL type 1 drives, or without the conduit plate and/or hood for IP54 /
UL type 12 drives, the drive must be mounted inside an enclosure in accordance
with National Electric Code and local electrical codes.
Brake choppers, when applied with appropriately sized brake resistors, will allow the
drive to dissipate regenerative energy (normally associated with quickly decelerating
a motor). Frame sizes R1 and R2 have a built-in brake chopper as standard
Technical data
Marking with the Single mark of product circulation on the market of the Customs Union member
states
equipment. For frame sizes R3…R6, contact your local ABB representative for
appropriate parts. See section Brake components on page 295.
EAC marking
The drive has EAC certification. EAC marking is required in Russia, Belarus and
Kazakhstan.
IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 Definitions

EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic
equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment.
Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or
system within its locality.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly
supplying domestic premises.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be
installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first
environment.
Note: A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing
and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects.
Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment
restricted distribution. EMC standard IEC/EN 61800-3 does not any more restrict the
distribution of the drive, but the using, installation and commissioning are defined.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V, intended for use in the
second environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second
environment unrestricted distribution.
Compliance with the IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 +A1:2012

The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC/
EN 61800-3, category C2 (see page 311 for IEC/EN 61800-3 definitions). The
emission limits of IEC/EN 61800-3 comply with the provisions described below.
First environment (drives of category C2)

1. The internal EMC filter is connected.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual.
4. The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in
section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 290 for the frame size and
switching frequency in use.
Technical data
WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in

which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.
Second environment (drives of category C3)

1. The internal EMC filter is connected.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual.
4. The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in
section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 290 for the frame size and
switching frequency in use.
WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public
network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is
expected if the drive is used on such a network.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT
(ungrounded) systems. The supply network becomes connected to ground potential
through the EMC filter capacitors, which may cause danger or damage the drive.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected to a
corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive.
Technical data
Index
Numerics ambient temperature

derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
0xxxx register environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
shipping limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
amplitude logging
1xxxx register
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 see load analyzer
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 analog cable, requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
2-wire sensor/transmitter, connection example . . 86 analog I/O
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3-wire sensor/transmitter, connection example . . 86 analog input
3xxxx register parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 fault limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
4xxxx register filter, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 less than min. auto. reset, parameter . . . . . . 152
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 less than min., fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 148
loss, fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
A maximum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
ABB minimum, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
document library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 analog output
feedback on ABB manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . 325 content max., parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 content min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
standard (default) macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 current max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
acceleration current min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
/deceleration, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . 139 data content, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
at aux. stop (PFC), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 200 data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
compensation, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 filter, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
ramp select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 obtain 0...10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ramp shape, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 analyzer, load
ramp time (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 see load analyzer
ramp zero select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 angle
time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 mechanical, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
activate (external PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 178 application block output, data parameter . . . . . . 108
actual input (PID), parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 application macro, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
actual max. (PID), parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 application macros
actual min. (PID), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 see macros
actual values arrow (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
mapping, FBA, generic profile. . . . . . . . . . . 257 assistant (Assistant Control Panel)
scaling, EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
scaling, FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
scaling, FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . 255 Assistant Control Panel
scaling, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 see control panel (Assistant)
alarm assistants mode (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . 57
codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 autochange
codes (Basic Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 interval, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
display enable, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 level, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 starting order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 automatic reset
altitude see reset, automatic
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 auxiliary motor
environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 see motor, auxiliary
shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
ambient conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Index
B contamination levels
environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
backing up parameters
shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 contrast, control panel (Assistant) . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Basic Control Panel control
see control panel (Basic) connection specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
location, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
battery (Assistant Control Panel). . . . . . . . . . . . 275
terminal specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
baud rate (RS-232), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 through I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
braking control board
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 overtemperature, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
protection from overheated resistor . . . . . . 298 overtemperature, fault parameter. . . . . . . . . 151
resistor heat dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 temperature, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
selecting brake choppers/resistors . . . . . . . 295
control cable
wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
break point frequency, fault parameter . . . . . . . 149 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
buffer overruns (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 183 control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
cable requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
C comm error, fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
cable requirements display bar-graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 157
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 display decimal point (form), parameters . . . 156
grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 display max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 display min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 display process variables, parameter group 156
capacitor display selection, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 156
reforming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 display units, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
category (IEC/EN 61800-3 definition) manual compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 parameter lock, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 pass code, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
CB reference control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
see control board signal max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
signal min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
control panel (Assistant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
changed parameters (Assistant Control Panel). . 60 arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
chopper assistants mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
see braking battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
clock changed parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
see time and date setting (Assistant Control direction of rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 53
Panel) display contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CO2 conversion factor fault logger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
see energy saving fault mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 259, 260
communication help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
see EFB (embedded fieldbus) how to do common tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
see EFB, drive parameters I/O settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
see FBA (fieldbus adapter) main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
see FBA, drive parameters operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
conduit kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
config file parameter backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
CPI firmware revision, parameter . . . . . . . . 182 parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
id revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 status line (LOC/REM, arrow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
connections time and date mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
FBA module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
constant speed
see speed, constant
construction code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Index
control panel (Basic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 deceleration

alarm codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
copy mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 at aux. start (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 200
direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70 emergency time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
fault mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 259, 260 ramp select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
how to do common tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ramp shape, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ramp time (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ramp zero select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 default values
parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 listing for macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
reference mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 listing for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 derating
control word adjustment example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
ABB drives, FBA, description . . . . . . . . . . . 248 altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
EFB, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 single phase supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
FBA generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
cooling derivation time (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
air flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 derivation time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
fan maintenance triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 device overtemperature, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . 261
heat dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
space requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
copy mode (Basic Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
corner grounded TN system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 digital cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
warning about filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 digital input
warning about screws at EM1, EM3 . . . . . . . 25 at fault, history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
warning about screws at F1, F2 . . . . . . . . . . 26 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
correction source (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 179 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
cover status, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 digital output
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
cover, top, see hood specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
CRC errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 dimensions
crimp-on ring lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 drive, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
critical speeds (avoiding) drive, outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 DIP switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 28
high, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 direction control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
low, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 direction of rotation
select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 53
C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70
current display format (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 document library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
max. limit, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
download parameter sets
measurement, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
rating code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
full set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
user sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
D drive
date EFB comm installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
see time and date setting (Assistant Control FBA module installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Panel) id, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
DC mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
brake time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
bus voltage, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 outside dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
current ref., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 rating, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
magnetizing time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 136 temperature, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
overvoltage, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
undervoltage, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 drive on time, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
voltage stabilizer, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
E
EAC marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Index
earth fault efficiency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

detection level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ELV (Extra Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 EM1 and EM3 screws
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
earthing on corner grounded TN system . . . . . . . . . . . 27
see ground on IT systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
EFB (embedded fieldbus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 on symmetrically grounded TN systems . . . . 27
actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 285, 286
actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 embedded fieldbus
analog output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . 209 see EFB
comm fault response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 see EFB, drive parameters
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 EMC
configure for loss of communication . . . . . . 213 CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
control word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 motor cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 EMC filter, external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
drive control of functions, activate. . . . . . . . 207 EMC filter, internal . . . . . . . . 27, 285, 286, 311, 312
exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
emergency
fault code 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
deceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
fault code 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
fault code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 stop devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
stop select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
fault code 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
fault tracing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 enclosure
fault, duplicate stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 protection class code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
fault, intermittent off-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
fault, no master station on line . . . . . . . . . . 213 encoder
fault, swapped wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
feedback from drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
input reference sel., activate . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 error, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
misc. drive control, activate. . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 number of pulses, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
modbus actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 position reset enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . 181
PID control setpoint source, activate . . . . . 210 zero pulse detected, data parameter . . . . . . 110
planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 zero pulse enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 181
profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 energy saving
reference scaling, ABB drives profile . . . . . 233 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
reference scaling, DCU profile . . . . . . . . . . 233 CO2 conversion factor, parameter . . . . . . . . 180
relay output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 energy price, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 energy reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
start/stop/direction control, activate . . . . . . 207 pump power, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
state diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 saved amount 1, data parameter . . . . . . . . . 111
status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 saved amount 2, data parameter . . . . . . . . . 111
termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 saved CO2, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
EFB, drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 saved kWh, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
protocol, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 saved MWh, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
baud rate, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 error value inversion (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . 171
command words, data parameters . . . . . . . 112 exception codes, EFB modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
config file, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 external comm module, parameter group
control profile, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 see FBA, drive parameters
CRC errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 184 external commands selection, parameter. . . . . . 115
fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 external control selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . 117
fault function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 external fault
fault time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
ok messages (count), parameter . . . . . . . . 184 fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 185 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
parity, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 external reference, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . 108
protocol id, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
protocol select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
relay output word, data parameter . . . . . . . 109
station id, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
status words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . 112
status, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
UART errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . 184
values, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Index
F FBA, drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

ext comm module parameter group . . . . . . . 182
F1 and F2 screws
command words, data parameters . . . . . . . . 112
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
config file CPI firmware revision, parameter. 182
on corner grounded TN system. . . . . . . . . . . 27 config file id revision, parameter. . . . . . . . . . 182
on IT systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
config file revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 182
on symmetrically grounded TN systems . . . . 27
fault function, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 285, 286 fault time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
fan fieldbus appl. program revision, parameter . 182
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 fieldbus CPI firmware revision, parameter . . 182
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 274 fieldbus parameter refresh, parameter . . . . . 182
fault fieldbus parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
functions, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 fieldbus status, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
history, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 fieldbus type, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 protocol select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
comm failure (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 relay output word, data parameter . . . . . . . . 109
current at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 status words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 112
digital input status at, history parameter . . . 114 values, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 feedback
frequency at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . 114 multiplier (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 on ABB manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
last, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 select (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
field weakening point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
logging (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . 61
mode (Assistant Control Panel) . . 49, 259, 260 fieldbus
mode (Basic Control Panel) . . . . . 69, 259, 260 see EFB (embedded fieldbus)
previous, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 see EFB, drive parameters
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 265 see FBA (fieldbus adapter)
reset select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 see FBA, drive parameters
speed at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 fieldbus adapter
status at, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 see FBA
time of, history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 see FBA, drive parameters
torque at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 fieldbus, embedded
voltage at, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 114 see EFB
words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 see EFB, drive parameters
fault display firmware
alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 panel, version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 51
fault names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 version, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 155
FB actual signals, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . 112 first environment
FBA (C2), compliance with IEC/EN 61800-3 . . . . 311
protocol listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 (C2), motor cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
FBA (fieldbus adapter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 flange mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
analog output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . 243 FlashDrop
comm fault response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 application macro, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
control word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 parameter view, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
control word, ABB drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 floating network
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 see IT system
drive feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 flux braking, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
fieldbus control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 flux optimization, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
input reference sel., activate . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 force trip, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 frame errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
PID control setpoint source, activate. . . . . . 244 frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 free fall, stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
relay output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 frequency
set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 at fault, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
start/stop /direction control, activate . . . . . . 241 max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
state diagram, ABB drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 min. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 motor, resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
status word, ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 motor, specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
switching, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Index
fuses insulation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

208…240 V drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 integration time (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
380…480 V drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 integration time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
500…600 V drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 interlocks, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
internal setpoint (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 173
G Internet, information on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
gain (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 IR compensation
generic profile, FBA frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
actual value mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 voltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 isolation, between AC power source and drive . 281
reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 IT system
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
gland kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 warning about filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6, 294
ground warning about screws at EM1, EM3. . . . . . . . 25
cable/wire requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 warning about screws at F1, F2 . . . . . . . . . . . 26
fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
J
H jogging activation, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
hand-auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
heat dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 K
hood (IP54 / UL type 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 36 keypad
how to do common tasks see control panel
with Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 keypad reference select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 117
with Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 kWh
counter, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
I
I/O settings (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . 67 L
I/O, control through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 label
id run serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
fail, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 type designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 language, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
performing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 LED
identification magnetization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 on Assistant Control Panel. . . . . . . 48, 259, 260
IEC ratings on drive body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 259, 260
see ratings library, document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
impedance grounded network limits, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
see IT system load analyzer
incompatible software, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . 264 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
information on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 amplitude logger 1, distribution . . . . . . . . . . 187
information, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 amplitude logger 2 signal base value, par.. . 186
input power amplitude logger 2 signal, parameter. . . . . . 186
cable/wire requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 amplitude logger 2, distribution . . . . . . . . . . 187
disconnecting device (disconnecting means) 281 loggers reset date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 loggers reset time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
input power connection loggers reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
IT system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 peak value logger filter time, parameter . . . . 186
lugs for R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 peak value logger signal, parameter . . . . . . 186
terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 peak value logger, current at peak value . . . 187
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 peak value logger, detected peak value. . . . 186
installation peak value logger, frequency at peak value. 187
check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 peak value logger, peak value date . . . . . . . 186
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 peak value logger, peak value time . . . . . . . 186
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 peak value logger, voltage at peak value . . . 187
flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 load curve, see user load curve
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 load frequency, see user load curve
mounting drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 load torque, see user load curve
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 loading package version, parameter . . . . . . . . . 155
procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 LOC (local control)
tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 indication on Assistant Control Panel. . . . . . . 49
wiring overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 indication on Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . 68
Index
local control mode lock, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 130 modbus

lock EFB addressing, convention . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
control panel access, IP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 EFB coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
drive control at local control panel. . . . . . . . 130 EFB discrete inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 EFB holding registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
loggers EFB input registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
see load analyzer EFB mapping details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
low frequency (PFC), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 191 EFB mapping summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
lugs EFB supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
for R6 power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 EFB technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ring, crimp-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 motor
terminal, screw-on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 checking insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
M id run, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
load curve break point frequency . . . . . . . . . 149
macros load curve max., fault parameter . . . . . . . . . 149
3-wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 load curve zero speed load . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
ABB standard (default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 maintenance triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
alternate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 nominal current, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
hand-auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 nominal frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 107
motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 nominal power, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
PFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 nominal speed, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 nominal voltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 phase, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
user parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
parameter default values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 stall, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
parameters not changed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 thermal protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
magnetization, identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 motor cable
main menu checking insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Assistant Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Basic Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 max. length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
mains requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
see input power requirements, EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
maintenance motor connection
capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 lugs for R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
internal enclosure fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 motor control
intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
main fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 control mode, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
triggers, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 IR compensation, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 145
manuals motor potentiometer macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
list of ACS550 manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 motor temperature
providing feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 measure, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
mapping alarm limit, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
actual value, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . 257 data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
EFB modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 fault limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 overtemperature, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
maximum sensor selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 sensor type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
torque limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 thermal protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
torque select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 thermal protection, fault parameter . . . . . . . 148
mechanical thermal stress, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . 111
angle, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 thermal time, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
revolutions, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 motor, auxiliary
minimum aux start order, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 aux. start delay (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . 191
torque limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 aux. stop delay (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . 191
torque select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 number of aux., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
motors
several . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 289
Index
mounting parameter
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 analog input scale, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . 264
flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 analog output scale, fault code . . . . . . . . . . 264
template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 change lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
multimotor systems . . . . . . . . . . 136, 146, 279, 289 descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
MWh external relay output, fault code . . . . . . . . . . 265
counter, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 fieldbus, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
power consumption, maintenance trigger . . 147 hz rpm, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
listing (ranges, resolutions, defaults) . . . . . . . 91
N PCU 1 (power control unit), fault code . . . . . 265
PCU 2 (power control unit), fault code . . . . . 265
NEMA ratings PFC IO, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
see ratings PFC mode, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 PFC ref. neg., fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
random sw. freq. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 save changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
NPN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 table version, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
user load curve, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
O view, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
offset (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 parameter mode
ok messages (count), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
operating data, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . 108
parameter restore
operation
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
parity
OPEX link, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
(RS-232), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
OPEX power, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 PE earth
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 earth fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PE earth connection
output terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
frequency, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
voltage, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
peak value logging
wiring, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
see load analyzer
output mode
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . 29
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 PFC
control, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
overcurrent
acceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 aux start order, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
aux. motor start delay, parameter . . . . . . . . 191
overload curve aux. motor stop delay, parameter . . . . . . . . 191
see user load curve deceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
overmodulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
overspeed, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 low frequency, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
overvoltage macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
control enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 number of aux. motors, parameter . . . . . . . . 192
number of motors parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
P reference step, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
panel communication, parameter group . . . . . . 183 start delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
start frequency, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
panel display variables, parameter group . . . . . 156
panel firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 51
panel loss, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Index
PID protection
process sets, parameter groups . . . . . . . . . 169 circuit, required w/ chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
external / trimming, parameter group . . . . . 178 disconnecting device (disconnecting means) 281
0% (actual signal), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 172 enclosure standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
100% (actual signal), parameter . . . . . . . . . 172 environmental. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
actual input select, parameters . . . . . . . . . . 174 motor thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
actual value max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . 174 PT100 temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
actual value min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 174 PTC temperature sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 pump power
comm value 1, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . 111 see energy saving
comm value 2, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . 111
control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 R
correction source, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 179
decimal point (actual signal), parameter . . . 171 radiation limits, conducted
derivation filter, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 EN 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
derivation time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 ramp pair (accel/decel), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 139
deviation, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 range listing for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
error feedback inversion, parameter . . . . . . 171 ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
external source activate, parameter . . . . . . 178 reference
feedback multiplier, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 173 select, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
feedback select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 corrections for parameter values . . . . . . . . . 118
feedback, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 keypad control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
gain, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 maximum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
integration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 minimum, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
internal setpoint, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 mode (Basic Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
offset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 select source, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
output, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 step (PFC), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
parameter set select, parameter . . . . . . . . . 176 reference scaling
scaling (0…100%), parameters. . . . . . . . . . 172 EFB, ABB Drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
setpoint maximum, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 173 EFB, DCU profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
setpoint minimum, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 173 FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
setpoint select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
setpoint source, EFB comm activate. . . . . . 210 reference setting
setpoint source, FBA comm, activate . . . . . 244 Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
setpoint, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
sleep delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
regulator by-pass control, parameter . . . . . . . . . 199
sleep level, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
sleep selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 relative humidity
trim mode, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
trim scale, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 shipping limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
units (actual signal), parameter. . . . . . . . . . 171 relay output
wake-up delay, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
wake-up deviation, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 175 activation condition parameters . . . . . . . . . . 124
PID controller off-delay, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
advanced set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 on-delay, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
basic set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 status, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
planning relays, specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 REM (remote control)
FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 indication on Assistant Control Panel. . . . . . . 49
PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 indication on Basic Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . 68
power remove cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
consumption (MWh) maintenance trigger . . 147 reset, automatic
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
previous faults, history parameters . . . . . . . . . . 114 analog input less than min., parameter . . . . 152
delay time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
process PID sets, parameter groups . . . . . . . . . 169
external fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
process variables, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . 110 number of trials, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
product overcurrent, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
inquiries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 trial time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 undervoltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
profiles, EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 resolution listing for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
proportional gain, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 resonance (avoiding)
select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
revolution counter, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Index
revolutions, mechanical, data parameter . . . . . 110 specifications

ring lugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
RS-232 input power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
baud rate, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
parity, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 speed
station id, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 and direction (signed), data parameter . . . . 108
RS-232 counts at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
buffer overruns, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
CRC errors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
frame errors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 min. limit, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ok messages, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 speed control
parity errors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
RS485 comm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 acceleration compensation, parameter . . . . 142
run enable source select, parameter. . . . . . . . . 129 automatic tuning, parameter . . . . . . . . 141, 142
run time derivation time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 110 integration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
maintenance trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 proportional gain, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
vector:speed mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
S speed, constant
parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 digital input selection parameter . . . . . . . . . 120
save changes parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
saving, energy stall
see energy saving frequency, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
scalar:frequency mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 function, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
scaling region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
actual value, FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . 255 time, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
actual value, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . 257 standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
actual values, EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 C22.2 No. 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
reference, EFB, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . 233 CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
reference, EFB, DCU profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 CSA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
reference, FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . 252 C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
reference, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . . . 256 EN 50178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
screw-on terminal lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 IEC 60664-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
s-curve ramp, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 IEC/EN 60204-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
second environment IEC/EN 60529 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
(C3), compliance with IEC/EN 61800-3 . . . 312 IEC/EN 61000-3-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
(C3), motor cable length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 IEC/EN 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 IEC/EN 61800-5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
sensor type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 UL 508C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
UL marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
sensorless vector control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
start
serial 1 error (fault code 28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
serial 1 error, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 aux. motor (PFC), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 190
serial communication aux. motor delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
see EFB (embedded fieldbus) control, EFB comm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
see EFB, drive parameters control, FBA comm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
see FBA (fieldbus adapter) DC magnetizing time, parameter . . . . . . . . . 136
see FBA, drive parameters delay (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17 delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 frequency (PFC), parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 190
setpoint maximum (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . 173 function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
setpoint minimum (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . 173 inhibit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
setpoint select (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 select enable source, parameter . . . . . . . . . 131
shock, stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 torque boost current, parameter. . . . . . . . . . 137
short circuit, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 start mode
single phase supply automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 automatic torque boost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 DC magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
flying start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
sleep selection (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 174
start/stop
slip compensation ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 146
parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
soft keys (Assistant Control Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . 48 with Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
with Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Index
start/stop/dir, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 timed functions

starting order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
start-up autochange, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 57 booster, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
data, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
guided, Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . 42 source, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
limited, Assistant or Basic Control Panel . . . 37 speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
state diagram start time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
comm (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 stop time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
comm, ABB drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 timed mode, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
station id (RS-232), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 TN-S system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
status at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
status word top cover, see hood
ABB drives, FBA, description . . . . . . . . . . . 249 torque
EFB comm, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 at fault, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 boost current, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
FBA generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
stop max. limit select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
aux. motor (PFC), parameters . . . . . . . . . . 191 min. limit select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
aux. motor delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 min. limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
DC brake time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 ramp down, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
DC current control, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 136 ramp up, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
DC current ref., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 torque control
emergency devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
emergency select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 137 macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
flux braking, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ramp down, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ramp up, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
stress tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 vector:torque mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
supervision training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 trim
parameter low limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . 153 mode (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
parameter selection, parameters . . . . . . . . 153 scale (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
supply cable two-wire sensor/transmitter, connection example. 86
checking insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 type code
supply phase, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 see type designation
switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 type designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 U
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 U/f ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
symmetrically grounded network UL/CSA markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
see corner grounded TN system
underload curve
symmetrically grounded TN system . . . . . . . . . 285 see user load curve
system controls, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . 129 undervoltage
automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
T control enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ungrounded network
template, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 see IT system
terminal lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 units (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
terminals unknown drive type, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
control, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 unpacking drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
control, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 unsymmetrically grounded networks
location diagram, R1…R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 see corner grounded TN system
location diagram, R5/R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 user load curve
termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
test date, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
thermal fail, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 frequency, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 167
three-wire sensor/transmitter, connection example 86 function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
time and date setting (Assistant Control Panel) . 62 mode, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
torque, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 167
Index
user parameter set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

change control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
V
vector:
speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
torque mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
version
firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
firmware, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 155
loading package, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
panel firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 51
parameter table, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
vibration, stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
voltage
at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
rating code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
voltage/frequency ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 145
W
wake-up
delay (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
deviation (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
warning
automatic start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
dangerous voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 6
disconnecting device (disconnecting means) . 7
ELV (Extra Low Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
EM1, EM3, F1 and F2 screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
filter on corner grounded TN system. . . . . . . . 6
filter on IT system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
high temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
not field repairable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 6
parallel control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
qualified installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
wiring
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
fault, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
installation steps, IP21/cables . . . . . . . . . . . 30
installation steps, IP21/conduit . . . . . . . . . . . 32
installation steps, IP54/cables . . . . . . . . . . . 33
installation steps, IP54/conduit . . . . . . . . . . . 34
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
requirements, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
XYZ
zero pulse
detected, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
enable, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
zero speed
delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
load, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Index
Further information
Product and service inquiries

Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the type
designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales, support and service
contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/searchchannels.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select Training
courses.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives and select Document
Library – Manuals feedback form (LV AC drives).
Document library on the Internet

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. Go to
www.abb.com/drives and select Document Library. You can browse the library or enter selection
criteria, for example a document code, in the search field.
Contact us
www.abb.com/drives
www.abb.com/drivespartners
3AFE64804588 (3AUA0000001418) Rev H / EN

EFFECTIVE: 2014-07-04
SUPERSEDES: 3AFE64804588 (3AUA0000001418) Rev G 2009-07-07

VFD Abb

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VFD Abb

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VFD Abb

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ACS550

MFDT-01 FlashDrop User's Manual

3AFE64804588 (3AUA0000001418) Rev H

 2014 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.

Use of warnings and notes

• Use safety shoes to avoid foot injury.

WARNING! The ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a

WARNING! Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected. After

WARNING! Do not attempt to install or remove EM1, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while

WARNING! The ACS550-01/U1 is not field repairable. Never attempt to repair a

Control of the drive and motor

List of related manuals

Contents of this manual

Start-up, control with I/O and ID Run

Macro default values for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Contents of this manual

Contents of this manual

Contents of this manual

Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding. Failure to observe

WARNING! Before you begin read chapter Safety instructions on page 5.

Installation flow chart

PREPARE the mounting location Prepare the mounting location on page 20

REMOVE the front cover Remove the front cover on page 21

MOUNT the drive Mount the drive on page 22

INSTALL wiring Wiring overview on page 23 and

CHECK installation Check installation on page 35

REINSTALL the cover Reinstall the cover on page 36

START-UP How to start up the drive on page 37

Preparing for installation

Lifting the drive

Unpacking the drive

3. Check the contents against

AC, Standard Drive – 550 product series

Construction (region specific)

Output current rating

Ratings and frame size

Suitable environment and enclosure

Suitable mounting location

Installing the drive

Prepare the mounting location

2. Drill the holes.

Remove the front cover

IP54 / UL type 12 R6 R1…R5

1. If hood is present: Remove screws

Mount the drive 1

Note: Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis (frame

2. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning

4. Reinstall the rubber plugs. FM

5. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language

As you install the wiring, observe the following:

• When installing control wiring, refer to the following chapters or sections, as

Power connection diagrams

X1 – Analog inputs and outputs

Power input Power output to motor

WARNING! To avoid danger, or damage to the drive, on IT systems and corner-

Power input Power output to motor

WARNING! To avoid danger, or damage to the drive, on IT systems and corner-

Disconnecting the internal EMC filter